JP7680406B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

As this type of gaming machine, one that can execute navigation effects that suggest operation modes and suggestion effects that suggest lottery results has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2020-81239 A

In gaming machines such as the one described in Patent Document 1, which use effects that suggest operation modes or lottery results, there is a problem in that malfunctions in the effects can make the suggested content difficult to understand.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can optimally perform effects that suggest operation modes and lottery results.

The gaming machine of claim 1 comprises:
A plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
A gaming machine in which a display result is derived after the variable display unit is variably displayed , and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination which is a combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units,
A derivation operation means operated by a player to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means;
a specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a specific suggestion effect that displays a specific suggestion image suggesting a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination corresponding to the type of the specific result in a game in which the result determined by the pre-determination means is any one of a plurality of types of specific results;
a special suggestion effect execution means for executing a special suggestion effect that displays a special suggestion image suggesting a special operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a special display result combination in a game in which a result determined by the pre-determining means is a special result different from the plurality of specific results;
an image data designation means for designating image data for displaying an image;
Equipped with
The image data designation means is capable of designating a layer of the image data together with the image data;
When multiple image data are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are different, images based on the respective image data are displayed overlapping each other according to the priority of the layers, and if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, an image based on any one of the multiple image data is displayed;
The device is characterized in that the same layer is specified both when designating image data for displaying a specific suggestion image when the specific suggestion performance is executed in a game in which the determination result of the pre-determination means is any one of the multiple types of specific results, and when designating image data for displaying the special suggestion image when the special suggestion performance is executed in a game in which the determination result of the pre-determination means is the special result.
According to this feature, the same layer is specified both when image data for displaying a specific suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of a specific suggestion performance, and when image data for displaying a special suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of a special suggestion performance. Therefore, even if both image data for displaying a specific suggestion image and image data for displaying a special suggestion image are specified, only an image based on one of the image data is displayed, thereby preventing images suggesting different operating modes from being displayed overlapping each other.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific features described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific features described in the claims of the present invention as well as features other than the invention-specific features.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the card unit and the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the card unit and the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reels. 13 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning roles, the symbol combinations of winning roles, and the awarding of prizes when a prize is won. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning roles, the symbol combinations of winning roles, and the awarding of prizes when a prize is won. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning roles, the symbol combinations of winning roles, and the awarding of prizes when a prize is won. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning roles, the symbol combinations of winning roles, and the awarding of prizes when a prize is won. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining combinations of winning roles that are read out as roles to be selected for each game state. FIG. This is a diagram to explain reel control when the push order role is won. A figure showing a game start command that the main control unit sends to the performance control unit when the start switch is operated. This shows the game end command that the main control unit sends to the performance control unit at the third stop. A diagram showing the types of commands that the main control board sends to the medal count control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram explaining a gaming machine installation information command. A diagram showing details of gaming machine characteristics. A diagram showing the structure of a reel information command. A diagram showing details of the reel operation information. A diagram showing the structure of a favorable zone information command. A diagram showing details of advantageous area information. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the structure of an input command. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the structure of a settlement command. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the configuration of a start command. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the structure of a termination command. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the configuration of a dispensing pulse command. A diagram showing the structure of a jackpot command. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of a hall computer signal. A diagram showing the structure of the gaming machine fraud 1 command. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing details of setting information. A diagram showing the structure of the gaming machine fraud 2 command. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing details of door information. A diagram showing the structure of the gaming machine fraud 3 command. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the configuration of a main control state command. A diagram showing the configuration of a main control board error command. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a list of main control board errors. A diagram showing the structure of a gaming machine performance information (preliminary) command. A diagram showing a list of commands from the medal count control board to the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the structure of a response command. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the configuration of a frame side information command. A diagram showing an example of communication between the main control board and the medal count control board. 13 is a diagram for explaining communication of a frame side information command. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing performed when the main control board receives a command. A diagram showing the flow of communication between the main control board and the medal count control board from power-on. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of communication when the serial number is normal. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of communication when a serial number mismatch error occurs. A figure showing an example of communication when an error occurs regarding a game medal. A figure showing an example of communication occurring before the transmission and reception of a gaming machine installation information command. FIG. 13 illustrates an example of a timeout upon power-on. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a bet amount setting operation and a settlement operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which a new bet amount setting operation is performed after a bet amount setting operation and before a response command is received. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which a new payment operation is performed after a payment operation and before a response command is received. A figure showing an example in which a new settlement operation is performed after a bet amount setting operation and before a response command is received. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which a new bet amount setting operation is performed after a settlement operation and before a response command is received. 13 is a diagram illustrating a serial number error during a bet amount setting operation. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a serial number error during a settlement operation. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a process of checking frame side information. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating display control of the number of dispensed coins. A diagram showing a role ratio monitor. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the display of a role ratio monitor. A diagram to explain the initialization process of role ratio information. 3 is an address map of a memory area used by the main control unit. 4 is an address map of an internal RAM area used by the main control unit. 2 is a diagram for explaining a register bank included in a CPU of a main control unit. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a startup process of a main control unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an initial setting process performed by a main control unit. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating an external RAM initialization process performed by the main control unit. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a setting change process performed by a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the control content of a main process performed by a main control unit. 13 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a card unit and a slot machine when a main control unit and a medal count control unit are integrated. FIG. A diagram to explain communication between the performance control unit, main control unit, medal count control unit, and CU control unit. 4 is an address map of an internal RAM area used by the main control unit. 11 is a diagram for explaining the control contents of a continuous area transfer process A performed by a main control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the control content of a continuous area transfer process B performed by a main control unit. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an LDQ instruction for reading or writing two bytes of data. 2 is a diagram showing the appearance of a game information display unit. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing external signal processing. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining the lighting state of an outer end signal lamp in the present embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams for explaining a first modified example of the lighting mode of the outer end signal lamp. 13A and 13B are diagrams for explaining a second modified example of the lighting mode of the outer end signal lamp. 13 is a flowchart showing the ball payout control pre-processing of the main control unit. This is a flowchart showing post-ball control processing by the main control unit, which executes a determination of the end of the advantageous zone based on an initial value. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a difference counter of a RAM. FIG. 13 illustrates the flow of communication between the first register bank and RAM via the CPU. A figure to explain the first pattern of determining the end of a favorable zone based on initial value settings. A figure to explain the second pattern of determining the end of the advantageous period based on initial value settings. A figure to explain the third pattern of determining the end of the advantageous period based on initial value settings. A figure to explain the fourth pattern of determining the end of a favorable zone based on initial value settings. This is a flowchart showing the post-ball output control processing of the main control unit when executing a judgment value to determine the end of the advantageous zone. A figure to explain the first pattern of determining the end of a favorable zone based on a judgment value. A figure to explain the second pattern of determining the end of a favorable zone based on a judgment value. A figure to explain the third pattern of determining the end of a favorable zone based on a judgment value. A figure to explain the fourth pattern of determining the end of a favorable period based on a judgment value. A diagram to explain command communication between the main control board and the performance control board. 13 is a diagram explaining the control contents of the update process regarding the number of uses of the difference number counter on the performance control side performed by the performance control unit. FIG. A diagram explaining the control content of the update regarding the number of grants on the performance control side performed by the performance control unit. A diagram to explain the commands transmitted from the main control board to the performance control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table for allocating modes in the AT1 state. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the settings for each mode in the AT1 state. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a special flag. A diagram showing the execution status of push order navigation. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the execution status of 7Navi. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the execution status of error notification, etc. ! A diagram showing the execution status of navigation. A block diagram showing the configuration of the performance control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the performance control main processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the performance determination process 1. A diagram showing the configurations of a performance process table, a navigation process table, and a stop time process table. 13 is a flowchart showing the control content of the performance setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of a display control process. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing the configuration of a video table and a video list. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing settings of a display layer for each video type. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of a display process. 11 is a diagram showing the configuration of a reproduction list used by the display control circuit; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display mode of a moving image based on moving image data set in a plurality of layers. 5 is a flowchart showing the control contents of a lamp control process. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing the configuration of a lamp data table and settings of lamp layers for each light emission type. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lamp layer. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating LED lighting control by a lamp layer. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of a sound control process. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the configuration of a sound designation command table and a command list. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing settings of tracks by audio type. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of a sound setting process. 11 is a diagram showing the configuration of a playlist used by a sound control unit and an audio output mode based on audio data set in multiple tracks. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the control content of the start-time fail-safe process. 13 is a flowchart showing the control content of a termination fail-safe process. A diagram showing the configuration of the navigation process table (push order navigation). A diagram showing the configuration of the navigation process table (push order navigation). A diagram showing the configuration of the navigation process table (push order navigation). A diagram showing the configuration of the navigation process table (push order navigation). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the configuration of a navigation process table (7Navi). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the configuration of a navigation process table (!Navi). FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a seven-segment display according to a second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an output port, a DG, and the like according to the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a signal switching process. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating switching of a selection signal. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an output state of a selection signal when a state transition occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an output state of a selection signal when a state transition occurs.

The following describes the form for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention based on the examples.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination which is a combination of the display results of the multiple variable display sections.
Derivation operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) operated by a player to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
A specific suggestion effect execution means executes a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) that displays a specific suggestion image (a navigation image that suggests an operation mode for stopping the main character) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination (main character) corresponding to the type of the specific result based on the result determined by the pre-determining means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
A special suggestion effect execution means for executing a special suggestion effect (7 navigation) that displays a special suggestion image (a navigation image suggesting an operation mode for stopping the 7-match lip) that suggests a special operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a special display result combination (7-match lip) based on the result of the determination by the advance determination means being a special result (7-match lip);
An image data specification means (movie list) for specifying image data (movie data) for displaying an image;
Equipped with
The image data designation means is capable of designating a layer of the image data together with the image data (moving image data);
When multiple image data (moving image data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are different, images based on each image data are displayed overlapping in accordance with the layer priority, and if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, an image based on any one of the multiple image data is displayed;
A feature of this embodiment is that the same layer (layer 50) is specified both when specifying image data (video data) for displaying a specific suggestion image (a navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character) when executing the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation), and when specifying image data for displaying the special suggestion image (a navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the 7-line up lip) when executing the special suggestion performance (7 navigation).
According to this feature, the same layer is specified both when image data for displaying a specific suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of a specific suggestion performance, and when image data for displaying a special suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of a special suggestion performance. Therefore, even if both image data for displaying a specific suggestion image and image data for displaying a special suggestion image are specified, only an image based on one of the image data is displayed, thereby preventing images suggesting different operating modes from being displayed overlapping each other.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-1,
The display area in which the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character) is displayed and the display area in which the special suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the 7-line lip) is displayed include a common display area.
According to this feature, both the specific suggestion image and the special suggestion image are displayed in a common display area, making it easier to recognize the operation modes suggested by these images and preventing images suggesting different operation modes from being overlapped and displayed in the common display area.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-1 or 1-2,
When multiple image data (video data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, only the image based on the image data that was set first or the image data that was set last among the multiple image data is displayed.
According to this feature, when multiple image data are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, it is necessary to display only the image based on the first or last specified image data among the multiple image data, thereby simplifying control.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-3,
The present invention is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) is specified for image data (video data) for displaying the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character) or the special suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the 7-line lip) from the start of displaying the specific suggestion image or the image data for displaying the special suggestion image until the display ends.
According to this feature, from the start of displaying a specific suggestion image or a special suggestion image until the end of displaying the specific suggestion image or special suggestion image, the specific suggestion image or special suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data having other layers specified.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-4,
In the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation) or the special suggestion performance (7 navigation), after starting to display the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character) or the special suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the 7-match lip), it changes to a different image depending on the establishment of the update condition (stop operation),
The method is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) as the image data for displaying the specific suggestion image or the image data for displaying the special suggestion image is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the changed image.
According to this feature, an image that has changed from a specific suggestion image or a special suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data for which other layers are specified.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-4,
In the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation) or the special suggestion performance (7 navigation), after starting to display the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character) or the special suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the 7-match lip), it changes to a different image depending on the establishment of the update condition (stop operation),
The method is characterized in that a layer having a higher priority than image data for displaying the specific suggestion image or image data for displaying the special suggestion image is specified for image data (video data) for displaying the image after the change.
According to this feature, even if image data for displaying a specific suggestion image or a special suggestion image remains, the changed image can be displayed preferentially.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is,
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination which is a combination of the display results of the multiple variable display sections.
Derivation operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) operated by a player to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
a first predetermined suggestion effect execution means for executing a first predetermined suggestion effect (! Small red navigation, ! Big red navigation) that displays a first predetermined suggestion image (! Small red navigation image, ! Big red navigation image) that suggests that the result of the determination by the pre-determination means is a first predetermined result (weak cherry, strong cherry);
a second predetermined suggestion effect execution means for executing a second predetermined suggestion effect (! Small purple navigation, ! Large purple navigation) that displays a second predetermined suggestion image (! Small purple navigation image, ! Large purple navigation image) that suggests that the result of the determination by the advance determination means is a second predetermined result (Chance eye A, Chance eye B);
An image data specification means (movie list) for specifying image data (movie data) for displaying an image;
Equipped with
The image data designation means is capable of designating a layer of the image data together with the image data (moving image data);
When multiple image data (moving image data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are different, images based on each image data are displayed overlapping in accordance with the layer priority, and if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, an image based on any one of the multiple image data is displayed;
The present invention is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) is specified when specifying image data (video data) for displaying the first predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! small red navigation, navigation image of ! big red navigation) when executing the first predetermined suggestion performance (! small red navigation, ! big red navigation), and when specifying image data for displaying the second predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! small purple navigation, navigation image of ! big purple navigation) when executing the second predetermined suggestion performance (! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation).
According to this feature, the same layer is specified both when image data for displaying a first predetermined suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of a first predetermined suggestion performance, and when image data for displaying a second predetermined suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of a second predetermined suggestion performance. Therefore, even if both image data for displaying the first predetermined suggestion image and image data for displaying the second predetermined suggestion image are specified, only an image based on one of the image data is displayed, thereby preventing images suggesting different predetermined results from being displayed overlapping each other.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 2-1,
The display area in which the first predetermined suggestion image (the navigation image of ! small red navigation, the navigation image of ! big red navigation) is displayed and the display area in which the second predetermined suggestion image (the navigation image of ! small purple navigation, the navigation image of ! big purple navigation) are displayed include a common display area.
According to this feature, both the first predetermined suggestion image and the second predetermined suggestion image are displayed in a common display area, making it easier to recognize the different predetermined results suggested by these images, while preventing images suggesting different predetermined results from being displayed overlapping each other in the common display area.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 2-1 or 2-2,
When multiple image data (video data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, only the image based on the image data that was set first or the image data that was set last among the multiple image data is displayed.
According to this feature, when multiple image data are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, it is necessary to display only the image based on the first or last specified image data among the multiple image data, thereby simplifying control.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-3,
The display device is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) is specified for image data (video data) for displaying the first predetermined suggested image (navigation image of ! small red navi, navigation image of ! big red navi) or the second predetermined suggested image (navigation image of ! small purple navi, navigation image of ! big purple navi) from the start of displaying the first predetermined suggested image or the image data for displaying the second predetermined suggested image until the display is ended.
According to this feature, the first specified suggestion image or the second specified suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data for which other layers are specified, from the time the display of the first specified suggestion image or the second specified suggestion image is started to the time the display is ended.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-4,
In the first predetermined suggestion performance (! Small red navigation, ! Big red navigation) or the second predetermined suggestion performance (! Small purple navigation, ! Big purple navigation), after starting to display the first predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! Small red navigation, navigation image of ! Big red navigation) or the second predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! Small purple navigation, navigation image of ! Big purple navigation), it is changed to a different image when an update condition (stop operation) is satisfied,
The method is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) as the image data for displaying the first specified suggestive image or the image data for displaying the second specified suggestive image is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the changed image.
According to this feature, an image that has changed from the first predetermined suggestion image or the second predetermined suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data for which other layers are specified.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-4,
In the first predetermined suggestion performance (! Small red navigation, ! Big red navigation) or the second predetermined suggestion performance (! Small purple navigation, ! Big purple navigation), after starting to display the first predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! Small red navigation, navigation image of ! Big red navigation) or the second predetermined suggestion image (navigation image of ! Small purple navigation, navigation image of ! Big purple navigation), it is changed to a different image when an update condition (stop operation) is satisfied,
The method is characterized in that a layer having a higher priority than the image data for displaying the first specified suggestion image or the image data for displaying the second specified suggestion image is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the image after the change.
According to this feature, even if image data for displaying the first predetermined suggestive image or the second predetermined suggestive image remains, the changed image can be displayed with priority.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination which is a combination of the display results of the multiple variable display sections.
Derivation operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) operated by a player to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
A first specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a first specific suggestion effect (! Small red navigation) that displays a first specific suggestion image (! Small red navigation image) that suggests the possibility that the result of the determination by the pre-determination means is a specific result (strong cherry);
A second specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a second specific suggestion effect (! Big Red Navigation) that displays a second specific suggestion image (! Big Red Navigation navigation image) that suggests that the possibility that the result of the determination by the pre-determination means is a specific result (strong cherry) is higher than when the first specific suggestion effect (! Small Red Navigation) is executed;
An image data specification means (movie list) for specifying image data (movie data) for displaying an image;
Equipped with
The image data designation means is capable of designating a layer of the image data together with the image data (moving image data);
When multiple image data (moving image data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are different, images based on each image data are displayed overlapping in accordance with the layer priority, and if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, an image based on any one of the multiple image data is displayed;
This is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) is specified when specifying image data (video data) for displaying the first specific suggestion image (navigation image of ! small red navigation) when executing the first specific suggestion performance (! small red navigation), and when specifying image data for displaying the second specific suggestion image (navigation image of ! big red navigation) when executing the second specific suggestion performance (! big red navigation).
According to this feature, the same layer is specified both when image data for displaying the first specific suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of the first specific suggestion performance, and when image data for displaying the second specific suggestion image is specified in conjunction with the execution of the second specific suggestion performance. Therefore, even if both image data for displaying the first specific suggestion image and image data for displaying the second specific suggestion image are specified, only an image based on one of the image data is displayed, so that although both suggest the possibility of a predetermined result being achieved, images suggesting different possibilities are prevented from being displayed overlapping each other.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1,
The display area in which the first specific suggestion image (the navigation image of a small red navigation symbol!) is displayed and the display area in which the second specific suggestion image (the navigation image of a big red navigation symbol!) is displayed include a common display area.
According to this feature, both the first specific suggestion image and the second specific suggestion image are displayed in a common display area, making it easier to recognize that the possibilities suggested by these images are different, and preventing images suggesting different possibilities from being displayed overlapping each other in the common display area.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1 or 3-2,
When multiple image data (video data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, only the image based on the image data that was set first or the image data that was set last among the multiple image data is displayed.
According to this feature, when multiple image data are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, it is necessary to display only the image based on the first or last specified image data among the multiple image data, thereby simplifying control.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-3,
The present invention is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) is specified for image data (video data) for displaying the first specific suggestion image (navigation image with a small red navigation of !) or the second specific suggestion image (navigation image with a big red navigation of !) from the start of displaying the first specific suggestion image or the end of displaying the image.
According to this feature, the first specific suggestion image or the second specific suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data having other layers specified, from the time the display of the first specific suggestion image or the second specific suggestion image is started to the time the display is ended.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-4,
In the first specific suggestion performance (! Small red navigation) or the second specific suggestion performance (! Big red navigation), after starting to display the first specific suggestion image (navigation image of! Small red navigation) or the second specific suggestion image (navigation image of! Big red navigation), it is changed to a different image when an update condition (stop operation) is satisfied,
The method is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) as the image data for displaying the first specific suggestion image or the image data for displaying the second specific suggestion image is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the changed image.
According to this feature, an image that has changed from the first specific suggestion image or the second specific suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data for which other layers are specified.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-4,
In the first specific suggestion performance (! Small red navigation) or the second specific suggestion performance (! Big red navigation), after starting to display the first specific suggestion image (navigation image of! Small red navigation) or the second specific suggestion image (navigation image of! Big red navigation), it is changed to a different image when an update condition (stop operation) is satisfied,
The method is characterized in that a layer having a higher priority than the image data for displaying the first specific suggestion image or the image data for displaying the second specific suggestion image is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the image after the change.
According to this feature, even if image data for displaying the first specific suggestion image or the second specific suggestion image remains, the changed image can be displayed preferentially.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination which is a combination of the display results of the multiple variable display sections.
Derivation operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) operated by a player to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
A specific suggestion effect execution means executes a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) that displays a specific suggestion image (a navigation image that suggests an operation mode for stopping the main character) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination (main character) corresponding to the type of the specific result based on the result determined by the pre-determining means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
An image data specification means (movie list) for specifying image data (movie data) for displaying an image;
Equipped with
The image data designation means is capable of designating a layer of the image data together with the image data (moving image data);
When multiple image data (moving image data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are different, images based on each image data are displayed overlapping in accordance with the layer priority, and if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, an image based on any one of the multiple image data is displayed;
When executing the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation), even if the specific operation mode suggested according to the type of specific result (push order role) differs, the same layer (layer 50) is specified for image data (video data) for displaying the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character).
According to this feature, when a specific suggestion performance is executed, even if the specific operation mode suggested depending on the type of specific result differs, the same layer is specified for the image data for displaying the specific suggestion image, so that even if multiple image data are specified for displaying specific suggestion images suggesting different specific operation modes, only an image based on one image data is displayed, thereby preventing images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other.

The gaming machine of aspect 4-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 4-1,
Even if the specific operation mode suggested depending on the type of specific result (push order role) differs, the display area in which the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main role) is displayed includes a common display area.
According to this feature, even if the specific operation manner suggested depending on the type of specific result differs, the specific suggestion images are displayed in a common display area, making it easier to recognize the operation manner suggested by these images and preventing images suggesting different operation manners from being overlapped and displayed in the common display area.

The gaming machine of aspect 4-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 4-1 or 4-2,
When multiple image data (video data) are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, only the image based on the image data that was set first or the image data that was set last among the multiple image data is displayed.
According to this feature, when multiple image data are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, it is necessary to display only the image based on the first or last specified image data among the multiple image data, thereby simplifying control.

The gaming machine of aspect 4-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 4-1 to 4-3,
A feature of this invention is that the same layer (layer 50) is specified for the image data (video data) for displaying the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character) from the start of displaying the specific suggestion image to the end of displaying the image.
According to this feature, the specific suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data for which other layers are specified, from the time the display of the specific suggestion image starts until the display ends.

The gaming machine of aspect 4-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 4-1 to 4-4,
In the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation), after starting to display the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character), it changes to a different image when the update condition (stop operation) is established,
The present invention is characterized in that the same layer (layer 50) as the image data for displaying the specific suggestion image is specified for the image data (moving image data) for displaying the image after the change.
According to this feature, an image that has changed from a specific suggestion image can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data for which other layers are specified.

The gaming machine of aspect 4-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 4-1 to 4-4,
In the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation), after starting to display the specific suggestion image (navigation image suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character), it changes to a different image when the update condition (stop operation) is established,
The present invention is characterized in that a layer having a higher priority than image data for displaying the specific suggestion image is specified for image data (video data) for displaying the image after the change.
According to this feature, even if image data for displaying a specific suggestion image remains, the changed image can be displayed with priority.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of the display results of the multiple variable display sections.
Derivation operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) operated by a player to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Audio output means (speakers 53, 54) for outputting audio;
A specific suggestion performance execution means executes a specific suggestion performance (push order navigation) that outputs a specific suggestion sound (a navigation sound that suggests an operation mode for stopping the main character) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination (main character) corresponding to the type of the specific result based on the result determined by the pre-determining means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
A voice data designation means (sound designation command) for designating voice data for outputting voice;
Equipped with
the audio data designation means is capable of designating a track of the audio data together with the audio data;
When multiple pieces of audio data are designated, if the tracks of the multiple pieces of audio data are different, audio based on the audio data designated for each track is synthesized and output, and if the tracks of the multiple pieces of audio data are the same, audio based on any one of the multiple pieces of audio data is output,
When executing the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation), even if the specific operation mode suggested according to the type of specific result (push order role) differs, the same track (track 2) is specified for the audio data for outputting the specific suggestion sound (navigation sound suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character).
According to this feature, when a specific suggestion performance is executed, even if the specific operation mode suggested depending on the type of specific result differs, the same track is specified for the audio data for outputting the specific suggestion sound, so that even if multiple audio data are specified for outputting specific suggestion sounds suggesting different specific operation modes, only audio based on one audio data is output, thereby preventing sounds suggesting different operation modes from being output simultaneously.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 5-1,
When multiple audio data are specified, if the tracks of the multiple audio data are the same, only the audio based on the first or last specified audio data among the multiple audio data is output.
According to this feature, when multiple audio data are specified, if the tracks of the multiple audio data are the same, it is only necessary to output audio based on the first or last specified audio data among the multiple audio data, thereby simplifying control.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 5-1 or 5-2,
The volume can be specified for each audio data.
When executing the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation), even if the specific operation mode suggested according to the type of specific result (push order role) differs, the same volume is specified for the audio data for outputting the specific suggestion sound (navigation sound suggesting the operation mode for stopping the main character).
According to this feature, when a specific suggestion performance is executed, even if the specific operation mode suggested according to the type of specific result differs, the volume of the specific suggestion sound does not change, making the specific suggestion sound easier to hear.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 5-1 to 5-3,
A sound based on the sound data corresponding to the displayed image is output, and
A feature of this system is that when specifying audio data corresponding to images that are displayed exclusively (for example, a push order navigation image and an ! navigation image), the same track (track 2) is specified.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent sounds corresponding to images that are exclusively displayed from being output at the same time.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination which is a combination of the display results of the multiple variable display sections.
Derivation operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) operated by a player to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
A predetermined light-emitting unit (performance effect LED 52);
a specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) by illuminating the predetermined light-emitting section (effect effect LED 52) in a specific suggestion pattern (light-emitting pattern suggesting an operation mode for stopping the main character) suggesting a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination (main character) corresponding to the type of specific result based on the result determined by the pre-determination means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
A light emission data setting means (lamp layer) for setting light emission data (lamp data) that defines a light emission pattern of the predetermined light-emitting unit (performance effect LED 52);
A light emission data designation means (lamp command) for designating light emission data (lamp data) to be set in the light emission data setting means (lamp layer);
Equipped with
The light emission data setting means (lamp layer) includes a plurality of setting areas (lamp layers 1 to 4),
The light emission data designation means (lamp command) can designate a setting area (lamp layer) of the light emission data together with the light emission data,
When multiple light emission data (lamp data) are specified, if the setting areas (lamp layers) of the multiple light emission data are different, the predetermined light emission unit (performance effect LED 52) is illuminated based on the light emission data set in the setting area with a high priority, and if the setting areas of the multiple light emission data are the same, the predetermined light emission unit is illuminated in a light emission pattern based on any one of the multiple light emission data.
When executing the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation), even if the specific operation mode suggested depending on the type of specific result (push order role) differs, the same setting area (lamp layer 2) is specified for the light emission data (lamp data) that defines the specific suggestion pattern (light emission pattern that suggests the operation mode for stopping the main role).
According to this feature, when a specific suggestion performance is executed, even if the specific operation pattern suggested depending on the type of specific result differs, the same setting area is specified for the light-emitting data that defines the specific suggestion pattern, so that even if multiple light-emitting data that define specific suggestion patterns that suggest different specific operation modes are specified, the light-emitting pattern will be based on one light-emitting data, thereby preventing the operation mode suggested by the light-emitting pattern from becoming difficult to recognize.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
When multiple pieces of light emission data (lamp data) are specified, if the setting areas (lamp layers) of the multiple pieces of light emission data are the same, the specified light-emitting section (performance effect LED 52) is illuminated in a light emission pattern based on the first or last specified light-emitting data among the multiple pieces of light emission data.
According to this feature, when multiple light emission data are specified, if the setting areas of the multiple light emission data are the same, the light emission pattern can be based on the first or last specified light emission data among the multiple light emission data, thereby simplifying control.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1 or 6-2,
When executing the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation), if the specific operation mode suggested according to the type of specific result (push order role) differs, light emission data (lamp data) is set which defines the light emission pattern in which different light emission parts among the specified light emission parts (performance effect LED 52) emit light.
According to this feature, when a specific suggestion performance is executed, if the specific operation mode suggested according to the type of specific result differs, different light-emitting elements will emit light, making it possible to easily recognize the operation mode from the difference in the light-emitting elements.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination which is a combination of the display results of the multiple variable display sections.
Derivation operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) operated by a player to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
A special suggestion effect execution means for executing a special suggestion effect (7 navigation) that suggests a special operation mode (stop operation in the pull-in range of the black 7 pattern) of the derivation operation means for deriving a special display result combination (7-matching lip) based on the result of the determination by the advance determination means being a special result (7-matching lip, 7-mismatching lip);
Equipped with
When the determination result of the pre-determination means is a predetermined result (watermelon), a predetermined display result combination (watermelon) corresponding to the predetermined result is derived by operating the derivation operation means in a predetermined operation mode (stop operation in the reel-in range of the watermelon symbol) different from the special operation mode, and the predetermined display result combination is not derived by operating the derivation operation means in the special operation mode (stop operation in the reel-in range of the black 7 symbol);
Based on an operation to start the variable display of the variable display section, it is determined whether or not a decision has been made to execute the special suggestion effect (7 Navi) and whether or not the result of the decision made by the pre-determination means is the specified result (watermelon), and the special suggestion effect is executed on the condition that a decision has been made to execute the special suggestion effect and it has been determined that the result of the decision made by the pre-determination means is not the specified result.
According to this feature, even if a malfunction occurs such that the result determined by the pre-determination means is a predetermined result, and even if it has been decided that a special suggestion effect should be executed, the special suggestion effect will not be executed, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the derivation operation means is operated in a special operation mode suggested by the erroneously executed special suggestion effect, making it impossible to derive a predetermined display result combination corresponding to the predetermined result.

The gaming machine of aspect 7-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 7-1,
When the result of the determination by the advance determination means is the first special result (7-match lip) among the special results, the derivation operation means is operated in the special operation mode (stop operation in the pull-in range of the black 7 pattern) to derive the special display result combination (7-match lip), and when the result of the determination by the advance determination means is the second special result (7-mismatch lip) among the special results, a non-special display result combination (7-mismatch lip) different from the special display result combination is derived.
It is characterized in that it determines whether or not to execute the special suggestion effect (7 navi) whether the result of the determination by the pre-determination means is the first special result (7-match lip) or the second special result (7-mismatch lip).
According to this feature, the special suggestion effect can be executed both in the case of the first special result from which a special display result combination can be derived, and in the case of the second special result from which a special display result combination cannot be derived, thereby increasing the opportunities for the special suggestion effect and creating the expectation that a special display result combination will be derived by executing the special suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 7-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 7-2,
When the determination result of the pre-determination means is the first special result (7's replay) or the second special result (7's mismatched replay), if the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the special operation mode (stop operation within the reel-in range of the black 7 symbol), neither the special display result combination (7's replay) nor the non-special display result combination (7's mismatched replay) is derived, but a display result combination (any replay) resulting in a winning combination is derived.
According to this feature, when the first special result or the second special result is obtained, if the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the special operation mode, neither a special display result combination nor a non-special display result combination is derived, but a display result combination that results in a win is derived, so that even if the special suggestion performance is not executed when the first special result or the second special result is obtained, the player will not be disadvantaged.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination which is a combination of the display results of the multiple variable display sections.
Derivation operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) operated by a player to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
A specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination (main role) corresponding to the type of specific result based on the result determined by the pre-determining means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
A special suggestion effect execution means for executing a special suggestion effect (7 navigation) that suggests a special operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a special display result combination (7-match lip) based on the result of the determination by the pre-determination means being a special result (7-match lip, 7-mismatch lip);
Equipped with
Based on an operation to start the variable display of the variable display section, it is determined whether or not a decision has been made to execute the special suggestion effect (7 navigation) and whether or not a decision has been made to execute the specific suggestion effect (push order navigation), and the special suggestion effect is executed on the condition that it is determined that a decision has been made to execute the special suggestion effect and that a decision has not been made to execute the specific suggestion effect.
According to this feature, even if a malfunction has determined that a specific suggestion effect should be executed, and even if a special suggestion effect should be executed, the special suggestion effect will not be executed, thereby preventing effects suggesting different operating modes from being executed in combination.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 8-1,
When the result of the determination by the advance determination means is the first special result (7-match lip) among the special results, the derivation operation means is operated in the special operation mode (stop operation in the pull-in range of the black 7 pattern) to derive the special display result combination (7-match lip), and when the result of the determination by the advance determination means is the second special result (7-mismatch lip) among the special results, a non-special display result combination (7-mismatch lip) different from the special display result combination is derived.
It is characterized in that it determines whether or not to execute the special suggestion effect (7 navi) whether the result of the determination by the pre-determination means is the first special result (7-match lip) or the second special result (7-mismatch lip).
According to this feature, the special suggestion effect can be executed both in the case of the first special result from which a special display result combination can be derived, and in the case of the second special result from which a special display result combination cannot be derived, thereby increasing the opportunities for the special suggestion effect and creating the expectation that a special display result combination will be derived by executing the special suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 8-2,
When the determination result of the pre-determination means is the first special result (7's replay) or the second special result (7's mismatched replay), if the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the special operation mode (stop operation within the reel-in range of the black 7 symbol), neither the special display result combination (7's replay) nor the non-special display result combination (7's mismatched replay) is derived, but a display result combination (any replay) resulting in a winning combination is derived.
According to this feature, when the first special result or the second special result is obtained, if the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the special operation mode, neither a special display result combination nor a non-special display result combination is derived, but a display result combination that results in a win is derived, so that even if the special suggestion performance is not executed when the first special result or the second special result is obtained, the player will not be disadvantaged.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 8-1 to 8-3,
When the result of the determination by the pre-determination means is any one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles), the derivation operation means is operated in a specific operation mode corresponding to the type of the specific result, thereby deriving a display result combination (main role) corresponding to the type of the specific result;
When the result of the determination by the pre-determination means is any of a plurality of specific results (push order roles), it is determined that the specific suggestion performance (push order navigation) will be executed.
According to this feature, by executing the specific suggestion presentation, it is possible to derive a display result combination that corresponds to the type of specific result.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) for playing games,
A disablement state control means for controlling the game to a disabled state (error state, setting change state, setting confirmation state) in which game progress is disabled;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
a disabled state notifying means for displaying a disabled state corresponding image (an error image, an image during setting change, an image during setting confirmation) corresponding to the disabled state (an error state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state) on the image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
Equipped with
This device is characterized in that when a game is started based on a start operation for starting the game, a process is executed to erase the images corresponding to the disabled state (error image, image indicating that settings are being changed, image indicating that settings are being confirmed).
According to this feature, even if the disabled state has ended but the image corresponding to the disabled state continues to be displayed due to a malfunction, the image corresponding to the disabled state is erased when game play begins based on the start operation, thereby preventing the presentation that accompanies the progress of the game from being hindered.

The gaming machine of aspect 9-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-1,
a disablement state flag setting means for setting a disablement state flag (an error flag, a setting change flag, a setting confirmation flag) when the control is made to the disablement state (an error state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state),
When a game is started based on the start operation, it is determined whether or not the disabling flag (error flag, setting change in progress flag, setting confirmation in progress flag) is set, and when it is determined that the disabling flag is not set, a process is executed to erase the image corresponding to the disabling state (error image, setting change in progress image, setting confirmation in progress image).
According to this feature, even if the disabled state corresponding image is controlled to be in the disabled state, it is possible to prevent the image from being erased.

The gaming machine of aspect 9-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-2,
the disabled state control means terminates control of the disabled state when a release condition is satisfied in the disabled state (error state, setting change state, setting confirmation state),
The disabling flag setting means is characterized in that it clears the disabling flag (error flag, setting change flag, setting confirmation flag) when a release condition is met in the disabling state (error state, setting change state, setting confirmation state).
According to this feature, the disabling flag is cleared when the release condition that ends the disabled state is met, so that it is possible to properly determine whether or not the disabled state has ended when game play is started based on the start operation.

The gaming machine of aspect 9-4 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-2 or 9-3,
the disabled state control means terminates control of the disabled state when a release condition is satisfied in the disabled state (error state, setting change state, setting confirmation state),
When the release condition is met in the disabled state (error state, setting change state, setting confirmation state), a process is executed to erase the image corresponding to the disabled state (error image, image during setting change, image during setting confirmation).
According to this feature, the image corresponding to the disabled state is erased when the release condition for ending the disabled state is met, so that the image corresponding to the disabled state can be erased appropriately.

A gaming machine according to aspect 9-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 9-1 to 9-4,
When a game is started based on the start operation, a process for erasing the images corresponding to the disabled state (error image, image in progress of changing settings, image in progress of checking settings) is executed before the processes related to the progress of the game (presentation determination process 1, presentation setting process).
According to this feature, when a game is started based on a start operation, the image corresponding to the disabled state is erased before processing related to the progress of the game, so that the image corresponding to the disabled state does not affect the presentation that accompanies the progress of the game.

A gaming machine according to aspect 9-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 9-1 to 9-5,
a start control information transmitting means for transmitting control information (a game start command) indicating the start of a game when the game is started based on the start operation;
The device is characterized in that, based on receiving control information (a game start command) indicating the start of the game, a process is executed to erase the images corresponding to the disabled state (error image, image in progress of changing settings, image in progress of checking settings).
According to this feature, the disabled state corresponding image can be erased upon receipt of control information indicating the start of a game.

The gaming machine of aspect 9-7 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 9-1 to 9-6,
An image setting area (layer) in which image data (moving image data) for displaying an image is set,
The image setting area (layer) includes a plurality of setting areas, and when image data (moving image data) is set in each of the different setting areas, images based on the image data set in each setting area are displayed in an overlapping manner in accordance with the priority of the setting areas;
The image data (video data) for displaying the disabled state corresponding images (error image, image during setting change, image during setting confirmation) is characterized in that it is set in a setting area (layer 20) having a higher priority than image data for displaying performance images.
According to this feature, when the disabled state is controlled, the disabled state corresponding image can be displayed with priority over the performance image.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination which is a combination of the display results of the multiple variable display sections.
Derivation operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) operated by a player to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
A specific suggestion effect execution means executes a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) that displays a specific suggestion image (navigation image) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means to derive a display result combination (main role) corresponding to the type of specific result based on the result determined by the pre-determining means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
Equipped with
When a game is started based on a start operation for starting the game, a process for erasing the specific suggestion image (navigation image) is executed.
According to this feature, even if a specific suggestion image from a previous game continues to be displayed due to a malfunction, the specific suggestion image is erased when a game is started based on a start operation, thereby preventing the presentation that accompanies the progress of the game from being hindered.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A plurality of variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 2), a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination which is a combination of the display results of the multiple variable display sections.
Derivation operation means (8L, 8C, 8R) operated by a player to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
A specific suggestion effect execution means executes a specific suggestion effect (push order navigation) that displays a specific suggestion image (navigation image) that suggests a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means to derive a display result combination (main role) corresponding to the type of specific result based on the result determined by the pre-determining means being one of a plurality of types of specific results (push order roles);
Equipped with
The method is characterized in that, based on the result of display being derived on all the variable display sections, a process for erasing the specific suggestion image (navigation image) is executed.
According to this feature, the specific suggestion image is erased based on the display results being derived on all of the variable display sections, so that the specific suggestion image does not continue to be displayed even when the game has ended, thereby preventing the presentation that accompanies the progress of the game from being hindered.

The gaming machine of aspect 10-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 10-1 or 10-2,
The display device is characterized in that a process for updating or erasing the specific suggestion image (navigation image) is executed based on the operation of a derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display section.
According to this feature, the specific suggestion image can be updated or erased every time the derivation operation means is operated in the suggested operation manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 10-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 10-1 to 10-3,
The specific suggestion image (navigation image) includes a plurality of types of suggestion images corresponding to the types of the specific results,
Regardless of the type of suggestion image that is being displayed, the process for erasing the specific suggestion image (navigation image) is common.
According to this feature, regardless of the type of suggestion image being displayed, the specific suggestion image is erased by a common process, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 10-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 10-1 to 10-4,
The specific suggestion image (navigation image) includes a plurality of types of suggestion images corresponding to the types of the specific results,
Executing a process for erasing the specific suggestion image based on the fact that the derived operation means is operated in an operation manner other than the operation manner suggested by the specific suggestion image (navigation image);
A feature of this invention is that when the derived operation means is operated in an operation manner other than the operation manner suggested by the specific suggestion image (navigation image), the process for erasing the specific suggestion image is common regardless of what type of suggestion image is displayed.
According to this feature, when the derived operation means is operated in an operation manner other than the operation manner suggested by the specific suggestion image, the specific suggestion image is erased by common processing regardless of what type of suggestion image is displayed, thereby reducing program capacity.

[Configuration of Slot Machine]
FIG. 1 is a front view of a card unit and a slot machine.

Referring to FIG. 1, a slot machine 2 is installed on each of the game islands (not shown) arranged in a game hall (hall), and a card unit (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as CU) 3, which is an example of a gaming device, is installed in one-to-one correspondence with the slot machine 2 at a predetermined lateral position on the slot machine 2. The card unit is also called a "game medal lending device."

The slot machine 2 is a slot machine in which the player does not take a medal and insert it into an insertion slot, and medals are not paid out to the player. Therefore, the gaming value is added directly to credits (gaming points that can be used in games (hereinafter referred to as "gaming medals" or simply "medals")) according to the lending operation, etc.

Not only does it not have a medal insertion port or payout port like conventional slot machines, but it also does not require a medal selector, hopper, or other device for controlling inserted medals. Slot machines like this, which do not require any medals at all, are called "controlled gaming machines" or "medalless slot machines."

Figure 1 shows slot machine 2 as viewed from the front (front) side. Inside slot machine 2, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as left reel, center reel, and right reel) with multiple types of symbols arranged around the periphery are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen through transparent window 3W.

Each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotated by a corresponding reel motor 32L, 32C, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 2. This causes the symbols on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to be displayed in a continuously changing manner in the transparent window 3W. In addition, by stopping the rotation of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed in the transparent window 3W as a display result.

Reel LEDs 55, as shown in FIG. 2, are provided inside reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Reel LEDs 55 illuminate reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. 1, from behind. Reel LEDs 55 are made up of 12 LEDs corresponding to the three consecutive symbols on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can illuminate each symbol independently.

A display area of the liquid crystal display 51 is located in front of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (on the player's side). The liquid crystal display 51 is designed so that each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be seen from the player's side through the transparent area corresponding to the transparent window 3W of the display area and the transparent window 3W.

Figure 3 shows the arrangement of symbols on the reels. As shown in Figure 3, each reel has multiple identifiable symbols ("Character", "Black 7", "White 7", "BAR", "Replay", "Plum", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Moon", and "Orange") arranged in a specific order.

The protruding portion 95 protrudes toward the front side of the slot machine 2. By protruding the protruding portion 95 toward the front side of the slot machine 2, an upper surface 96 is formed on the protruding portion 95. The MAXBET switch 6, 1BET switch 20, bet number clear switch 21, performance switch 57, and game information display section 90 are provided on the upper surface 96 of the protruding portion 95, and the start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and counting button 10 are provided on the front side of the protruding portion 95. The upper surface 96 may be an inclined surface that gently slopes from the back to the front from a position below the transparent window 3W.

The start switch 7 is a switch for starting the reels to spin after the bet amount has been set. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are switches for stopping the reels while they are spinning, with 8L corresponding to the left reel, 8C corresponding to the middle reel, and 8R corresponding to the right reel. The count button 10 is a switch that is operated to count the number of credits (number of game medals) and convert it into the number of medals held.

The door open detection switch 25 shown in FIG. 2 is provided on the inside of the front door of the slot machine 2. The door open detection switch 25 detects the open state of the front door. Furthermore, a power supply box is provided inside the housing. The setting key switch 37 and the reset/setting switch 38 shown in FIG. 2 are provided on the front of the power supply box. The setting key switch 37 switches to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The reset/setting switch 38 normally functions as a reset switch for releasing an error state or a play stop state, and in the setting change state functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of the winning probability (ball payout rate) of the internal lottery. The setting value display 24 shown in FIG. 2 is provided on the inside of the front door of the slot machine 2.

In this embodiment, the first of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to stop after they have started spinning is called the first stopped reel, and its stop is called the first stop. Similarly, the second reel to stop is called the second stopped reel, and its stop is called the second stop, and the third reel to stop is called the third stopped reel, and its stop is called the third stop, final stop, or all reels stop.

Next, the flow of the game in the slot machine 2 will be explained. When playing a game in the slot machine 2, first, a lending operation is performed in the CU 3 to secure credits (game medals). This lending operation corresponds to a two-step operation in a slot machine that uses a conventional medal payout method: "lend medal operation" and "manually inserting the loaned medal into the insertion slot."

When the MAX BET switch 6 is operated while credits are present, the maximum number of bets within the credit range is added and the number of credits is reduced by the additional amount. When the specified number of bets is set, the pay line L becomes active and operation of the start switch 7 becomes active, i.e., the game can be started.

The winning line here is a line that is set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed in the transparent window 3W of each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line is the winning line L that is set across the symbols lined up on the bottom row of reel 2L, the middle row of reel 2C, and the bottom row of reel 2R.

When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R will spin, and the symbols on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R will change continuously. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, and 2R will stop, and the display result will be derived and displayed in the transparent window 3W.

One game ends when all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R come to a stop, and a win occurs when a predetermined combination of symbols stops on the winning line L as the display result of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When a win occurs, the player is awarded a number of points determined according to the win. These points are added to the credits.

Credits can be counted and converted into owned medals by operating the count button 10. By converting them into owned medals, it becomes possible to record the owned medals on a card when the game ends.

In this embodiment, when the count button 10 is pressed once, all of the game balls currently owned by the player are counted, regardless of how long the button is pressed (whether it is pressed and held or not). However, this is not limited to the above, and the counting operation may be repeatedly performed according to how long the count button 10 is pressed (for example, a counting process of 50 coins is performed every time the count button is pressed for 0.3 seconds). Also, regardless of how long the button is pressed, a predetermined number (for example, 50 coins) of game balls may be counted into the medals held when the button is pressed once.

A credit display segment 7S and speakers 53 and 54 are provided at the top of the LCD display 51. The credit display segment 7S is made up of five 7-segment segments and displays the number of credits held by the player. By being provided at the top of the slot machine 2, the credit display segment 7S can display the number of credits stored in the slot machine 2 to players other than the player playing with the slot machine 2 or to store clerks. The speakers 53 and 54 emit sound effects that match the presentation.

As described above, the MAXBET switch 6 is a switch used to maximize the number of bets. In other words, the MAXBET switch 6 is used to progress the game. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the MAXBET switch 6 is also used for presentation purposes. In other words, when the same operation is performed on the MAXBET switch 6, the process executed is changed depending on whether the operation is a valid operation or an invalid operation. In this way, the MAXBET switch 6 is used both for the progress of the game and for presentation purposes.

The valid and invalid operations of the MAXBET switch 6 will be described below. The valid operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is an operation performed on the MAXBET switch 6 in a bet setting status in which the bet number can be set. The bet setting status is, for example, a period in which a bet number can be accepted, and is a "status in which one or more credits remain and a bet number of less than three coins is set" or a "status in which one or more credits remain and a bet number is not set". When the MAXBET switch is operated in a "status in which one or more credits remain and a bet number of less than three coins is set in the BET counter", the bet number is set to the remaining credits, with a maximum of three coins. When the MAXBET switch is operated in a "status in which one or more credits remain and a bet number is not set", the bet number is set to the remaining credits, with a maximum of three coins. In this way, the MAXBET switch 6 is used as a switch for proceeding with the game, in which a bet number is set by performing a valid operation in a bet setting status.

On the other hand, the invalid operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is an operation performed on the MAXBET switch 6 in a bet setting impossible situation where it is not possible to set a bet. The bet setting impossible situation includes "the period from the start to the end of the game". In other words, during the period when the reels are rotating and the game is being played, the operation on the MAXBET switch 6 is an invalid operation. In this embodiment, in the slot machine 2, an operation prompting an invalid operation of the MAXBET switch 6 may be displayed during the period when the reels are rotating. At this time, when the player performs an invalid operation of the MAXBET switch 6, a performance is performed in which an image suggesting the degree of advantage is displayed. In this way, the MAXBET switch 6 in this embodiment is used as a trigger for displaying a performance image when an invalid operation is performed in a bet setting impossible situation. In other words, the MAXBET switch 6 is used for the progress of the game during the period when valid operations are accepted, and is used for performance during the period when invalid operations are accepted.

[Card unit configuration]
The configuration of the CU 3 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 1. This CU 3 accepts visitor cards (also called general cards) with a prepaid function, which are gaming storage media issued to general players who are not registered as members, and member cards, which are gaming storage media issued to member players who are registered as members of the gaming facility. The visitor cards and member cards are composed of IC cards.

CU3, which accepts these cards, has the function of converting the gaming value owned by the player, which is specified by the stored information on the card (for example, prepaid balance, number of medals held, or number of medals saved (also called "saved balls"), etc.), into the number of credits (number of gaming medals).

The front side of CU3 is provided with a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 formed to protrude forward from the front of the device, and a card insertion/ejection slot 309 for inserting a member card or visitor card. A member card or visitor card inserted into this card insertion/ejection slot 309 is received by a card reader/writer (not shown), and the information recorded on the card is read.

On the surface of the aforementioned extension 305 facing the player, there are provided a display 312, a replay button 319 for executing a replay game using the membership card ID (also simply called the card ID or C-ID) recorded on the membership card when the membership card is accepted, and the number of medals (number of balls) specified by the membership card ID, and an IR photosensitive unit 320 that receives an infrared signal from a remote control (not shown) held by an attendant at the game center, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs it.

The display 312 is capable of displaying the prepaid balance (also called the card balance or simply the balance) recorded on the inserted gaming recording medium (card), the number of medals held, the number of credits (number of gaming medals), and various other information, and its surface is made up of a transparent touch panel. It is configured so that various operations can be input by touching with a finger the various display items shown on the display section of the display 312.

When the medal count button 324 is operated, a portion of the medal count recorded on the inserted card is withdrawn and converted into credits (number of game medals). When the replay button 319 is operated, if the inserted card stores the number of medals the player has acquired, a portion of the medal count is withdrawn and converted into credits, and the player can play on the slot machine 2 based on the converted credits.

On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of medals held is not stored, and the saved medals are stored in the hall management computer or the like, some of the saved medals are withdrawn and converted into credits, making it possible to play on the slot machine 2. In other words, if both saved medals and saved medals are stored in association with the inserted card, the saved medals are withdrawn first. A dedicated medal payout button for withdrawing saved medals may be provided in addition to the replay button 319, and the replay button 319 may be a dedicated button for withdrawing saved medals.

The "number of credits (number of game medals)" here is data that can be used to set the bet amount and can also be converted into the "number of medals held." The "number of credits" is generated in exchange for withdrawing the balance on a prepaid card, the number of medals held, or the number of medals saved.

The "number of medals held" is a numerical conversion of the number of credits (number of medals played) that a player owns as a result of playing a slot machine. This "number of medals held" is stored in a manner that allows it to be identified by the player's card. The number of medals held may also be managed by a management device for managing the number of medals held that is set up in the gaming facility.

"Number of saved medals (number of saved balls)" refers to the number of medals that have been deposited at the amusement facility. The number of medals that a player has won while playing is managed as the number of saved medals during the day, but from the day after they were won, it is managed as the "number of saved medals." In other words, the number of credits (number of game medals) that a player has won and counted at the amusement facility on the day is called "points," and the number of medals that a player has won and deposited at the amusement facility on the previous day or earlier is called the "number of saved medals." This "number of saved medals" is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed at the amusement facility.

If we use arrows to show the direction in which each of the above data items - "Balance," "Number of saved medals (number of saved balls)," "Number of medals held," and "Number of credits (number of game medals)" can be converted, it goes as follows: "Balance, number of saved medals, number of medals held" → "Number of credits" → "Number of medals held" → "Number of saved medals."

In this embodiment, the medal count data is not recorded directly on the member card, but is stored in a higher-level server such as a hall management computer in association with the member card number, so that the corresponding medal count can be searched for based on the member card number. On the other hand, the number of medals held is recorded directly on the card.

However, both may be stored in the upper server in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, the number of medals held is also recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the number of medals held may also be stored in the upper server in association with the card number. When storing in this upper server in association with the card number, data that can identify the time when it was stored in the upper server may be written to the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is written directly to the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

The number of medals held is stored on the card (membership card, visitor card) or in the upper server, for example, when the counting button 10 is operated to perform the counting process. However, instead of this, the number of medals held may be stored all at once when the card is returned.

Also, when a player finishes playing and returns the card from CU3, the medals stored in CU3 are temporarily stored in the hall server as saved balls, and when the player inserts the card back into the same or a different CU3 on the same day that the card is returned, only the medals for that day that were temporarily stored as saved balls are stored again in that CU3, and credits can be added within the range of the medals held, allowing play.

Bills inserted into the bill insertion slot 302 are taken in by a currency validator (not shown) and their authenticity and bill type are identified.

The front side of the CU3 is further provided with a loan button 321 and a card return button 322. The loan button 321 is a button operated to withdraw the balance recorded on the inserted card to obtain the number of credits. Specifically, the number of credits is added according to the balance withdrawn by operating the loan button 321. The card return button 322 is an operation button operated when the player ends the game, and is used to store in the inserted card the confirmed number of medals held at the end of the game (number of medals held when the card was inserted - number of medals converted to credits + number counted by counting operation) and to eject the card.

As described above, according to the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, the number of medals held, as specified by the card, is converted into the number of credits (number of game medals), and the number of credits can be used to set the number of bets. This makes it possible to provide a new slot machine (managed game machine) that does not use medals for play, without confusing players who are accustomed to conventional slot machines in which medals are loaned out, credits are secured by inserting the medals, and the number of bets is set using the credits.

[Internal configuration of card unit and slot machine]
2 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the card unit and the slot machine 2. The control circuits of the CU 3 and the slot machine 2 will be outlined with reference to FIG.

CU3 is provided with a CU control board 32, which is provided with a CU control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer and the like. This CU control unit 323 is the main control function unit of CU3, and is provided with a CPU as the control center, a ROM that stores programs and control data for the CPU to operate, a RAM that functions as the CPU's work area, an input/output interface to maintain signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like.

The CU control unit 323 is provided with an external output terminal (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server that performs security management. The CU 3 transmits the status of the CU 3 and gaming machine status information received from the slot machine 2 to an external device such as a hall management computer (hall computer) or a hall server that performs security management via the external output terminal. The CU control unit 323 communicates with the medal count control board 17 of the slot machine 2 via the communication control IC 325. The communication control IC 325 and the medal count control board 17 are connected, for example, by an asynchronous serial communication port. The communication between the communication control IC 325 and the medal count control board 17 is performed via the connection terminal board 1000.

The communication between the CU control unit 323 and the medal count control board 17 is two-way for loan information (information about the operation to withdraw the balance stored in the inserted card and use it for playing with the slot machine 2) and loan response information (response information to the loan information), and other counting information (information about the counting process from credit to held medals) and gaming machine information is one-way communication from the medal count control board 17 to the CU control unit 323. Therefore, the slot machine 2 does not recognize whether the CU3 has received the counting information and gaming machine information. The CU3 is provided with a connection part (not shown) to the slot machine 2 side, and the slot machine 2 is provided with a connection part (not shown) to the CU3 side. These connections are composed of connectors, for example.

The CU control unit 323 manages and stores the medals held by the player while the player is playing. The display 312 displays an image corresponding to data such as the balance or number of medals held output from the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the touch panel on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the loan button 321, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The loan button 321 is not limited to being provided in the CU 3, but may be provided in the slot machine 2 and input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the card return button 322, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323.

The slot machine 2 is provided with a main control board 16 that controls the progress of play on the slot machine 2, a medal count control board 17 that controls the credits owned by the player, a presentation control board 15 that controls presentations according to the game status, and a power supply board 101. The power supply board 101 generates the driving power for the electrical components that make up the slot machine 2 and supplies it to each section.

The power supply board 101 is supplied with an external 100V AC power supply, and the DC voltage required to drive the electrical components that make up the slot machine 2 is generated from this 100V AC power supply and supplied to the main control board 16, the medal count control board 17, and the performance control board 15.

The medal count control board 17 is equipped with a microcomputer for payout control, which is the medal count control unit 171. The medal count control unit 171 is provided with a CPU 171a as the control center, a ROM 171b that stores programs and control data for the operation of the CPU 171a, a RAM 171c that functions as a work area for the CPU 171a, and an input/output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

The medal count control board 17 is connected to a RAM clear switch 293 for erasing information stored in the RAM 171c, and a door open detection switch 25, and receives detection signals from these connected switches. In addition, the medal count control board 17 is connected to the count button 10, and receives a detection signal from the count button 10.

The medal count control board 17 is connected to a role ratio monitor 89, and the display is controlled by a medal count control unit 171. In addition, a backup memory 294 is connected to the medal count control board 17, and the medal count control board 17 backs up the role ratio information to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 89.

The role ratio monitor 89 normally displays a numerical value indicating the performance of the slot machine (hereinafter also referred to as "role ratio information"). The numerical values indicating the performance of the slot machine are, for example, the commanded role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the consecutive role payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the role payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the consecutive role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the role etc. status ratio to the total cumulative payout number. Details of this information will be explained later.

The main control board 16 is equipped with a game control microcomputer that serves as the main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 is provided with a CPU 161a as the control center, a ROM 161b that stores programs and control data for the operation of the CPU 161a, a RAM 161c that functions as a work area for the CPU 161a, and an input/output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

Reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to the main control board 16, and are driven under the control of the main control unit 161. A setting key switch 37, a reset/setting switch 38, and a start switch 7 are also connected to the main control board 16, and detection signals from these connected switches are input. A game support display 12 and a setting value display 24 are also connected to the main control board 16, and the displays are controlled by the main control unit 161.

The bet number clear switch 21, 1BET switch 20, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, door open detection switch 25, and MAXBET switch 6 are also connected to the main control board 16 via the relay board 1100, and detection signals from these connected switches are input. The 1-3BET LEDs 14-16 are also connected to the main control board 16 via the relay board 1100, and the display is controlled by the main control unit 161. If the main control unit 161 detects that the MAXBET switch 6 has been operated during the period in which the invalid operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is accepted, it sends an operation command indicating that the MAXBET switch 6 has been invalidated to the performance control unit 151.

The performance control board 15 is equipped with a performance control microcomputer, which is the performance control unit 151. The performance control unit 151 is provided with a CPU 151a as a control center, a ROM 151b that stores programs and control data for the operation of the CPU 151a, a RAM 151c that functions as a work area for the CPU 151a, and an input/output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

The performance control board 15 is connected to a performance switch 57, and a detection signal from the performance switch 57 is input. In addition, the performance control board 15 is connected to performance devices such as a liquid crystal display 51, a performance effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, a reel LED 55, and a credit display segment 7S, and these performance devices are driven based on the control of the performance control unit 151.

In addition, a light intensity/volume adjustment board 111 is connected to the performance control board 15. Switches for adjusting the light intensity and volume are connected to the light intensity/volume adjustment board 111, and detection signals from these switches are input to the performance control board 15 via the light intensity/volume adjustment board 111.

The main control unit 161 transmits various commands to the performance control unit 151. Commands transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the performance control unit 151 are sent in only one direction; no commands are transmitted from the performance control unit 151 to the main control unit 161. The performance control unit 151 receives commands transmitted from the main control unit 161 and performs various controls for producing the performance.

The medal count control unit 171 transmits various commands to the main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 also transmits various commands to the medal count control unit 171. In other words, communication between the medal count control unit 171 and the main control unit 161 is two-way communication. In addition, backup power is supplied to the main control board 16 from the medal count control board 17, and data stored in the RAM 161c of the main control board 16 is retained for the period during which backup power is being supplied even after a power outage.

The medal count control unit 171 also stores credits in a predetermined area of the RAM 171c. Specifically, the number of credits is stored in a credit counter. The medal count control unit 171 updates the credits stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 171c during the credit addition process or credit subtraction process.

The set bet amount is stored in a specified area of the RAM 161c. Specifically, the set bet amount is stored as a BET counter. When the value stored in the BET counter is "3", the game can be started. Below, the value stored in the BET counter may be simply referred to as the "bet amount".

As explained above, medalless slot machines that do not require medals are equipped with a medal count control board 17. Functions related to the insertion and dispensing of medals in conventional slot machines are concentrated in the medal count control board 17. Furthermore, conventional slot machines that require medals must be equipped with devices related to the insertion and dispensing of medals, such as a medal selector and hopper, but medalless slot machines do not require such devices.

In addition, by configuring a medal-less slot machine as in this embodiment, it is possible to share parts with conventional slot machines. Specifically, since the function of updating credits (functions related to medal insertion and payout) is concentrated in the medal count control board 17, a conventional slot machine can be configured by replacing the medal count control board 17 of the medal-less slot machine. When configuring a conventional slot machine, it is sufficient to provide the medal count control board 17 with functions related to medal insertion and payout, and then connect devices related to medal insertion and payout such as a medal selector and hopper to the medal count control board 17. With this configuration, it is possible to have compatibility with conventional slot machines, and by sharing parts, it is possible to reduce costs in designing and manufacturing the slot machine.

When a detection signal is input from the start switch 7, the main control unit 161 drives the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R to rotate, and draws for winning combinations.

The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but can be broadly divided into special combinations that transition to a big bonus (BB) or regular bonus (RB), small combinations that pay out medals, and replay combinations that allow you to start the next game without having to set a bet amount.

The main control unit 161 draws winning combinations, drives the reels to spin, and then waits for the player to stop the reels. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, or 8R is operated, the main control unit 161 stops the rotation of the reel corresponding to that stop switch 8L, 8C, or 8R. The main control unit 161 stops the three symbols and executes a winning determination process to determine whether or not a winning combination has been achieved. If a winning combination is determined to have been achieved, the player is awarded a number of credits according to the type of winning combination. A power-on switch 102 is connected to the power supply board 101, and a detection signal from the power-on switch 102 is input.

In this embodiment, a "game" refers to the period from when the start switch 7 is operated until the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stop. When playing a game, the bet amount is set before the start switch 7 is operated, and medals are paid out and the game state is changed after the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stop, so these incidental processes are also included in the "game" in a broad sense.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is also referred to as the MAXBET operation, the operation of the start switch 7 as the start operation, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R as the stop operation, the operation of the count button 10 as the count operation, the operation of the lending button 321 as the lending operation, and the operation of the card return button 322 as the return operation.

The slot machine 2 is also configured so that the medal payout rate changes according to a set value. More specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in a lottery that affects the player's advantage, such as an internal lottery. The set values have six levels, from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreasing in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases in stages in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

To change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the slot machine 2 after turning on the setting key switch 37. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, the set value read from the RAM 161c is displayed as the display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting state is changed so that the set value can be changed by operating the reset/set switch 38. When the reset/set switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by one (when the switch is operated again from the set value 6, the display value returns to the set value 1). When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is confirmed as the set value. When the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (set value) is stored in the RAM 161c of the main control unit 161, and the state is changed so that the game can proceed.

[state transition]
4 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state. As shown in FIG. 4, the states managed by the main control unit 161 include game states related to the payout rate.

Game play states include not inside, inside, and BB. Inside is a state in which play can proceed and the medal payout rate is guaranteed based on a predefined design value. Note that in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, players are expected to play most games inside.

On the other hand, during the non-internal period, the player does not play, or if they do, the time spent playing is extremely short. During the non-internal period, if a BB is won and the BB does not win, the game state transitions to the internal period from the next game. In other words, during the internal period, the BB win is carried over.

In both non-internal and internal play, a game in which BB can be won (hereinafter also referred to as a "BB winning game") may be played. Specifically, in non-internal play, if the BB symbol combination can be derived in response to the operation of stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in a game in which BB has been won, BB will be won. In this case, the game state will be controlled to BB from the next game. In other words, in non-internal play, the game in which BB has been won will be a BB winning game.

Inside, the BB win is carried over. Here, when the BB and the small role are won at the same time, the reel control is performed so that the symbol combination of the small role is preferentially derived. Furthermore, if the small role is a role with no misses, in a game in which the BB and the small role are won at the same time, the small role will always win regardless of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the BB cannot win. Similarly, when the BB and the replay role are won at the same time, the replay role is controlled so that the symbol combination of the replay role is preferentially derived. Since the replay role is generally a role with no misses, in a game in which the BB and the replay role are won at the same time, the replay role will always win regardless of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the BB cannot win. Therefore, during the internal process, only in games that result in a loss in the internal lottery (games that do not win any prizes), if the BB symbol combination can be derived by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the BB will be won. In this case, the game state will be controlled to BB from the next game. In other words, during the internal process, games that result in a loss in the internal lottery become games in which the BB can be won.

During a BB, the BB game is played for a set number of games (e.g., 60G), but because the payout rate during a BB is about 101%, the net increase in number of coins hardly increases at all. Therefore, for the player, a BB is merely a state in which a set number of games (e.g., 60G) is played. When the BB ends, the game state transitions back to non-internal.

The state inside includes the normal section and the advantageous section. The normal section is a state in which navigation is not executed, and is a non-notification state in which navigation information cannot be notified. The advantageous section is a state in which navigation can be executed, and is a notification state in which navigation information can be notified. In this embodiment, among the advantageous sections, navigation is not executed in the normal advantageous section, but navigation can be executed in the high probability state, AT1 state, AT2 state, and ending state. Note that navigation may also be executed in the normal advantageous section, but in the high probability state, AT1 state, AT2 state, and ending state, the probability of executing navigation to make the main character win when the push order role is won is higher than in the normal advantageous section. In this way, navigation is performed with a higher probability in the high probability state, AT1 state, AT2 state, and ending state than in the normal advantageous section.

In the normal zone, when the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is won (winning the advantageous zone), the state is controlled to the advantageous zone. Note that in this embodiment, the condition for winning the advantageous zone is the winning of most of the roles that can be won during normal play, so the duration of play during normal play is approximately 1G. Note that the condition for winning the advantageous zone may be met when any of the roles that can be won during normal play is won.

In the normal section, navigation is not executed in the game in which the push order role is won, so the net increase in the number of coins a player can win per game will be 0 or a negative number, taking into account the number of medals used to set the bet amount. Note that the net increase in the number of coins per game is the number of medals paid out per game minus the number of medals used to set the bet amount per game. In this embodiment, the normal payout rate is set to 40%. Thus, normally, the payout rate is 1 or less (100% or less) or less than 1 (less than 100%).

The advantageous zone includes the normal advantageous zone, the high probability state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the ending state. In the normal advantageous zone, navigation is not executed in the game in which the push order role is won, so the net increase in the number of coins that the player can win per game will be 0 or negative, taking into account the number of medals used to set the bet amount. In this embodiment, the payout rate in the normal advantageous zone is set to 40%. Thus, in the normal advantageous zone, the payout rate is 1 or less (100% or less) or less than 1 (less than 100%).

In this embodiment, the AT1 state ends when a predetermined number of games have been played. That is, as shown in the figure, a transition occurs to the normal section. The predetermined number of games in the AT1 state can be increased by winning a specific symbol (e.g., watermelon, strong cherry). That is, in this embodiment, winning a specific symbol (watermelon, strong cherry) increases the player's advantage.

In the normal advantageous zone, processing such as a lottery related to control to the high probability state and AT1 state is performed. In the normal advantageous zone, the main control unit 161 performs a lottery to switch to the AT1 state by a point acquisition lottery. The points updated by the point acquisition lottery are managed by the main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 has a point counter (not shown) for counting points inside. In addition, when the value of the point counter reaches a specified value, the main control unit 161 performs an AT lottery to select whether or not to control to the AT1 state. In addition, the main control unit 161 may perform an AT lottery based on the fact that a specific pattern (watermelon, strong cherry) is won without using points. The high probability state is a state in which the number of points awarded is greater than in the normal advantageous zone. In other words, the high probability state is a state in which it is easier to transition to the AT1 state than in the normal advantageous zone.

Control to the AT2 state can be performed when in the normal advantageous zone or high probability state. The AT2 state is a so-called pseudo bonus that can increase the net increase in coins that a player can win by following the navigation. A win that is controlled directly to the AT2 state from the normal advantageous zone or high probability state without going through the AT1 state is also called a "direct pseudo bonus win." A win that is controlled from the AT1 state to the AT2 state is also called a "pseudo bonus win." In a pseudo bonus, navigation is performed in the game in which the push order role is won, so the net increase in coins that a player can win per game is positive, even when the number of medals used to set the bet amount is taken into account.

In the advantageous zone, control is exercised to the ending state when the number of medals acquired (difference number), described below, reaches a predetermined ending transition number. The number of medals acquired in the advantageous zone is the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals used by the player from the number of medals awarded to the player by winning after control to the advantageous zone has begun. In this embodiment, the number of medals acquired is counted using a difference count value, which will be described in detail later. The ending state is a state in which it is determined that control to the advantageous zone will continue until, for example, the total number of medals acquired in the advantageous zone reaches an upper limit number (e.g., 2,400 medals).

The number of coins to transition to an ending is set when transitioning from the normal zone to the favorable zone. The number of coins to transition to an ending may be determined by lottery or may be set in advance. The number of coins to transition to an ending is managed by the main control unit 161. That is, the RAM 161c of the main control unit 161 stores the number of coins to transition to an ending. The number of coins to transition to an ending is, for example, 2300. That is, the main control unit 161 cumulatively counts the difference count value, and when the difference count value reaches the number of coins to transition to an ending in the counting process, the favorable zone ends.

When the limiter condition is met in the advantageous zone, control is exercised from the advantageous zone to the normal zone. More specifically, when the number of medals acquired during the advantageous zone reaches 2,400, the advantageous zone ends and control is exercised back to the normal zone. The number of medals acquired during the advantageous zone is counted by a counter stored in RAM 161c. When the number of medals acquired during the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit, this is referred to as the "limiter condition" being met.

In this way, the advantageous zone includes an ending state that is advantageous to the player, and the main control unit 161 controls the state to the ending state when it determines that the number of medals acquired is greater than 2,300. This makes it easier to continue the advantageous zone when the number of medals acquired exceeds 2,300.

When the game is controlled from the advantageous zone to the normal zone, the number of medals acquired during the advantageous zone that was counted in the advantageous zone, as well as the points that can be acquired during play, are also initialized. The number of medals acquired during the advantageous zone is updated not only during the advantageous zone but also during BB, but is not updated in the normal zone.

The slot machine 2 of this embodiment changes the medal payout rate according to a setting value. More specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by varying the probability of winning a specific lottery, such as a point acquisition lottery, according to the setting value (for example, 1, 2, 4, 5, 6). A staff member at an arcade or similar establishment can change this setting value by modifying the setting.

In this way, the conditions for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone include limiter conditions and optional ending conditions that are met based on the progress of the game, as well as a condition for a setting change.

In addition, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, an upper limit of the number of games is set in the normal advantageous zone. When the upper limit of the number of games set in advance is reached in the normal advantageous zone, an AT right is granted to forcibly transition to the AT1 state regardless of the reached point. The upper limit of the number of games in the normal advantageous zone is, for example, 1280 games. The upper limit of the number of games is called the "ceiling". The main control unit 161 has a lottery counter in the RAM 161c to determine whether the ceiling has been reached. That is, the main control unit 161 stores the number of games played in the normal advantageous zone in the lottery counter in the RAM 161c. The main control unit 161 adds the value of the lottery counter each time a game is played in the normal advantageous zone. For example, if the upper limit of the number of games in the normal advantageous zone is set to 700 games, when the value of the lottery counter reaches 700, the main control unit 161 grants the AT right. The upper limit of the number of games in the normal advantageous zone is not limited to 700 games, and may be, for example, 1280 games.

[Winning Role]
5 to 8 are diagrams for explaining the types of winning combinations, winning combinations, and the awarding of prizes. The name column of each of the winning combinations shows the name of the winning combination, and the combination of symbols that will win the winning combination is shown in the symbol combination column. The award column shows the value (number of medals paid out, replay award, etc.) that will be awarded when the winning combination is won.

As shown in FIG. 5, the replay roles include lip 1 to lip 6. As shown in FIG. 6, the special role includes BB. As shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 8, the minor roles include plum 1 to 6, watermelon, and 1-coin role 1 to 33. Plum 1 to 6 are main roles that can be won when the push order role is won, and when won, 8 medals are paid out, which is more than the number of medals used in the bet (3 medals). Plum 1 to 6 are collectively referred to as "plum roles." 1-coin roles 1 to 21 are sub roles that can be won when the push order role is won, and when won, 1 medal is paid out, which is less than the number of medals used in the bet (3 medals). 1-coin roles 1 to 33 are collectively referred to as "1-coin roles."

As shown in Figure 5, when "Character - Black 7 - Black 7" stops on the winning line L, among the symbol combinations that will result in a winning RIP5, three 7 symbols are lined up on the reels. Specifically, the 7 symbol is derived from the top of the left reel 2L, the middle of the middle reel 2C, and the bottom of the right reel 2R, and the 7 symbols are lined up to the right. The lined up 7 symbols are also called "7's".

As shown in Figure 5, when "Replay-Black 7-Black 7", one of the symbol combinations that will result in a Replay 4 win, stops on the winning line L, three character symbols are arranged in a row on the reels. Specifically, character symbols are derived from the top row of the left reel 2L, the top row of the middle reel 2C, and the top row of the right reel 2R, and the character symbols are arranged in a row on the top rows. The arrangement of character symbols in a row is also referred to as "character alignment."

[Role to be selected]
9 is a diagram for explaining the combination of winning roles read out as the lottery target roles for each game state. The role number column in FIG. 9 shows the role number determined for each lottery target role, the flag category column shows the flag category assigned to each type of lottery target role, the lottery target role column shows the name, the game state column shows that the lottery target role is a lottery target role with a circle for each game state, and the advantageous zone winning column shows whether or not the advantageous zone has been won. Also, the winning role combination column in FIG. 9 shows the combination of winning roles included in each lottery target role.

As shown in FIG. 9, BB is provided as a special role that can be selected. Normal lip, 7-match lip, 7-mismatch lip, character-match lip, and character-mismatch lip are provided as replay roles that can be selected. Common plum, 213-choice role A-D, 231-choice role A-D, 312-choice role A-D, 321-choice role A-D, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, and chance eye A and B are provided as minor roles. BB medium small role and BB medium 1 are provided as minor roles in BB. Note that 213-choice role A-D, 231-choice role A-D, 312-choice role A-D, and 321-choice role A-D are roles that can execute navigation when won, and are therefore types of push order roles. The 213-choice roles A-D, 231-choice roles A-D, 312-choice roles A-D, and 321-choice roles A-D are collectively referred to as "push order bells."

When not inside the draw, all roles except for BB small/medium and 1 BB can be won, but when inside the draw, the BB win has already been carried over, so BB, BB small/medium and 1 BB cannot be won.

A common flag category is assigned to each role in non-internal, internal, and BB. Also, while role numbers are determined for each role to be drawn, flag categories are assigned for each type of role to be drawn. For this reason, the number of flag categories is smaller than the number of role numbers. Also, the point acquisition lottery in the normal advantageous zone and the bonus lottery in the advantageous zone (hereinafter collectively referred to as "lotteries related to AT control") are both conducted based on the flag category. For this reason, the processing burden can be reduced compared to conducting lotteries related to the control of these AT states based on role numbers.

In this embodiment, flag categories are also assigned to misses and BBs, and BBs are assigned FC1, the same as other roles such as regular replies. Common plums are assigned FC4, the same as watermelons.

[Reel control of push order role]
10 is a diagram for explaining reel control when the push order role is won. As described above, in this embodiment, in a game in which the push order role is won in an advantageous zone, navigation is executed and the correct procedure is notified to the player. The player can win a winning role (main role) that is advantageous to the player by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the correct procedure according to the navigation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10, in a game in which any of the 213-choice roles A-D, 231-choice roles A-D, 312-choice roles A-D, and 321-choice roles A-D is won, the main role of plum is won when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the correct sequence, while the secondary role of 1 coin is won when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the incorrect sequence. Note that if the secondary role of 1 coin is not won when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the incorrect sequence, no win may occur.

The "normal procedure (the procedure in which the left reel stops first)" is not set as the "correct procedure," while the "irregular procedure" can be set as the "correct procedure." In other words, in a game in which the player wins any of the 213-choice roles A-D, 231-choice roles A-D, 312-choice roles A-D, and 321-choice roles A-D, as long as the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the normal procedure, the main role of the plum cannot be won. This may be a factor that induces the player to operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the irregular procedure, but in this embodiment, if the player operates the stop switches in the irregular procedure in a game in which navigation is not executed, a penalty that is disadvantageous to the player is imposed on the player. Therefore, the player is encouraged to operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the normal procedure in a game in which navigation is not executed.

Figure 11 is a diagram showing game start commands that the main control unit 161 sends to the performance control unit 151 when the start switch 7 is operated. When the start switch 7 is operated (start operation), the main control unit 161 executes an internal lottery process, and sends a group of commands including predetermined information to the performance control unit 151 depending on the result of the internal lottery process. Hereinafter, the group of commands No. 1 to No. 13 shown in Figure 11 will be simply referred to as "game start commands". The main control unit 161 sends each command in the order of No. 1 to No. 13 as a game start command. Each command is assigned a serial number as a "setting serial number" with the same number as the number. Each command stores various information managed by the main control unit 161.

For example, the command No. 2 "instruction number" stores information related to navigation. That is, the command No. 2 stores information that can identify the order in which to press the start switch 7 in a game in which the start switch 7 is operated. Specifically, the command "instruction number" stores information that indicates the order in which to press the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. When the performance control unit 151 receives the command No. 2 "instruction number", it executes a navigation performance on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the operation procedure that can be identified from the command "instruction number". Furthermore, the performance control unit 151 causes the speaker 53 to output a sound that notifies the player of the operation procedure based on the operation procedure that can be identified from the command "instruction number".

For example, the command "small role type" of No. 3 stores information that can specify whether the role won by the internal lottery is a small role, a replay role, or a special role. Also, the command "section state" of No. 6 stores information that can specify which of the internal states shown in FIG. 4 the game in which the start switch 7 is operated is in. Specifically, the command "section state" of No. 6 stores information indicating whether the currently controlled state is a normal section, an advantageous section, and further whether the advantageous section is a normal advantageous section, a high probability state, an AT1 state or an AT2 state, or an ending state. The performance control unit 151 can specify which section state the game in which the start switch 7 is operated is in based on receiving the command "section state" of No. 6. Also, the command "ball output state" of No. 4 can store information that can specify the game state of the game in which the start switch 7 is operated. Command No. 9 "ART Premonition G Count" stores the number of games in the AT continuous performance. Command No. 10 "Points" in the game start command stores the number of points acquired in the previous game. Additionally, command No. 11 "Winning Number" stores information that can identify the role number of the role that was won by the internal lottery.

When the main control unit 161 transmits a game start command, it stores information indicating that a medal has been bet in the command No. 12 "insert medal". When information indicating that a medal has been bet is stored in the command No. 12 "insert medal", the performance control unit 151 can determine that the game start command has been received.

Figure 12 shows game end commands sent by the main control unit 161 to the performance control unit 151 at the third stop. The main control unit 161 sends the command group No. 1 to No. 13 to the performance control unit 151 in the order of No. 1 to No. 13 not only when the start switch 7 is operated, but also at the third stop of the stop switch. Hereinafter, the command group No. 1 to No. 13 shown in Figure 12 will be simply referred to as "game end commands". Note that, among the commands sent at the third stop, command No. 11 is different from command No. 11 sent when the start switch 7 is operated. No. 11 is a command that stores information about winning. In other words, at the third stop, the main control unit 161 sends information about winning, not information about the winning number.

In the command "points" of No. 10 in the game end command, the number of points acquired in the point acquisition lottery process at the third stop, which will be described later, is stored. In addition, when the main control unit 161 transmits a game end command, it stores information indicating that the reel is stopped in the command "stop reel" of No. 13. When information indicating that the reel is stopped is stored in the command "stop reel" of No. 13, the performance control unit 151 can determine that the game end command has been received. That is, the performance control unit 151 determines whether the received command group is a game start command or a game end command based on the command "insert medal" of No. 12 and the command "stop reel" of No. 13. When the main control unit 161 transmits a game start command, it does not need to transmit the command "stop reel" of No. 13, and when it transmits a game end command, it does not need to transmit the command "insert medal" of No. 12.

[Transmission and reception between the main control board and the medal count control board]
The following describes the manner of transmission and reception between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. In this embodiment, communication is performed by commands between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. The main control board 16 transmits a predetermined command to the medal count control board 17 every time an event occurs. Events include when the start switch 7 is pressed, when the 1BET switch 20 or the MAXBET switch 6 is pressed, when all reels are stopped, and the like.

When the predetermined command sent from the main control board 16 is a command that requires a predetermined response, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command to the main control board 16. For example, when the slot machine 2 is installed in an amusement facility and electrically connected and the power is turned on, the main control board 16 sends a gaming machine installation information command including the main chip ID (main control chip ID) to the medal count control board 17. Even when the power is turned on thereafter, the main control board 16 sends gaming machine installation information including the main chip ID (main control chip ID) to the medal count control board 17. In other words, when the slot machine 2 is powered on, the main control board 16 sends a gaming machine installation information command that can identify the main chip ID, which is unique information held by the main control board 16, to the medal count control board 17.

Both the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 assign a "serial number" to the command before sending it. In addition, both the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 store the received "serial number." In the slot machine 2, by assigning a "serial number" to the command, a person who tries to obtain medals fraudulently (hereinafter referred to as a fraudster) is prevented from fraudulently operating the slot machine 2. Fraudulent operation refers to, for example, an operation in which the command transmitted and received between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 is altered, or an operation in which a fraudster controls the main control board 16 or the medal count control board 17. A fraudster performs fraudulent operation by, for example, connecting a device that performs fraudulent operation (hereinafter referred to as a fraudster) to the main control board 16 or the medal count control board 17.

The initial value and the additional value of the "serial number" are determined by the medal count control board 17 and the main control board 16, respectively. The medal count control board 17 determines the initial value and the additional value of the "serial number" based on the gaming machine installation information command received from the main control board 16. The main chip ID included in the gaming machine installation information command includes a 4-byte chip-specific number register. A chip-specific hexadecimal value is stored in each byte of the main chip ID. The medal count control board 17 calculates a total value by adding the hexadecimal values stored in each byte of the main chip ID. The medal count control board 17 converts the value indicated by the lowest 2 bytes of the calculated total value into a decimal number and determines the value as the initial value for the "serial number".

For example, if the total value is "189h" (h indicates that "189" is a hexadecimal number), the initial value for the serial number will be the decimal representation of "89h". In other words, the initial value for the "serial number" will be "137".

Furthermore, the medal count control board 17 divides the initial value by a predetermined number. If the predetermined number is, for example, "5", the remainder calculated as a result of the division will be one of four types: "0", "1", "2", "3", and "4". The medal count control board 17 predetermines and stores an additional value corresponding to the four types of remainder. For example, the medal count control board 17 stores "7" corresponding to "0", "11" corresponding to "1", "13" corresponding to "2", "19" corresponding to "3", and "23" corresponding to "4". After dividing the initial value by a predetermined number, the medal count control board 17 sets the value stored corresponding to the remainder of the division result as the additional value.

As an example, when the initial value "137" is divided by 5, the remainder is "2". As described above, the medal count control board 17 stores "13" in correspondence with the remainder "2" of the division. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 determines the additional value in the serial number as "13". In this way, based on the main chip ID identified from the gaming machine installation information command, the medal count control board 17 generates an initial value and additional value for the serial number to determine whether the command sent from the main control board 16 is normal. The main control board 16 also performs a similar calculation to generate the initial value and additional value. As a result, the same initial value and additional value are stored in both the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17.

As described above, in this embodiment, the occurrence of an event causes the main control board 16 to send a specified command to the medal count control board 17. The main control board 16 assigns a serial number to the specified command. For example, we will explain an example in which a gaming machine installation information command is sent to the medal count control board 17, and after both the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 have determined the initial value and the additional value for the serial number, a specified event A occurs.

When a specific event A occurs, the main control board 16 transmits command A to the medal count control board 17. At this time, the main control board 16 assigns an initial serial number to the command A that is transmitted for the first time after transmitting the gaming machine installation command. In other words, the main control board 16 assigns the serial number "137" to the command A and transmits it.

The medal count control board 17 stores "137" as the initial value, and since the serial number assigned to the first command A received after receiving the gaming machine installation command is "137", it is determined that communication is normal.

Next, when a new event B occurs, the main control board 16 transmits command B to the medal count control board 17. At this time, the main control board 16 transmits command B with a value obtained by adding an additional value to the value of the previously transmitted serial number. In other words, the main control board 16 transmits command B with the value "150", which is the previously transmitted value of "137" plus the additional value "13". Before receiving command B, the medal count control board 17 calculates in advance that the serial number to be assigned to the next command to be transmitted will be "150". The medal count control board 17 determines that communication with the main control board 16 is normal because the serial number assigned to the received command B is "150", which matches the serial number calculated in advance.

In other words, each time the main control board 16 sends a command, it assigns a serial number that is the result of adding an additional value to the previously sent serial number. The medal count control board 17 also stores the initial value and the additional value, so it can calculate in advance the value of the serial number to be assigned to the next command it receives, and can determine whether the serial number is normal each time it receives a command. If the serial number assigned to the received command does not match the calculated serial number value, the medal count control board 17 determines that a communication abnormality has occurred between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17.

If the value obtained by adding the additional value to the previously transmitted serial number exceeds 255, the main control board 16 will transmit the serial number minus 255. If the main control board 16 receives a response command from the medal count control board 17 indicating that an error has occurred, it will not add the additional value to the serial number of the command to be transmitted after the response command, but will transmit the same serial number again.

[Commands sent from the main control board to the medal count control board]
13 is a diagram showing the types of commands that the main control board 16 transmits to the medal count control board 17. In this embodiment, the main control board 16 transmits a gaming machine installation information command, a role information command, an advantageous zone information command, a throw command, a settlement command, an end command, a start command, a payout pulse command, a big win command, a gaming machine fraud 1 command, a gaming machine fraud 2 command, a gaming machine fraud 3 command, a main control status command, a main control board error command, and a gaming machine performance information (spare) command to the medal count control board 17, as shown in the command name column in FIG. 13. In addition, the number column shows the command number that is preset for each command. Furthermore, the message length column shows the message length, i.e., the byte length, of each command.

The two-way column indicates whether or not the medal count control board 17 needs to send a response command after the main control board 16 sends a command. For example, when the medal count control board 17 receives a start command from the main control board 16, it does not send a response command in response to the start command. In other words, the main control board 16 controls the reel drums and the like without waiting to receive a response command from the medal count control board 17.

On the other hand, when the medal count control board 17 receives an insertion command, a settlement command, or an end command from the main control board 16, it transmits a response command to the main control board 16 in response to receiving these commands. The insertion command, settlement command, and end command are commands that directly affect the number of credits managed by the medal count control board 17. Therefore, after transmitting the insertion command, settlement command, or end command, the main control board 16 performs the next control on the condition that it has received a response command from the medal count control board 17. Below, the commands transmitted from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 are explained using Figures 14 to 35.

Figure 14 is a diagram explaining the gaming machine installation information command. As shown in Figure 14, the gaming machine installation information command is a command having a length of 22 bytes. The first byte stores the message length of the gaming machine installation information command. The second byte transmits the serial number. The gaming machine installation information command is a command that is transmitted after the power is turned on and before the medal count control board 17 determines the initial value and the additional value of the serial number, so the serial number is fixed to the value "0". The third to sixth bytes store values indicating the command number, gaming machine characteristics, gaming machine type, and identification code, respectively. The seventh to tenth bytes store the values of the first to fourth bytes of the unique number register of the main chip ID. The medal count control board 17 determines the initial value and the additional value of the serial number using the values of the main chip ID in the seventh to tenth bytes.

Bytes 11 to 13 store the manufacturer code. Bytes 14 to 21 store the product code. Byte 22 stores a checksum to determine whether or not there was an error in the information sent in bytes 1 to 21.

Figure 15 is a diagram showing details of the gaming machine characteristics. The following describes details of the gaming machine characteristics indicated in the 4th byte of the gaming installation information command. The gaming machine characteristics are 1 byte of data from bit 0 to bit 7. Bit 0 indicates whether or not the slot machine 2 is equipped with an RB (regular bonus). If the slot machine 2 is equipped with an RB, bit 0 will be "1", and if the slot machine 2 is not equipped with an RB, bit 0 will be "0".

The first bit indicates whether the slot machine 2 is equipped with a BB (big bonus). If the slot machine 2 is equipped with a BB, the first bit is "1", and if the slot machine 2 is not equipped with a BB, the first bit is "0". The second bit indicates whether the slot machine 2 is equipped with a CT (challenge time). If the slot machine 2 is equipped with a CT, the second bit is "1", and if the slot machine 2 is not equipped with a CT, the second bit is "0". The third bit indicates whether the slot machine 2 is equipped with a CB (challenge bonus). If the slot machine 2 is equipped with a CB, the third bit is "1", and if the slot machine 2 is not equipped with a CB, the third bit is "0".

The fourth bit indicates whether the slot machine 2 is equipped with an SB (single bonus). If the slot machine 2 is equipped with an SB, the fourth bit is "1", and if the slot machine 2 is not equipped with an SB, the fourth bit is "0". The fifth bit indicates whether the slot machine 2 is equipped with an instruction function. If the slot machine 2 is equipped with an instruction function, the fifth bit is "1", and if the slot machine 2 is not equipped with an instruction function, the fifth bit is "0". The sixth bit indicates the instruction type of the slot machine 2. If the instruction type of the slot machine 2 is a 7P type, the sixth bit is "1", and if the instruction type of the slot machine 2 is a 7U type, the sixth bit is "0". The seventh bit is unused and "0" is stored.

Figure 16 shows the structure of the reel information command. The reel information command is a command for the medal count control board 17 to update the gaming machine performance information and the reel ratio monitor information. The reel information command is sent to the medal count control board 17 after the end command is sent.

The reel information command is composed of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the reel information command. The second byte stores a serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number of the reel information command is "1".

The fourth byte stores reel operation information. The reel operation information stores information indicating whether or not a bonus has been won. The fifth byte stores a checksum to determine whether or not there was an error in the information sent in the first through fourth bytes.

Figure 17 is a diagram showing details of the reel operation information. The reel operation information is data stored in the 4th byte of the reel information command. The reel operation information is composed of 1 byte of data from the 0th to 7th bits. The 0th bit stores "Type 1" information indicating whether the RB is in operation. The 1st bit stores "Type 1 consecutive" information indicating whether the BB is in operation. The 2nd bit stores "Type 2" information indicating whether the CT is in operation. The 3rd bit stores "Type 2 consecutive" information indicating whether the CB is in operation. The 5th bit stores "Normal reel" information indicating whether the SB is in operation. The 4th, 6th, and 7th bits are not used and store "0".

Figure 18 shows the configuration of the advantageous zone information command. The advantageous zone information command is a command that the medal count control board 17 uses to update the gaming machine performance information and the role ratio monitor information. The advantageous zone information command is sent after the end command is sent.

The advantageous zone information command is composed of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the reel information command. The second byte stores a serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number of the advantageous zone information command is "2".

The fourth byte stores advantageous zone information. The advantageous zone information is data regarding replay and instruction information in the advantageous zone. The fifth byte stores a checksum to determine whether there was an error in the information sent in the first through fourth bytes.

Figure 19 shows details of advantageous zone information. The advantageous zone information is data stored in the fourth byte of the advantageous zone information command, and is data that indicates information about the game that was played before the advantageous zone information command was sent.

The advantageous zone information is composed of one byte of data from bit 0 to bit 7. Bit 0 stores information indicating whether or not the game played before the advantageous zone information command was sent was in an advantageous zone. If it was in an advantageous zone, bit 0 stores "1". Bit 1 stores information indicating whether or not instruction information was present in the game played before the advantageous zone information command was sent. If instruction information was present, bit 1 stores "1". Bit 4 stores information indicating whether or not a replay symbol combination was displayed in the game played before the advantageous zone information command was sent. If a replay symbol combination was displayed, bit 4 stores "1". Bits 2, 3, 5, 6, and 7 are not used and store "0".

Figure 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of an insert command. The insert command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when the 1BET switch 20 is pressed or when the MAXBET switch 6 is pressed. That is, the main control board 16 sends the insert command to the medal count control board 17 when it receives a bet number setting operation for setting the bet number for starting one game. Also, referring to Figure 13, since the insert command is a bidirectional command, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command in response to the insert command to the main control board 16 when it receives the insert command. The insert command is composed of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the insert command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number of the insert command is "3".

The fourth byte stores the number of medals inserted. When the 1BET switch 20 is pressed with the bet number being 0, 1, or 2, the number of medals inserted is 1. When the MAXBET switch 6 is pressed with the bet number being 0, the number of medals inserted is 3, when the MAXBET switch 6 is pressed with the bet number being 1, the number of medals inserted is 2, and when the MAXBET switch 6 is pressed with the bet number being 2, the number of medals inserted is 1. When the 1BET switch 20 or the MAXBET switch 6 is pressed and an insert command is sent during the replay operation state, no data is stored in the number of medals inserted. The fifth byte stores a checksum to determine whether or not an error has occurred in the information sent in the first to fourth bytes. The "replay operation state" refers to the state after the replay role has won.

Figure 21 is a diagram showing the configuration of a settlement command. The settlement command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when the bet number clear switch 21 is pressed. That is, the main control board 16 sends the settlement command to the medal count control board 17 when it accepts a settlement operation to cancel the bet number for starting one game. Also, referring to Figure 13, since the settlement command is a bidirectional command, when the medal count control board 17 receives the settlement command, it sends a response command in response to the settlement command to the main control board 16. The settlement command is composed of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the settlement command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number of the settlement command is "4".

The fourth byte stores the number of settled medals. If the bet number clear switch 21 is pressed when the bet number is one, the number of settled medals will be one when the bet number is two, the number of settled medals will be two when the bet number is two, and the number of settled medals will be three when the bet number is three. The fifth byte stores a checksum to determine whether or not there was an error in the information sent in the first through fourth bytes.

Figure 22 is a diagram showing the configuration of the start command. The start command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when the start switch 7 is pressed. That is, the main control board 16 sends the start command to the medal count control board 17 when starting a game. The start command is sent even when the start switch 7 is pressed in the replay operation state. The start command is a command that does not directly affect the number of credits managed by the medal count control board 17. Therefore, when the medal count control board 17 receives the start command, it does not send a response command to the main control board 16 in response to the start command, but performs control according to the start command. The control according to the start command corresponds to, for example, a process of controlling to a state waiting for the game to end and a preparation process for receiving the end command. After sending the start command, the main control board 16 performs the next control without waiting for a response from the medal count control board 17. The next control is, for example, a control to drive the reels.

The start command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the start command. The second byte stores a sequence number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number of the start command is "6".

The fourth byte stores the number of input pulses (1 to 3) to be sent to the hall computer. Even in the replay operation state, the specified number of input pulses is sent. The fifth byte stores a checksum to determine whether or not there was an error in the information sent in the first through fourth bytes.

Figure 23 is a diagram showing the configuration of the end command. The end command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when all the reels have stopped, that is, when the third stop is reached. In other words, the main control board 16 sends the end command to the medal count control board 17 when one game ends. The end command includes the number of medals to be paid out, which is determined according to the combination of the derived symbols. When medals are paid out to the player, the number of credits increases. Therefore, the end command is a command that directly affects the number of credits managed by the medal count control board 17. Therefore, when the medal count control board 17 receives the end command, it sends a response command to the main control board 16. After sending the end command, the main control board 16 performs the next control on the condition that the response command is received. The next control corresponds to the update process of the data displayed on the game support display 12, etc.

In other words, when the medal count control board 17 receives the end command, it sends a response command in response to the end command to the main control board 16, and performs control according to the end command. The control according to the end command is, for example, control to add the number of medals paid out to the number of credits.

The termination command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the termination command. The second byte stores a serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number of the termination command is "5".

The fourth byte stores the number of medals paid out. The maximum number of medals paid out is 15. If a replay symbol combination is derived, or if there are no medals paid out, a "0" is stored in the fourth byte. In other words, the end command is a command that can specify the game value that is awarded to a player according to the result of a game when the game ends. The fifth byte stores a checksum to determine whether or not there was an error in the information sent in the first through fourth bytes.

Figure 24 shows the configuration of the payout pulse command. The payout pulse command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when all reels have stopped, i.e., when the third stop has been reached. The payout pulse command is a pulse signal for sending the number of medals awarded to the player in response to winning to a hall computer (not shown) connected to the medal count control board 17. After receiving the payout pulse command, the medal count control board 17 sends a payout pulse signal to the hall computer (not shown). This allows the hall computer to store the number of medals paid out in the slot machine 2. The payout pulse command is sent to the medal count control board 17 even when the replay operation is in progress. After sending the payout pulse command, the main control board 16 performs the next control without waiting for a response from the medal count control board 17.

The payout pulse command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the payout pulse command. The second byte stores a serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number of the payout pulse command is "7".

The fourth byte stores the number of payout pulses to be sent to the hall computer. The maximum number of payout pulses is 15. If a replay symbol combination is derived, or if there are no medals to be paid out, a "0" is stored in the fourth byte. The fifth byte stores a checksum to determine whether or not there was an error in the information sent in the first through fourth bytes.

Figure 25 is a diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot command. The jackpot command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 at the start and end of a jackpot. The jackpot command is also sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 in the case of a hot start when the power is turned on. This allows the slot machine 2 to restore the hall computer signal without having to back up the hall computer signal.

The jackpot command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the jackpot command. The second byte stores the serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in Figure 13, the command number of the jackpot command is "8".

The fourth byte stores the hall computer signal. The hall computer signal is a signal for notifying the hall computer of the jackpot information of the slot machine 2. The jackpot type, such as RB, BB, or AT, is stored. The fifth byte stores a checksum for determining whether or not there was an error in the information sent in the first through fourth bytes.

Figure 26 is a diagram showing the details of the hall computer signal. The hall computer signal is data stored in the fourth byte of the jackpot command. The hall computer signal is composed of one byte of data from bit 0 to bit 7. Bit 0 stores information indicating that the jackpot type is RB. Bit 1 stores information indicating that the jackpot type is BB. Bit 2 stores information indicating that the jackpot type is AT. Bits 3 to 7 are not used and store "0".

Figure 27 shows the configuration of the gaming machine fraud 1 command. The gaming machine fraud 1 command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when a setting change or setting confirmation is started or ended.

The gaming machine fraud 1 command is composed of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the gaming machine fraud 1 command. The second byte stores a serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in FIG. 13, the command number of the gaming machine fraud 1 command is "9."

The fourth byte stores the setting information. The setting information is information when the settings are changed or confirmed, and information indicating whether any fraud was detected at that time. The fifth byte stores a checksum to determine whether there was an error in the information sent in the first through fourth bytes.

Figure 28 is a diagram showing details of the setting information. The setting information is data stored in the 4th byte of the gaming machine fraud 1 command. The setting information is composed of 1 byte of data from the 0th to 7th bits. The 0th bit stores data indicating whether or not the setting is being changed. The 1st bit stores data indicating whether or not the setting is being confirmed. The 2nd to 4th bits store data indicating whether or not a manufacturer-defined fraud has been detected. The 6th and 7th bits are unused and store "0".

Figure 29 is a diagram showing the structure of the gaming machine fraud 2 command. The gaming machine fraud 2 command is an unused command in the slot machine 2. In the slot machine 2, the door open detection switch 25 is connected to the medal count control board 17. Therefore, the main control board 16 does not need to send door information to the medal count control board 17. Therefore, "0" is stored in the fourth byte.

Figure 30 shows the details of the door information. Since the medal count control board 17 detects whether the door is open or closed, all bits contained in the door information are not used and "0" is stored.

Figure 31 shows the configuration of the gaming machine fraud 3 command. The gaming machine fraud 3 command is an unused command in the slot machine 2. The gaming machine fraud 3 command is an expansion command, and will be used in the future when it becomes necessary to send a new command from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17.

Figure 32 shows the structure of a main control status command. A main control status command is a command that indicates the status of the main control board 16. The main control status command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 at a predetermined timing. By receiving the main control status command, the medal count control board 17 can obtain the status of the main control board 16 or the slot machine 2.

The main control status command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the main control status command. The second byte stores a serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in FIG. 13, the command number of the main control status command is "12". The fourth byte stores the gaming machine status signal. The fifth byte stores a checksum to determine whether or not there was an error in the information sent in the first through fourth bytes.

Figure 33 is a diagram showing the configuration of a main control board error command. The main control board error command is a command that indicates the type of error that has occurred on the main control board 16. The main control board error command is sent from the main control board 16 to the medal count control board 17 when an error occurs on the main control board 16 and when the error that has occurred is resolved.

The main control board error command consists of 5 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the main control status command. The second byte stores a serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in FIG. 13, the command number of the main control board error command is "13". The fourth byte stores an error number. The error number is a number indicating the type of error that has occurred in the main control board 16. The fifth byte stores a checksum to determine whether or not an error has occurred in the information sent in the first through fourth bytes.

Figure 34 is a diagram showing a list of main control board errors. The error numbers shown in Figure 34 are the error numbers stored in the fourth byte of the main control board error command. E6 is an error number indicating a reel rotation error. The main control board 16 determines that a reel rotation error has occurred if it is unable to detect input from the origin sensor three consecutive times. When a reel rotation error occurs, the main control board 16 transmits the value of the fourth byte of the main control board error command as "E6". The main control board 16 determines that the error has been resolved when an error release switch (not shown) is pressed. Even when the error has been resolved, the main control board 16 transmits a main control board error command.

E7 is an error number indicating a medal count overflow error. The main control board 16 determines that a medal count overflow error has occurred when the medal count exceeds 16,383. When a medal count overflow error occurs, the main control board 16 sends the fourth byte of the main control board error command as "E7". The main control board 16 determines that the error has been resolved when an error release switch (not shown) is pressed. Even when the error has been resolved, the main control board 16 sends the main control board error command.

E8 is an error number indicating a backup error. When the main control board 16 checks the RAM after power is turned on and finds that the value does not match the RAM value backed up before the power was cut off, it determines that a backup error has occurred. When a backup error occurs, the main control board 16 sends the fourth byte of the main control board error command as "E8". The main control board 16 turns off the power to the slot machine 2 and, when the settings are changed again, determines that the error has been resolved. Even when the error has been resolved, the main control board 16 sends the main control board error command.

E9 is an error number indicating a communication abnormality error. If the main control board 16 does not receive a response command before 40 ms has elapsed since sending a command requiring a response command to the medal count control board 17, it determines that a communication abnormality error has occurred. When a communication abnormality error occurs, the main control board 16 sends the fourth byte value of the main control board error command as "E9". When an error release switch (not shown) is pressed, the main control board 16 determines that the error has been resolved. Even when the error has been resolved, the main control board 16 sends a main control board error command.

Figure 35 shows the structure of the gaming machine performance information (preliminary) command. Gaming machine performance information is information intended to compile performance information. Gaming machine performance information is used to output results calculated based on play.

The gaming machine performance information (preliminary) command is composed of 28 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the gaming machine performance information (preliminary) command. The second byte stores a serial number. The third byte stores a value indicating the command number. As shown in FIG. 13, the command number of the gaming machine performance information (preliminary) command is "14". Gaming machine performance information can be stored in bytes 4 to 27. In this embodiment, "0" is stored in the preliminary area. The 28th byte stores a checksum for determining whether or not an error has occurred in the information sent in bytes 1 to 27.

Figure 36 shows a list of commands sent from the medal count control board 17 to the main control board 16. The medal count control board 17 sends two types of commands to the main control board 16.

A response command is a command for responding to a command received from the main control board 16. For example, when the medal count control board 17 receives an end command, it sends a response command because the end command affects the number of credits. In other words, a response command is a bidirectional command, as it responds in response to receiving it. A command number between 3 and 5 can be set for the response command. The message length of the response command is 4 bytes.

The frame side information command is a command that transmits system information including connection information between the medal count control board 17 and the CU3. The medal count control board 17 transmits the frame side information command to the main control board 16 every 0.3 seconds. The specified period for transmitting the frame side information command may be other periods than 0.3 seconds. The main control board 16 does not respond even if it receives a frame side information command. Therefore, the frame side information command is a command that is continuously transmitted unidirectionally from the medal count control board 17 to the main control board 16, and does not have bidirectionality. The command number of the frame side information command is "81h", and the message length is 4 bytes.

Figure 37 is a diagram showing the structure of a response command. A response command is composed of 4 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the response command. The second byte stores a value indicating the command number. The command number in the response command stores the command number of the received command to which the response is made. When sending a response command to an input command, the medal count control board 17 stores "3" as the command number. When sending a response command to a settlement command, the medal count control board 17 stores "4" as the command number. When sending a response command to a termination command, the medal count control board 17 stores "5" as the command number.

The third byte stores information indicating the result of receiving the response command. The third byte includes a data area of 1 to 4 bits. If the 0th bit in the data area of the third byte is "1", the response command indicates "received OK". "Received OK" indicates that the received command received by the medal count control board 17 is normal. In the following, a response command in which the 0th bit in the data area of the third byte is "1" may be referred to as a "response command indicating received OK". In other words, the response command is a command that notifies the main control board 16 that the received command has been received normally. The received command is a command sent from the main control board 16 that is the target of the response command. If the 1st bit in the data area of the third byte is "1", the response command indicates "serial number mismatch". "Serial number mismatch" indicates that the received command received by the medal count control board 17 is not normal. In the following, a response command in which the 1st bit in the data area of the third byte is "1" may be referred to as a "response command indicating serial number mismatch". In other words, the response command indicates that the serial number of the received command that was the subject of the response did not match the serial number calculated by the medal count control board 17.

If the second bit in the data area of the third byte is "1", the response command indicates that there is an "insufficient number of game medals". When the medal count control board 17 receives an insertion command as a received command and is requested to subtract credits, but there is an insufficient number of credits, a response command with "1" stored in the second bit is sent.

If the third bit in the data area of the third byte is "1", the response command indicates "game medal count overflow". When the medal count control board 17 receives a settlement command as a received command and the number of credits (game medal count) is at the upper limit, a response command with "1" stored in the third bit is sent. The fourth byte stores a checksum to determine whether or not there was an error in the information sent in the first through third bytes.

Figure 38 shows the structure of a frame side information command. As mentioned above, the frame side information command is sent from the medal count control board 17 to the main control board 16 every 0.3 seconds.

The frame side information command is composed of 4 bytes of data. The first byte stores the message length of the frame side information command. The second byte stores the command number. The command number of the frame side information command is "81h". The third byte stores information indicating the system status of the medal count control board 17. The system status of the medal count control board 17 includes information on whether the count button has been pressed and whether the CU 3 and medal count control board 17 are normally connected. The fourth byte stores a checksum to determine whether an error has occurred in the information sent in the first to third bytes.

[Communication between the main control board and the medal count control board]
Fig. 39 is a diagram showing an example of communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. Serial communication is adopted for communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. As shown in Fig. 39, the main control board 16 transmits an input command when a bet number setting operation is performed. The bet number setting operation includes pressing the 1BET switch 20 or the MAXBET switch 6.

When the medal count control board 17 receives a command from the main control board 16, it uses a counter to measure the elapsed time. If reception of the command is not completed within 10 ms from when the command was received from the main control board 16, the medal count control board 17 determines that a timeout error has occurred in the communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. In the example of Figure 39, the medal count control board 17 completes reception of the insertion command before 10 ms has elapsed since receiving the command, so no timeout error occurs.

The medal count control board 17 transmits a response command in response to receiving the insertion command. When the main control board 16 receives a command from the medal count control board 17, it uses a counter to measure the elapsed time. If reception of the command is not completed within 2.24 ms from when the command was received from the medal count control board 17, the main control board 16 determines that a timeout error has occurred in the communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. In the example of FIG. 39, reception of the response command is completed before 2.24 ms has elapsed since it was received by the main control board 16, so no timeout error occurs.

In addition, when the main control board 16 transmits a command that requires a response command from the medal count control board 17, such as a deposit command, the main control board 16 uses a counter to measure the elapsed time from the bet number setting operation that triggered the transmission of the deposit command.

If the reception of the response command from the medal count control board 17 is not completed within 40 ms from the occurrence of an event such as a bet number setting operation, the main control board 16 determines that a timeout error has occurred in the communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. In the example of FIG. 39, the reception of the response command is completed before 40 ms has elapsed since the bet number setting operation, so a timeout error does not occur.

After receiving the response command to the input command, the main control board 16 starts control corresponding to the bet amount setting operation.

Then, the start switch 7 of the slot machine 2 is pressed by the player. In response to the start switch 7 being pressed, the main control board 16 transmits a start command to the medal count control board 17. As described above, the start command is a command that does not require a response command from the medal count control board 17. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 does not transmit a response command.

Finally, when the player performs the third stop operation, all the reels stop. Based on the fact that all the reels have stopped, the main control board 16 sends an end command to the medal count control board 17. In this example, even though the end command requires a response command, the medal count control board 17 does not send the response command. Therefore, the main control board 16 does not receive a response command until 40 ms has elapsed since all the reels stopped, and determines that a timeout error has occurred.

Figure 40 is a diagram for explaining the communication of frame side information commands. As shown in Figure 40, the medal count control board 17 sends a frame side information command to the main control board 16 every 300 ms. If a period of more than 2.24 ms has passed since the start of reception of the frame side information command until the reception is completed, the main control board 16 determines that a timeout error has occurred.

Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the processing performed when the main control board 16 receives a command. As shown in Figure 36, the medal count control board 17 transmits two types of commands to the main control board 16: a response command or a frame side information command.

Referring to FIG. 41, the main control board 16 receives a command from the medal count control board 17 (S10). The main control board 16 judges whether the received command is a frame side information command (S11). If the received command is a frame side information command (YES in S11), the main control board 16 checks whether the frame side information command contains error information (S12). The error information is information indicating whether the CU 3 is normally connected to the slot machine 2. If the frame side information command contains error information (YES in S12), the main control board 16 transmits the error information to the performance control board 15 and ends the process. This enables the performance control board 15 to display on the liquid crystal display 51 that an error has occurred in which the CU 3 is not connected to the slot machine 2. If the frame side information command does not contain error information (NO in S12), the process ends.

If the received command is not a frame side information command (NO in S11), that is, if the received command is a response command, the main control board 16 executes processing according to the response command and ends the processing.

Figure 42 is a diagram showing the flow of communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 after the power is turned on. When the power-on switch 102 is pressed and the power is turned on to the main control board 16, the main control board 16 transmits a gaming machine installation information command. After that, when the bet number setting operation is performed, the main control board 16 transmits an insertion command. Since the insertion command requires a response command, the medal count control board 17 transmits a response command to the main control board 16 based on receiving the insertion command. For example, if there is a surplus of game medals, the medal count control board 17 sets the 0th bit in the 3rd byte of the response command to "1" (received OK), if the serial numbers do not match, the 1st bit in the 3rd byte of the response command to "1" (serial number mismatch), and if the number of game medals is insufficient, the 2nd bit in the 3rd byte of the response command to "1" (insufficient number of game medals).

Then, the main control board 16 transmits a settlement command to the medal count control board 17 based on the settlement operation being performed. The settlement operation is an operation indicating that the bet number clear switch 21 has been pressed. This executes a process of returning the bet number to the credit number. Since the settlement command is a command that requires a response command, the medal count control board 17 transmits a response command to the main control board 16 based on receiving the settlement command. For example, if there is a surplus of game medals, the medal count control board 17 sets the 0th bit in the 3rd byte of the response command to "1" (received OK), if the serial numbers do not match, the 1st bit in the 3rd byte of the response command to "1" (serial number mismatch), and if the game medal number overflows, the 3rd bit in the 3rd byte of the response command to "1" (game medal number overflow).

In FIG. 42, the bet number is set again, and communication is performed based on the bet number setting operation. Next, when the start switch 7 is pressed, the main control board 16 sends a start command to the medal count control board 17. After sending the start command, the main control board 16 performs control to progress the game, such as control to drive the reels, without waiting for a response from the medal count control board 17. When the medal count control board 17 receives the start command from the main control board 16, it controls the game to wait for the end of the game as a control in response to the start command. Since the start command is a command that does not require a response command, the medal count control board 17 does not send a response command.

When all reels have stopped, the main control board 16 sends an end command to the medal count control board 17. When the medal count control board 17 receives the end command, it sends a response command to the main control board 16. For example, if the end command is normal, the medal count control board 17 sets the 0th bit in the 3rd byte of the response command to "1" (received OK), and if the serial numbers do not match, it sets the 1st bit in the 3rd byte of the response command to "1" (serial numbers do not match). Next, the main control board 16 sends the role information command, advantageous zone command, and payout pulse command to the medal count control board 17 in that order.

In this way, when the main control board 16 starts a game, it sends a start command and executes the next control without waiting for a response from the medal count control board 17, since this does not affect the number of credits, and when ending a game, it sends an end command and executes the next control on the condition that it has received a response command sent from the medal count control board 17, since this may affect the number of credits. In this way, by improving the communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17, the main control board 16 can progress through the game while checking the status of the medal count control board 17.

[Example of processing for serial numbers]
As described above, the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 communicate using serial numbers. That is, the medal count control board 17 executes a process to check whether the serial numbers match in order to determine whether the command sent from the main control board 16 is normal. An example of the process for the serial numbers will be explained below with reference to Figures 43 to 45. Figure 43 is a diagram showing an example of communication when the serial number is normal.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 16 sends a gaming machine installation information command to the medal count control board 17. As explained above, the serial number assigned to the gaming machine installation information command is "0". The medal count control board 17 determines the initial value and the additional value of the serial number based on the main chip ID included in the gaming machine installation information command. In the example of FIG. 43, the medal count control board 17 determines the initial value of the serial number to be "137" and the additional value to be "13". Using a similar calculation method, the main control board 16 determines the initial value of the serial number to be "137" and the additional value to be "13" based on the main chip ID.

After the gaming machine installation information command is sent, the bet number is set, and the main control board 16 sends a deposit command. This deposit command is the first command sent to the medal count control board 17 after the gaming machine installation information command is sent. Therefore, the main control board 16 assigns the initial value "137" as a serial number to this deposit command and sends it. The medal count control board 17 sends a response command to this deposit command. At this time, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command indicating that the medal count control board 17 has received the command, because the communication was normal. In other words, when the medal count control board 17 determines that the deposit command sent from the main control board 16 is normal by checking whether the serial numbers match, it responds to the deposit command by sending a response command to the main control board 16 indicating that the deposit command is normal.

Next, when the start switch 7 is pressed, the main control board 16 sends a start command. At this time, the main control board 16 adds an additional value of "13" to the previously sent serial number value of "137" and sends it. In other words, the main control board 16 sends the start command with a serial number of "150".

When the medal count control board 17 receives an input command with a serial number of "137", it calculates that the serial number of the next command to be received will be "150" based on the added value. When the medal count control board 17 receives a start command, it executes a process to check whether the serial number value calculated before reception matches the serial number value assigned to the start command actually received. Because the serial numbers match, the medal count control board 17 determines that communication is normal.

Figure 44 is a diagram showing an example of communication when a serial number mismatch error occurs. The process up until the main control board 16 receives a response command corresponding to the bet number setting operation is the same as in Figure 42, so the explanation will not be repeated. As described above, when the medal count control board 17 receives the insertion command, it calculates that the serial number assigned to the next command to be received is "150".

In the example of FIG. 44, after the bet number setting operation, an illegal operation is performed. As described above, an illegal operation refers to, for example, an operation in which the command transmitted and received between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 is altered, or an operation in which a fraudster controls the main control board 16 or the medal count control board 17. In FIG. 44, the main control board 16 is controlled by a fraudster, so that the main control board 16 transmits an end command even though all the reels have not stopped. That is, in FIG. 44, an illegal operation is performed with the aim of making the medal count control board 17 execute a payout process even though no winning has occurred. However, since the fraudster cannot obtain the initial value and the added value of the serial number determined based on the main chip ID of the main control board 16, and further the number of times the command has been transmitted and received, he cannot know the value of the serial number to be assigned to the next command. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 44, the fraudster sends the end command with the serial number "78", but the medal count control board 17 determines that a serial number mismatch error has occurred because the calculated serial number "150" does not match the actually received serial number "78", and sends a response command indicating that the serial numbers do not match to the main control board 16. That is, when the medal count control board 17 determines that the end command sent from the main control board 16 is not normal by the process of checking whether the serial numbers match, it responds to the end command by sending a response command to the main control board 16 indicating that the end command is not normal. The main control board 16, which receives the response command indicating that the serial numbers do not match, does not execute the payout control that is performed after the end command. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent operations.

Illegal operations include not only those that cause the main control board 16 to send an end command even though no winning has occurred, as shown in Figure 44, but also the following types of illegal operations.

For example, one possible fraudulent operation would be to have the main control board 16 send a bet cancellation command even though the bet amount set in the BET counter of RAM 161c in the main control board 16 is 0. This allows the fraudster to increase the number of credits stored in the medal count control board 17 even though no bet amount has been set.

Another possible fraudulent operation would be altering the response command sent by the medal count control board 17 in response to the insertion command sent by the main control board 16. For example, a fraudster could make the medal count control board 17 send a response command indicating receipt OK to the main control board 16 even though the number of credits is "0". This would allow the fraudster to set the bet amount even though the number of credits is "0".

Thus, possible types of fraudulent operations include forging commands sent by the main control board 16, and forging commands sent by the medal count control board 17. In the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, the use of "serial numbers" makes it possible to prevent all of the fraudulent operations described above.

Next, the start command with the serial number "150" attached is sent to the medal count control board 17. The serial number "150" attached to the start command matches the serial number calculated in advance by the medal count control board 17. Because of the match, the medal count control board 17 determines that the serial number mismatch error has been resolved, and sends a response command indicating receipt OK to the main control board 16. In this way, the slot machine 2 can easily determine that the medal count control board 17 has resolved the serial number mismatch error.

As shown in Figures 43 and 44, when the medal count control board 17 receives a command sent from the main control board 16, it uses the initial value of the serial number and the additional value to determine whether the command sent from the main control board 16 is normal or not. In other words, when the medal count control board 17 receives a command that requires a response, it sends a response command, and further, the response command is provided with information indicating whether the communication is normal or not, so that the main control board 16 can proceed with the game while checking the status of the medal count control board 17.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 44, if the serial numbers do not match, it is possible to determine that tampering may have occurred, thereby increasing security regarding communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17.

Figure 45 is a diagram showing an example of communication when an error related to game medals occurs. The processing up until the medal count control board 17 receives the start command is the same as in Figure 42, so the explanation will not be repeated. After sending the start command, the main control board 16 sends an end command with the serial number "163" attached based on the fact that all reels have stopped. At this time, the end command is attached with the number of medals to be paid out, but since the number of credits is the upper limit, an error related to game medals occurs. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command indicating a game medal count overflow to the main control board 16. As a result, the main control board 16 does not execute the processing related to payout.

Then, the number of credits is subtracted based on the operation of the counting button 10, etc., and the medal count control board 17 is in a state where it can accept the payment of medals. In other words, the error related to the game medals is resolved. After that, the main control board 16 again sends an end command with the serial number "163" to the medal count control board 17. In response, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command indicating that the medals have been received, since no error related to the game medals has occurred.

[Communication before transmission/reception of gaming machine installation information command]
46 is a diagram showing an example of communication occurring before the transmission and reception of the gaming machine installation information command. As described above, the main control board 16 transmits the gaming machine installation information command to the medal count control board 17 after the power is turned on.

In the example of FIG. 46, the main control board 16 transmits an end command to the medal count control board 17 after power is turned on and before transmitting the gaming machine installation information command. If the medal count control board 17 receives a command from the main control board 16 before receiving the gaming machine installation information command, it discards the command regardless of the type of command or the assigned serial number. In other words, the medal count control board 17 does not execute processing in response to commands other than the gaming machine installation information command from the main control board 16 until it receives at least the gaming machine installation information command.

As a result, the medal count control board 17 does not communicate with the main control board 16 when communication with the main control board 16 has not been established based on the gaming machine installation information command, thereby improving security regarding communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. In other words, it is possible to prevent unauthorized operations that are performed before the gaming machine installation information command is received.

In the example of FIG. 46, after the end command is discarded, when the power is turned on, a gaming machine installation information command A is sent to the medal count control board 17. The medal count control board 17 determines the initial value and the additional value in the serial number based on receiving the gaming machine installation information command A.

Next, in FIG. 46, the medal count control board 17 receives gaming machine installation information command B from the main control board 16. At this time, since the medal count control board 17 has already received gaming machine installation information command A, it does not update the initial value and the additional value of the serial number based on gaming machine installation information command B. In other words, even if the gaming machine installation information command is sent again from the main control board 16 after receiving the gaming machine installation information command, the medal count control board 17 does not execute processing according to the gaming machine installation information command.

This allows the medal count control board 17 to prevent, for example, spoofing of the main control board 16 by an unauthorized board other than the main control board 16 connected to the medal count control board 17. In other words, it is possible to prevent the initial value and the additional value of the serial number from being illegally rewritten.

[Power-on timeout]
47 is a diagram showing an example of a timeout when the power is turned on. The main control board 16 transmits a gaming machine installation information command when the power is turned on. The main control board 16 measures the elapsed time from when the power is turned on using a counter.

If the main control board 16 does not complete transmission of the gaming machine installation information command by the time 5000 ms has elapsed since the main control board 16 was powered on, the main control board 16 determines that an error has occurred in the communication between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17. In other words, the medal count control board 17 controls to an abnormal state when it is unable to receive the gaming machine installation information command within 5000 ms after the slot machine 2 is powered on. In the example of FIG. 47, since the gaming machine installation information command has not been transmitted by the time 5000 ms has elapsed since the main control board 16 was powered on, the medal count control board 17 determines that a communication error has occurred. The medal count control board 17 displays the occurrence of a communication error on the display 312 of the CU 3.

As a result, if communication cannot be established with the medal count control board 17 based on the gaming machine installation information command after the slot machine 2 is powered on, the medal count control board 17 can notify the outside that a communication abnormality has occurred.

The medal count control board 17 is connected to the CU control board 32. Even if a communication error occurs in the main control board 16, the medal count control board 17 can communicate with the CU control board 32.

The communication error that occurred in the main control board 16 is resolved by turning the power back on, the gaming machine installation information command being sent successfully within 5000 ms from when the main control board 16 was powered on, and the medal count control board 17 sending a response command indicating receipt OK.

[About bet setting and settlement operations]
48 is a diagram for explaining the bet number setting operation and the settlement operation. As described above, the main control board 16 transmits an insertion command to the medal number control board 17 based on the bet number setting operation in which the 1BET switch 20 or the MAXBET switch 6 is pressed. In addition, the main control board 16 transmits a settlement command to the medal number control board 17 based on the settlement operation in which the bet number clear switch 21 is pressed.

As shown in FIG. 48, the main control board 16 transmits an insertion command to the medal count control board 17 based on the bet number setting operation being performed. The insertion command is a command that includes the number of inserted medals. The medal count control board 17 reads the number of inserted medals included in the received insertion command and performs the bet number setting process. Specifically, it subtracts the number of inserted medals from the number of credits managed by the medal count control board 17 and adds the number of inserted medals to the bet number. For example, if the number of bets before the bet number setting process is performed is 0 and the MAXBET switch 6 is validly operated as the bet number setting operation, the medal count control board 17 subtracts 3 from the number of credits and adds 3 to the bet number. The medal count control board 17 transmits a response command to the main control board 16 based on receiving the insertion command.

Then, the main control board 16 transmits a settlement command to the medal count control board 17 based on the settlement operation being performed. The settlement command is a command that includes the settlement medal count. The medal count control board 17 reads the settlement medal count included in the received settlement command and performs a bet number cancellation process. Specifically, it subtracts the settlement medal count from the bet number managed by the medal count control board 17 and adds the settlement medal count to the credit number. For example, if the bet number before the bet number cancellation process is executed is three coins and the bet number clear switch 21 is pressed, the medal count control board 17 subtracts three coins from the bet number and adds three coins to the credit number. The medal count control board 17 transmits a response command to the main control board 16 based on receiving the settlement command.

Here, the medal count control board 17 transmits a common response command to the insertion command and the settlement command. That is, the medal count control board 17 transmits a common response command to the main control board 16 when it receives an insertion command and when it receives a settlement command. Specifically, the medal count control board 17 transmits a response command to the main control board 16 when it receives an insertion command and when it receives a settlement command. Here, when the medal count control board 17 receives an insertion command, it does not execute the process of adding the number of credits (number of game medals), so game medal number overflow cannot occur. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 does not store "1" in the third bit of the third byte of the response command to the insertion command and transmit it.

In addition, when the medal count control board 17 receives a settlement command, it does not execute the process of subtracting the number of credits, so a shortage of game medals cannot occur. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 does not store "1" in the second bit of the third byte of the response command to the input command and transmit it.

In this way, the medal count control board 17 notifies the main control board 16 of a medal shortage or medal overflow by differently using the data stored in the third byte when an insertion command is received and when a settlement command is received. This allows the medal count control board 17 to use a common response command when a bet number setting operation is performed and when a bet number cancellation operation is performed, thereby reducing the processing burden.

Figure 49 shows an example in which a new bet number setting operation is performed after a bet number setting operation and before a response command is received. As shown in Figure 49, the main control board 16 sends a deposit command based on bet number setting operation A. The main control board 16 controls the deposit command so that it is completed before 40 ms has elapsed since the start of transmission, so as to prevent a timeout error. The medal count control board 17 sends a response command in response to receiving the deposit command.

In the example of FIG. 49, after accepting bet number setting operation A and before receiving a response command to the input command based on bet number setting operation A, a new bet number setting operation B is performed. The main control board 16 does not accept bet number setting operation B. In other words, after sending an input command to the medal count control board 17, the main control board 16 does not accept a new bet number setting operation until it receives a response command from the medal count control board 17. This makes it possible to prevent a new bet number setting operation B from being accepted in a situation where the processing according to bet number setting operation A has not been confirmed in the medal count control board 17.

Figure 50 shows an example in which a new settlement operation is performed after a settlement operation and before a response command is received. As shown in Figure 50, the main control board 16 sends a settlement command based on settlement operation A. The main control board 16 controls the transmission of the settlement command so that it is completed before 40 ms has elapsed since the start of transmission, so as to prevent a timeout error. The medal count control board 17 sends a response command in response to receiving the settlement command.

In the example of FIG. 50, after settlement operation A is accepted, a new settlement operation B is performed before a response command to the input command based on settlement operation A is received. The main control board 16 does not accept settlement operation B. In other words, after the main control board 16 sends a settlement command to the medal count control board 17, it does not accept a new settlement operation until it receives a response command from the medal count control board 17. This makes it possible to prevent a new settlement operation B from being accepted in a situation where the processing according to settlement operation A has not been confirmed in the medal count control board 17.

Figure 51 shows an example in which a new settlement operation is performed after the bet amount setting operation and before the response command is received. As shown in Figure 51, the main control board 16 transmits a deposit command based on the bet amount setting operation. The medal count control board 17 transmits a response command in response to receiving the deposit command.

In the example of FIG. 51, after the bet number setting operation is accepted, a new settlement operation is performed before the response command to the input command based on the bet number setting operation is received. The main control board 16 does not accept this settlement operation. In other words, after the main control board 16 sends an input command to the medal count control board 17, it does not accept a new settlement operation until it receives a response command from the medal count control board 17. This makes it possible to prevent a new settlement operation from being accepted in a situation where the processing in response to the bet number setting operation has not been confirmed in the medal count control board 17.

Figure 52 shows an example in which a new bet number setting operation is performed after a settlement operation and before a response command is received. As shown in Figure 52, the main control board 16 transmits a deposit command based on the settlement operation. The medal count control board 17 transmits a response command in response to receiving the deposit command.

In the example of FIG. 52, after a settlement operation is accepted, a new bet number setting operation is performed before a response command to the settlement command based on the settlement operation is received. The main control board 16 does not accept the bet number setting operation. In other words, after the main control board 16 sends a settlement command to the medal count control board 17, it does not accept a new bet number setting operation until it receives a response command from the medal count control board 17. This makes it possible to prevent a new bet number setting operation from being accepted in a situation where the processing according to the settlement operation has not been confirmed in the medal count control board 17.

[Bet setting operation and serial number]
53 is a diagram for explaining a serial number error in a bet number setting operation. As shown in FIG. 53, the medal number control board 17 determines the initial value of the serial number to be "137" based on receiving a gaming machine installation information command.

After that, a bet number setting operation is performed on the slot machine 2. The main control board 16 sends a deposit command based on the bet number setting operation. The deposit command is assigned the serial number "78". In other words, the serial number assigned to the deposit command does not match the initial serial number value. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command indicating that the serial numbers do not match to the main control board 16. The main control board 16 does not accept new bet number setting operations from the time it receives the response command indicating that the serial numbers do not match. In other words, when the main control board 16 receives a response command indicating that it is not normal, it does not resume accepting bet number setting operations.

Figure 54 is a diagram explaining a serial number error during a settlement operation. As shown in Figure 54, the medal count control board 17 determines the initial value of the serial number to be "137" based on receiving the gaming machine installation information command.

After that, a bet number setting operation is performed on the slot machine 2. The main control board 16 sends a deposit command based on the bet number setting operation. The deposit command is assigned the serial number "137". In other words, the serial number assigned to the deposit command matches the initial serial number value. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command indicating receipt OK to the main control board 16. Based on receiving the response command indicating receipt OK, the main control board 16 accepts the bet number setting operation and performs the following control.

Next, in FIG. 54, a settlement operation is performed. The main control board 16 sends a settlement command based on the settlement operation. The settlement command is assigned the serial number "78". In other words, the serial number assigned to the settlement command does not match the serial number calculated by the medal count control board 17. Therefore, the medal count control board 17 sends a response command indicating a serial number mismatch to the main control board 16. Based on receiving the response command indicating a serial number mismatch, the main control board 16 does not accept a new settlement operation. In other words, when the main control board 16 receives a response command indicating an abnormality, it does not resume accepting settlement operations.

Referring to Figures 53 and 54, the main control board 16 can prevent a new bet number setting operation or a bet number cancellation operation from being accepted when processing corresponding to the bet number setting operation or settlement operation has not been confirmed on the medal number control board 17.

[Frame side information confirmation process]
55 is a diagram explaining the confirmation process of the frame side information. As described above, the medal count control board 17 transmits a frame side information command to the main control board 16 at regular intervals. The system information contained in the frame side information command includes information indicating the connection status indicating whether the medal count control board 17 and the CU control board 32 are normally connected.

In the example of Figure 55, the connection between the medal count control board 17 and the CU control board 32 is disconnected. After the connection is disconnected, the medal count control board 17 sends a frame side information command indicating a connection abnormality to the main control board 16. After the main control board 16 receives the frame side information command indicating a connection abnormality, the start switch 7 is pressed. At this time, the main control board 16 does not send a start command.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, even after the main control board 16 receives a frame side information command indicating a connection abnormality, if a bet number setting operation and a settlement operation are performed, the main control board 16 sends a deposit command and a settlement command. That is, when the main control board 16 receives a bet number setting operation to set the bet number for starting one game, it sends a deposit command to the medal number control board 17 regardless of whether the connection between the medal number control board 17 and the CU3 is normal or not. Also, when the main control board 16 receives a settlement operation to cancel the bet number for starting one game, it sends a settlement command to the medal number control board 17 regardless of whether the connection between the medal number control board 17 and the CU3 is normal or not. Furthermore, the main control board 16 sends a start command after the connection between the medal number control board 17 and the CU control board 32 is restored and the main control board 16 receives a frame side information command indicating a normal connection. That is, at the start of a game, the main control board 16 checks the connection status between the medal count control board 17 and the CU 3 based on the frame side information command, and starts the game if the connection between the medal count control board 17 and the CU 3 is normal. After sending the start command, the main control board 16 performs the next control without waiting for a response from the medal count control board 17. The next control is, for example, drive control of the reels to start the game.

As a result, the main control board 16 starts a game on the condition that the connection between the medal count control board 17 and CU3 is normal, so the game can proceed while checking the status of the medal count control board 17. Furthermore, since the main control board 16 does not affect the game value when starting a game, after sending the start command, it can execute the next control without waiting for a response from the medal count control board 17.

In addition, the main control board 16 can send a deposit command in response to the bet number setting operation and a settlement command in response to the settlement operation, regardless of whether the connection between the medal count control board 17 and the CU3 is normal or not.

[Display of payout quantity]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the display control of the payout number. After all reels are stopped, the main control board 16 transmits an end command to the medal count control board 17. The end command shown in FIG. 56 is a command involving at least one or more payout medals. The medal count control board 17 transmits a response command based on receiving the end command. In addition, the medal count control board 17 adds the number of credits according to the number of payout medals indicated by the end command. After receiving the response command, the main control board 16 displays the number of payout medals on the game auxiliary display 12. That is, after transmitting the end command, the main control board 16 causes the game auxiliary display 12 to display the number of payout medals on the condition that the response command is received. This allows the main control board 16 to display the number of payout medals on the game auxiliary display 12 while checking the status of the medal count control board 17.

After transmitting the response command, the main control board 16 transmits a role information command, a favorable zone command, and a payout pulse command. In other words, after transmitting the end command, the main control board 16 transmits a role information command and a favorable zone command to the medal count control board 17, which can identify whether or not the special role is controlled to a winning state, provided that the main control board 16 has received the response command. This allows the main control board 16 to inform the medal count control board 17 of whether or not it is controlled to a favorable zone, etc., while checking the status of the medal count control board 17, and therefore allows the medal count control board 17 to output the proportion of the payout number awarded in the favorable zone, etc., while checking the status of the medal count control board 17.

[About the Yakubi Monitor]
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the role ratio monitor 89. In FIG. 57, the role ratio monitor 89 when turned off is shown. As shown in FIG. 57, the role ratio monitor 89 is composed of four role ratio information indicators 50a, 50b, 50c, and 50d that can turn on/off the first segment A, the second segment B, the third segment C, the fourth segment D, the fifth segment E, the sixth segment F, and the seventh segment G, respectively, and the medal count control board 17 is an indicator that can display various information by turning on or off the first to seventh segments A to G by setting display data for each of the role ratio information indicators 50a, 50b, 50c, and 50d.

Figure 58 is a diagram showing an example of the display of the role ratio monitor 89. The medal count control board 17 causes the role ratio monitor 89 to display, in the order of (1) to (6), (1) the instructed role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, (2) the consecutive role payout ratio for the past 6000 games, (3) the role payout ratio for the past 6000 games, (4) the consecutive role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, (5) the role payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and (6) the role etc. status ratio to the total cumulative payout number. Hereinafter, the information shown in (1) to (6) may be referred to as the display contents.

The payout ratio of the special role (BB) is the ratio of the payout number of the special role (RB) to the payout number of the specified period. The consecutive role ratio is the ratio of the payout number of the special role (RB) to the payout number of the specified period. The payout ratio of the special role including the instruction is the ratio of the payout number of the special role to the payout number of the specified period when the payout number at the time of the instruction (navigation) is included in the payout number of the special role. In other words, it is the ratio of the cumulative number of the medals paid out when the navigation notification is performed and the number of medals paid out in BB or RB to the total cumulative payout number of medals. The ratio of the special role etc. state is the ratio of the number of times of play when the special role (BB, RB, CB, and SB) is won to the number of times of play in a specified period. In other words, the role ratio monitor 89 outputs the ratio of the number of medals paid out when the special role is won to the total number of medals paid out. The display content shown on the role ratio monitor 89 is calculated by the medal count control board 17.

When the medal count control unit 171 switches and displays the display contents in the display order (1) to (6) shown in FIG. 58 and described above at predetermined intervals, even if the game progresses and these values can be updated to new values within a period until each display has completed a cycle, it restricts the updating to new values and cycles through the display using the original values.

In detail, if the game progresses and these values can be updated to new values within a period until the display is completed, new values are calculated and stored in the RAM 171c, but the new values are not set in the output buffer for displaying the display contents on the role ratio monitor 89, and the original values are set, so that the display on the role ratio monitor 89 is completed using the original values set in the output buffer, and when the display is completed, a new value is set in the output buffer, and the new values are then displayed. Also, if the values can be updated to new values within a period until the display is completed, the calculation for obtaining new values may be restricted, the display on the role ratio monitor 89 is completed, and when the display is completed, a calculation for obtaining new values may be performed, and then the new values may be used to display the display on the role ratio monitor 89. In this way, it is possible to prevent values calculated at different times from being mixed together during the period until the display contents on the role ratio monitor 89 are completed.

In addition, if the consecutive payout ratio of the past 6000 games and the consecutive payout ratio of the total cumulative payout number exceed a specified ratio (e.g., 60%), the medal count control board 17 displays the consecutive payout ratio in a different display mode from the normal mode (e.g., if the normal mode is always on, the top two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 flash).In addition, if the consecutive payout ratio of the past 6000 games and the consecutive payout ratio of the total cumulative payout number exceed a specified ratio (e.g., 70%), the medal count control board 17 displays the consecutive payout ratio in a different display mode from the normal mode (e.g., if the normal mode is always on, the top two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 flash).

In this way, when the consecutive feature payout ratio or feature payout ratio exceeds a prescribed ratio, it is displayed in a different way than usual, to warn that there is a possibility that the game is being controlled to a highly gambling state.

In addition, when the medal count control board 17 displays the consecutive payout ratio and payout ratio of the past 6000 games on the role ratio monitor 89, if the total number of games played since the power was turned on has not reached 6000 games, the medal count control board 17 controls the display mode to be different from the normal display mode, for example, by blinking all the digits on the role ratio monitor 89, so that it can be recognized that the tally has not reached 6000 games. That is, in the process of calculating the display contents to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 89, the medal count control board 17 blinks all the digits on the role ratio monitor 89 when the period in which 6000 games are consumed has not elapsed since the start of accumulation of the data used in the process. Note that, in the process of calculating the display contents to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 89, the medal count control board 17 may blink some of the digits on the role ratio monitor 89 when the period in which 6000 games are consumed has not elapsed since the start of accumulation of the data used in the process. This makes it possible to recognize the possibility that there is a bias in the displayed ratios and rates, and the medal count control board 17 can notify the outside that there may be a lack of data when displaying the consecutive role payout ratio and role payout ratio on the role ratio monitor 89.

In addition, the medal count control board 17 may display "00" in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 when 6000 games have not been reached, and may display the ratio or rate to be displayed in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 after 6000 games have been reached. In other words, it is preferable to configure the display mode of the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 to be different from the display mode after 6000 games when 6000 games have not been reached. By configuring in this way, when 6000 games have not been reached, it is possible to recognize that the tally of the consecutive role payout ratio, etc., specified by the display of the upper two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 (for example, "1C") has not reached 6000 games, and it is possible to recognize that there is a bias in the displayed ratio or rate. In addition, by configuring the lowest two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 to display "00" when 6000 games have not been reached, data will always be displayed in the lowest two digits of the role ratio monitor 89 when 6000 games have not been reached. For example, if no data is displayed in one of the lowest two digits of the role ratio monitor 89, an abnormality in the role ratio monitor 89 can be recognized.

In addition, when the medal count control board 17 displays the consecutive feature payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number on the feature ratio monitor 89, if the number of past games has not reached the specified number of games (e.g., 175,000 games) at which the consecutive feature payout ratio generally converges to the design value of the slot machine, the medal count control board 17 controls the display mode to be different from the normal mode, for example by blinking the top two digits of the feature ratio monitor 89, so that it is possible to recognize that the specified number of games at which the consecutive feature payout ratio generally converges to the design value of the slot machine has not been reached, and it is possible to recognize that there may be a bias in the displayed rate and ratio.

In addition, when the medal count control board 17 displays the payout ratio of the reel to the total cumulative payout number on the reel ratio monitor 89, if the number of past games has not reached the specified number of games (e.g., 175,000 games) at which the payout ratio of the reel converges to the design value of the slot machine, the medal count control board 17 controls the display mode to be different from the normal mode, for example by blinking the top two digits of the reel ratio monitor 89, so that it is possible to recognize that the specified number of games at which the payout ratio of the reel converges to the design value of the slot machine has not been reached and that there may be a bias in the displayed rate and ratio.

In addition, when the medal count control board 17 displays the instruction-based feature payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number on the role ratio monitor 89, if the number of past games has not reached the specified number of games (e.g., 175,000 games) at which the instruction-based feature payout ratio generally converges to the design value of the slot machine, the medal count control board 17 controls the display mode to be different from the normal mode, for example by blinking the top two digits of the role ratio monitor 89, so that it is possible to recognize that the specified number of games at which the instruction-based feature payout ratio generally converges to the design value of the slot machine has not been reached, and it is possible to recognize that there may be a bias in the displayed ratio.

The medal count control board 17 also determines whether the data used to calculate the consecutive feature payout ratio and feature payout ratio for the past 6000 games is normal, and if it is determined to be abnormal (such as when the stored value is in a certain data format (such as 01 repetition)), it initializes the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to that data, and causes the feature ratio monitor 89 to display (for example, "FFFF") that an abnormality has been detected, thereby notifying the user that the calculation of this data is not normal.

When initializing data determined to be abnormal and data related to that data, for example, if either the consecutive feature payout ratio or the feature payout ratio over the past 6,000 games is determined to be abnormal, all of the data related to this may be initialized, or only a portion of the data may be initialized.

In addition, the system may determine whether the data used to calculate the continuous feature payout ratio, feature payout ratio, and command-included feature payout ratio for the past 6000 games or total cumulative payout number is normal, and if an abnormality is determined, a notification to that effect may be issued, and then the data may be initialized by performing a specified operation (for example, operating switches such as start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and setting key switch 37 in a specified sequence).

In addition, when an abnormality is detected, the notification may be given by having the role ratio monitor 89 display an abnormality (for example, "FFFF") as described above, or, when an abnormality is detected, a command that can identify the abnormality may be sent to the performance control unit 151, and the performance control unit 151 may notify the user of the abnormality using the LCD display 51 or the like.

In this embodiment, the following are displayed in a predetermined period from when the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped: the payout ratio of the instructed feature to the total cumulative payout number, the consecutive feature payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the feature payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the consecutive feature payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the feature payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the feature etc. status ratio to the total cumulative payout number. However, they may be displayed only when the open state of the front door 1b is detected, or only when the operation of a predetermined operation switch (e.g., the reset/setting switch 38) is detected, or when not playing a game, or when the settings are changed or confirmed, or only for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Also, instead of automatically switching at a predetermined period, the display contents may be switched every time a predetermined operation is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the role ratio monitor 89 is used to notify the user that an abnormality has been detected in the data used to calculate the display content of the role ratio monitor 89, or that there is a period of time in which there is insufficient data to calculate the display content. However, a command that can identify this fact may be sent to the performance control unit 151, so that the information can be confirmed on the LCD display 51 or performance device controlled by the performance control unit 151.

In addition, in this embodiment, the payout ratio of instructed feature to the total cumulative payout number, the consecutive feature payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the feature payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the consecutive feature payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the feature payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the feature etc. status ratio to the total cumulative payout number are displayed on the feature ratio monitor 89. In addition to these displays, the feature ratio monitor 89 may also display information that allows the user to recognize when the RAM 171c has been initialized due to a setting change, or when a break has been detected in the wiring (such as the wiring of the backup power supply) installed in the slot machine 2.

In particular, when settings are changed during a bonus, during an advantageous period, or while a bonus is being carried over, and the bonus or advantageous period is forcibly ended, or a carried-over bonus is cleared, or when a game is played more than the specified number of times while a bonus is being carried over, or when an operation is performed intentionally to end an advantageous period, i.e., when a game state that is relatively advantageous to the player is intentionally shifted to an unfavorable game state, or when it is detected that the game ratio monitor 89 is not properly connected due to a disconnection or the like, a notification to that effect is given in an identifiable manner. In this way, it is possible to recognize the possibility that fraudulent operation has been performed so that correct information such as the payout ratio of reels, consecutive payout ratio of reels, and payout ratio of reels with instructions is not displayed.

In addition, in a configuration in which the total cumulative data is initialized to avoid overflow of the total cumulative number of games played or the total cumulative number of payouts, it is preferable to notify the user of this in a manner that is identifiable and different from the case in which there is a possibility of fraudulent operation so that correct information is not displayed as the aforementioned feature payout ratio, continuous feature payout ratio, and instruction-included feature payout ratio. In this way, the user can be made aware that the total cumulative number of games played or the total cumulative number of payouts has been initialized by the process to avoid overflow, separately from initialization due to fraudulent operation to prevent correct information from being displayed as the feature payout ratio, etc.

As mentioned above, if there is a possibility of fraudulent operation so that correct information such as the payout ratio of the reels, the consecutive reels, or the payout ratio of the reels with instructions is not displayed, this is detected and the history of the detection is recorded on the medal count control board 17 side, and without announcing the detection, a specified operation is then performed, so that the history can be confirmed on a display provided on the medal count control board 17 side (e.g., the reels ratio monitor 89, etc.), a display provided on the performance control unit 151 side (e.g., the liquid crystal display 51, etc.), or an external display of the slot machine 2 (e.g., the display 312, etc.).

It may also be possible to confirm on a display or presentation device controlled by the presentation control unit 151 that the settings have been changed, that a disconnection has been detected, that a connection failure has occurred in the role ratio monitor 89 and the correct information may not be displayed as the role payout ratio, the continuous role payout ratio, the role payout ratio with instruction, etc., and that as described above, the role payout ratio, the continuous role payout ratio, the role payout ratio with instruction, etc. may have been improperly operated so that the correct information is not displayed. In addition, the presentation control unit 151 may record a history of detections of possible improper operations so that the correct information is not displayed as the role payout ratio, the continuous role payout ratio, the role payout ratio with instruction, etc., by changing the settings during a bonus, during a favorable zone, or while a bonus is being carried over, forcing the bonus or favorable zone to end, or clearing the carried-over bonus, and the like, and this history may be confirmed by a specified operation.

[Initialization process of role ratio information]
59 is a diagram for explaining the initialization process of the role ratio information. As shown in FIG. 59, after the power is turned on, the main control board 16 transmits the gaming machine installation information command A to the medal count control board 17. After that, the game is repeated, and the main control board 16 transmits the advantageous zone command and the payout pulse command to the medal count control board 17.

The medal count control board 17 executes a backup process to store the role ratio information in the backup memory 294 based on receiving a payout pulse command. The role ratio information is data used to calculate the data to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 89, and is included in the role information command, the advantageous zone command, and the payout pulse command. The medal count control board 17 may store the role ratio information in the backup memory 294 each time it receives a command including the role ratio information.

In the example of FIG. 59, after the backup process is executed, an illegal operation is performed on the main control board 16. As described above, the "illegal operation" refers to an operation in which the command exchanged between the main control board 16 and the medal count control board 17 is altered, or an operation to illegally control the main control board 16 or the medal count control board 17. In the example of FIG. 44, due to the illegal operation, the main control board 16 is controlled by an illegally connected device, and the main control board 16 transmits a gaming machine installation information command B to the medal count control board 17. At this time, the medal count control board 17 again executes backup initialization to initialize the role ratio information stored in the backup memory 294 based on the reception of the gaming machine installation information command. In other words, the medal count control board 17 initializes the data used to display the role ratio monitor 89 when the main chip ID identified from the gaming machine installation information command is different from the main chip ID identified from the gaming machine installation information command received last time.

As a result, the medal count control board 17 initializes the data used to display the role ratio information if the main control board 16 is not legitimate based on the main chip ID possessed by the main control board 16, thereby ensuring that the correct role ratio corresponding to each slot machine is output.

[About in-capacity and out-of-capacity programs]
The main control unit 161 of the slot machine 2 of this embodiment executes a program within the capacity and a program outside the capacity. The program within the capacity is a program in which instructions related to the progress of the game, such as an internal lottery process, are written. The program outside the capacity is a program in which instructions not directly related to the progress of the game, such as an output process of data to a winning ratio monitor, are written. If data is unintentionally mixed between the program within the capacity and the program outside the capacity, a malfunction may occur. For example, if data in the RAM area outside the capacity is rewritten by an instruction of the program within the capacity, even though the data should be rewritten, this may cause a malfunction of the program. In order to prevent such a malfunction, the main control unit 161 distinguishes between the program within the capacity and the program outside the capacity, executes the program, and progresses the game.

The following describes the areas in which out-of-capacity programs and in-capacity programs are stored, using Figure 60. Figure 60 is an address map of the memory area used by the main control unit 161. As shown in Figure 60, the memory area used by the main control unit 161 includes a memory area (0000H to EFFFH) allocated to ROM 161b and a memory area (F000H to FFFFH) allocated to RAM 161c.

The memory area of ROM 161b consists of a program/data area where programs and fixed data are stored, an unused area where access is prohibited, and other areas. The other areas include a ROM comment area where any data such as the program title and version can be set, a vector table area where the upper addresses of the subroutines of the CALLV instruction and the top address of the timer interrupt process (main) are set, a HW parameter area where parameters for setting the internal functions of the main control unit 161 in hardware terms are set, and an unused area where access is prohibited.

The memory area of RAM 161c consists of a usable area (F000H to F400H) that can be used as a work area, and other areas (F401H to FFFFH). The other areas include an internal function register area (FE00H to FEACH) that stores registers for controlling each function mounted in the main control unit 161. Each function mounted in the main control unit 161 includes, for example, the function of the serial communication circuit described below. In other words, the internal function register area of RAM 161c includes a storage area for setting the functions of the serial communication circuit.

The program/data areas in ROM 161b include an in-capacity program area in which in-capacity programs directly related to the progress of the game are stored, an in-capacity data area in which in-capacity data used by the in-capacity programs is stored, an out-of-capacity program area in which out-of-capacity programs not directly related to the progress of the game are stored, an out-of-capacity data area in which out-of-capacity data used by the out-of-capacity programs is stored, and an unused area.

The progression of a game refers to the progression of a series of processes that make up the game. In the case of a slot machine, this refers to the progression of the stages: setting the bet amount so that the game can begin, starting the game and spinning the reels, stopping the reels to derive a display result, and awarding value such as medals according to the display result.

Note that in the above, "before" or "after" a storage area refers to the relationship between the address values assigned to the storage areas, with the smaller address being the front and the larger address being the back. Therefore, a storage area allocated behind a certain storage area is one with a larger address value than that storage area, and a storage area allocated ahead of a certain storage area is one with a smaller address value than that storage area.

RAM 161c includes an internal RAM area used by internal programs as a work area, an external RAM area used by external programs as a work area, and an unused area where data used for control is never stored and always contains 0. The internal RAM area includes an internal stack area where internal programs save data, and the external RAM area includes an external stack area where external programs save data. A temporary stack area (to be described later) is allocated to a 4-byte area from the final address (F1FFH) of the internal RAM area toward the top address, and a temporary payout management stack area (to be described later) is allocated to a further 4-byte area toward the top address, and the internal stack area is allocated to the top address side of the payout management stack area, and data is saved toward the address toward the top address side. The external stack area is also designed to save data from the final address (F1FFH) of the internal RAM area toward the top address.

As shown in FIG. 61, the internal RAM area is composed of areas A to F, an unused area, an internal stack area, and a temporary stack area for managing payouts and used only in the initial setting process described later. Area A is assigned as a storage area for the setting value and the state of the setting key switch 37. Area B is assigned as a storage area for the output buffers of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, etc., door commands, signal buffers during the favorable zone, AT status, external signal flags, etc. Area C is assigned as a storage area for the timer counter, output buffer of the LED, control data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, external signal data, etc. Area D is assigned as a storage area for the game status, RT status, replay medal counter, counter during BB, etc. Area E is assigned as a storage area for stopped reel information (stop order, etc.), winning flag, instruction number, favorable zone end flag, reel performance, reel motor status, number of medals inserted, random number, reel status, reel control data, etc. Area F is assigned to a payout-related area in which data related to control with the medal count control board 17 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 61, the area from area A to the temporary payout management stack area is called the total area to be initialized, the area from area B to the unused area just before the stack area is called the area to be initialized when the setting change starts, the area from area C to area E is called the area to be initialized when the setting change ends, areas D and E are called the areas to be initialized when the BB ends, and area E is called the area to be initialized when each game ends. The total area to be initialized is an area that is initialized when a RAM abnormality error occurs. The area to be initialized when the setting change starts is an area that is initialized when the setting change starts. The area to be initialized when the setting change ends is an area that is initialized when the setting change ends. The area to be initialized when the BB ends is an area that is initialized when the BB ends. The area to be initialized when each game ends is an area that is initialized every time a game ends.

In the following, the internal program area, internal data area, and internal RAM area may be collectively referred to as the internal area, and the external program area, external data area, and external RAM area may be collectively referred to as the external area.

[Instructions used by the program]
The programs executed by the main control unit 161 include a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program, and subroutines that are called during the execution of other programs.

The main control unit 161 includes an LD instruction as an instruction to read data stored in ROM 161b and RAM 161c, and an instruction to write data to RAM 161c. The LD instruction is an instruction to read one byte of data stored at a specified address in a main routine or subroutine to a specified register, or an instruction to write one byte of data stored at a specified register in a main routine or subroutine to a specified address.

The LD instruction includes a normal LD instruction and a special LD instruction, the LDQ instruction. A normal LD instruction is an instruction that specifies a register and both an upper address and a lower address, and reads data from ROM 161b or RAM 161c that is stored at the specified upper address and lower address, or an instruction that specifies both an upper address and a lower address, and a register, and writes the data in the specified register to the specified upper address and lower address of RAM 161c. In contrast, the LDQ instruction is an instruction that specifies an address by specifying only a register and a lower address, using a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address in a special register (Q register) in the internal function register area of the aforementioned RAM 161c, and reads data from ROM 161b or RAM 161c stored at the specified address into the specified register, or specifies an address by specifying only a lower address and a register, using a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address in a special register (Q register), and writes the data in the specified register to a specified address in RAM 161c, making it possible to store specified data in a specified register with a smaller amount of data than with a normal LD instruction.

The LDQ instruction can also read two bytes of data stored in an address specified by a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address in a special register (Q register) and the address following that by specifying two registers such as the HL register or the DE register as the transfer destination, and can write two bytes of data to an address specified by a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address in a special register (Q register) and the address following that by specifying two registers such as the HL register or the DE register as the transfer source.

When reading data stored in a specific area of ROM 161b or RAM 161c in a main routine or subroutine, it is possible to use the LDQ command, which is a special LD command, to read data from a specific area or write data to a specific area by specifying only the lower part of the address, rather than specifying all addresses (upper and lower parts) that indicate the specific area. By using the LDQ command, it is possible to read or write data with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD command that specifies both an upper and lower address, and it is possible to reduce the amount of program waste required to specify an address when reading or writing data.

Furthermore, among the data stored in the internal RAM area of RAM 161c, particularly frequently used data is stored in an area of the internal RAM area whose leading address is a specific value, and this specific value is set as the upper address of the data in the capacity in a special register (Q register). When the main control unit 161 reads the data in the capacity, the LDQ command is used to specify only the lower address, and when the data in the capacity is read or written, it becomes possible to read or write the data in the capacity with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD command that specifies both the upper and lower addresses, and this reduces the waste of programs for specifying addresses when reading or writing the data in the capacity.

The main control unit 161 can change the value set in the special register (Q register) in the main routine or subroutine, and as described below, when setting the built-in register in the initial setting process performed at startup, the special register (Q register) is set to a specific value indicating the top address of the in-capacity data that is used frequently by the in-capacity program as an initial value. In this embodiment, the special register (Q register) includes two registers, the first Q register and the second Q register, but below, the first Q register and the second Q register are collectively referred to simply as the "special register (Q register)". For example, the special register (Q register) stores "F0" as an initial value. As a result, when the in-capacity program is being executed, a specific value indicating the top address of the in-capacity data that is used frequently by the in-capacity program is set in the special register (Q register), and the in-capacity program can read or write the in-capacity data that is used frequently using the LDQ command.

The upper address used when reading with the LDQ instruction as a special LD instruction may be set in a specified storage area other than a special register (e.g., Q register), such as a vector table area. A part of the address is specified using a value stored in a specified storage area such as a vector table area, and the remaining part of the address is specified by a program, so that the storage address of the data can be specified. In this case, the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading or writing data can be reduced. In addition, even if a special LD instruction is used, for example, an identification value with a data amount smaller than the address is assigned to each of the multiple areas constituting the vector table area, and the storage address of the data stored in each of the multiple areas is set by specifying the identification value, the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading or writing data can be reduced.

The main control unit 161 also includes a CALL instruction (call instruction) as an instruction for causing the main control unit 161 to execute a program stored in the program/data area. The CALL instruction is an instruction for calling and executing a subroutine stored at a specified address in a main routine or subroutine. When calling a subroutine with a CALL instruction, the main control unit 161 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specified address. Then, when the subroutine ends, a RET instruction (return instruction) is used to return to the address of the caller stored in the stack area, i.e., the main routine or subroutine program that executed the CALL instruction.

Furthermore, a CALLEX instruction is included as an instruction for causing the main control unit 161 to execute a program stored in the program/data area. The CALLEX instruction not only calls a subroutine stored at an address specified in the main routine or subroutine, but also switches register banks. Figure 62 is a diagram for explaining the register banks included in the CPU 161a of the main control unit 161. As shown in Figure 62, the CPU 161a has a first register bank R1 and a second register bank R2.

The first register bank R1 includes ten registers: a first Q register, a first U register, a first A register, a first B register, a first C register, a first D register, a first E register, a first F register, a first H register, and a first L register. Similarly, the second register bank R2 includes ten registers: a second Q register, a second U register, a second A register, a second B register, a second C register, a second D register, a second E register, a second F register, a second H register, and a second L register.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 161 uses the first register bank R1 when executing instructions according to a program written in the internal program area, and uses the second register bank R2 when executing instructions according to a program written in the external program area. In other words, the main control unit 161 does not use the second register bank R2 when executing instructions according to a program written in the internal program area, and does not use the first register bank R1 when executing instructions according to a program written in the external program area. This prevents data from being unintentionally mixed between the internal program and the external program in the slot machine 2 in this embodiment, which would cause malfunctions. In the following, the program written in the internal program area is simply referred to as the "internal program", and the program written in the external program area is simply referred to as the "external program".

That is, when the main control unit 161 is executing the in-capacity program as the main routine, it uses the first register bank R1, but when the out-capacity program is called as a subroutine by the CALLEX command, it switches from the first register bank R1 to the second register bank R2. More specifically, when the main control unit 161 calls the out-capacity program area as a subroutine by the CALLEX command, it stores the address of the caller in the stack area, calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specified address. Then, at the end of the subroutine, it returns to the address of the caller stored in the stack area, i.e., the in-capacity program that executed the CALLEX command, by the RETEX command (return command), and switches from the second register bank R2 to the first register bank R1. As a result, in the slot machine 2 in this embodiment, different register banks can be used when the in-capacity program is being executed and when the out-capacity program is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the processing contents in the in-capacity program area and the processing contents in the out-capacity program area from being mixed on the register.

Each register in the first and second register banks is assigned a role and function. The first A register and second A register are general-purpose registers called accumulators and have a variety of functions. The first B register, second B register, first C register, and second C register are also general-purpose registers, but have fewer specific functions than the A register.

The first F register and the second F register are called flag registers. The flag registers are configured to change depending on the result of an operation. Each of the first F register and the second F register is composed of 8 bits, and a flag for determining whether an overflow has occurred is stored in the second bit. If an overflow occurs as a result of an operation in the first register bank R1 and the second register bank R2, a "1" is stored in the second bit of the flag register. Hereinafter, the storage of a "1" in the second bit of the flag register due to an overflow is referred to as "the flag register being in the on state."

Overflow includes both overflow due to addition and overflow due to subtraction. In other words, overflow means that the result of an operation exceeds the capacity of a predetermined storage area. Overflow includes both exceeding the upper limit of the storage capacity and falling below the lower limit of the storage capacity. More specifically, overflow includes the process of adding "1" to an 8-byte storage area in which "1111 1111 1111 1111" is stored. Overflow includes the process of subtracting "1" from an 8-byte storage area in which "0000 0000 0000 0000" is stored. Note that overflow due to subtraction is sometimes called underflow. This allows the main control unit 161 to detect whether an overflow has occurred in the result of an operation using a flag register. Since the overflow detection process can be detected using the function of a register, the processing speed is faster and the processing load is smaller than when it is detected by a program.

[Q register setting]
63 is a flow chart showing the start-up process of the main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 is realized as a control computer such as a microcomputer. In the main control unit 161, a start-up process is executed to set, for example, the hardware functions of the microcomputer before the user program is executed. The user program is a program for controlling the progress of the game, is a program stored in the ROM 161b, and means a program designed by a gaming machine manufacturer or the like. On the other hand, the start-up process is a process provided in the main control unit 161 itself, and is automatically executed when the main control unit 161 is started.

The main control unit 161 executes the startup process of the main control unit 161 shown in FIG. 63 based on the supply of power to the main control unit 161. In FIG. 63, as an example of a setting process related to the hardware functions of the main control unit 161, initial values are set in the first Q register and the second Q register (Sj1). After executing Sj1, although not shown, the main control unit 161 may perform a setting process related to the hardware functions of the main control unit 161. The setting process related to the hardware functions may, for example, set the functions of a serial communication circuit.

In Sj1 of this embodiment, the initial value of the first Q register is, for example, "F0", and the initial value of the second Q register is, for example, "F3". This allows the main control unit 161 to reduce the waste of programs for specifying addresses when calling an internal RAM area that is referenced and written to frequently when executing an internal program. Similarly, the main control unit 161 can reduce the waste of programs for specifying addresses when calling an external RAM area that is referenced and written to frequently when executing an external program. This allows the main control unit 161 of this embodiment to reduce the program capacity when executing instructions in both internal and external programs.

The main control unit 161 sets initial values in the first Q register and the second Q register in Sj1, and then executes the user program (Sj2). The user program includes an initial setting process described later in FIG. 64 and a main process described later in FIG. 67. In this way, before the user program starts controlling the game, an initial value is set in the first Q register and an initial value is also set in advance in the second Q register. As a result, the main control unit 161 can set initial values in the first Q register and the second Q register before starting control of the game, simplifying the processing. In addition, with this configuration, it is not necessary to set values in the first Q register and the second Q register in the user program. In other words, the processing performed in the user program can be reduced. In this embodiment, the initial values in the first Q register and the second Q register are different values, but the same value may be set as the initial value.

[Initial setting process of main control board 16]
64 is a diagram for explaining the initial setting process performed by the main control board 16. The initial setting process is included in the user program and is described in the internal program area of the ROM 161b.

When power supply to the slot machine 2 is started, the main control board 16 starts up with timer interrupts set to disabled due to a reset, and performs various processes according to the programs stored in the ROM 161b of the main control board 16. After starting up, it first initializes all output ports 0 to 9 and performs the initial setting process included in the in-capacity program.

The initial setting process starts with timer interruption prohibited, and as shown in FIG. 64, in the initial setting process, first, a predetermined area of the input port is referenced (Sa1) to determine whether or not the power interruption detection signal output from the power interruption detection circuit is ON (Sa2). If the power interruption detection signal is ON, the process waits until the power interruption detection signal is OFF. After that, the power supply voltage of the slot machine 2 becomes normal and the power interruption detection signal is OFF, and then the internal register setting process is performed (Sa3). In the internal register setting process, in particular, values are set in the first Q register and the second Q register. "F0" is set in the first Q register, and "F3" is set in the second Q register. That is, in the internal register setting process, the same process as Sj1 in FIG. 63 is performed. In other words, the same value is reset in the first Q register and the second Q register.

In this way, the main control unit 161 sets a value in the first Q register and also in the second Q register not only in the startup process but also in the user program. This allows the main control unit 161 to set any value in the first Q register and the second Q register in the user program. Even if an abnormality occurs in the startup process of the main control unit 161 and the initial values are not set in the first Q register and the second Q register in Sj1, the first Q register and the second Q register are set in the user program, so that it is possible to prevent an abnormality from occurring in the user program due to the fact that values are not set in the first Q register and the second Q register. In the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, values are set in the first Q register and the second Q register in both the process of Sj1 in FIG. 62 and the process of Sa3 in FIG. 64, but the slot machine 2 may be configured to perform only one of the processes of Sj1 in FIG. 63 and the process of Sa3 in FIG. 64.

Next, the address of the temporary stack area is set in the stack pointer (Sa4), RAM access permission is set (Sa5), and external RAM area initialization processing is called (Sa6). That is, the processing of Sa6 is processing for calling an external program from an internal program. For this reason, the processing name of Sa6 ends with the word "(external)". In the initial setting processing shown in FIG. 64 and the main processing shown in FIG. 67, the processing name for calling an external program from an internal program ends with the word "(external)". In the following, such processing for calling an external program from an internal program is simply referred to as "external program call processing". The CALLEX instruction described above is used for external program call processing.

In addition, when Sa6 calls the extra RAM initialization process, the registers are saved, and at this time, the registers are saved to the temporary stack area set in the stack pointer in Sa5.

When an out-of-capacity program call process such as the out-of-capacity RAM initialization process of Sa6 is executed, the main control unit 161 executes a process of switching the register bank used by the CPU 161a from the first register bank R1 to the second register bank R2 and a process of setting the value of the second Q register at the beginning of the process corresponding to the out-of-capacity program call process. At this time, "F3" is set in the second Q register. In other words, in the out-of-capacity program call process, the value of the second Q register is reset, similar to Sj1 in FIG. 63 and Sa3 in FIG. 64.

In this way, the main control unit 161 sets a value in the first Q register in Sj1 in FIG. 6 and Sa3 in FIG. 64 before the control of the game is started, and sets a value in the second Q register each time an out-of-capacity program call process is executed to call an out-of-capacity program from an in-capacity program. As a result, in the slot machine 2 in this embodiment, even if an unintended value is set in the second Q register of the second register bank R2, the value of the second Q register of the second register bank R2 can be reset each time the out-of-capacity program is called, so that malfunctions can be prevented. Note that the main control unit 161 does not need to set a value in the second Q register each time the out-of-capacity program is called. That is, as described above, in the slot machine 2 in this embodiment, values are set in the first Q register and the second Q register in advance in the process of Sj1 in FIG. 63 and the process of Sa3 in FIG. 64 before the control of the progress of the game is performed, so that the value of the second Q register is already set in the second Q register even if the value of the second Q register is not set each time the out-of-capacity program is called.

In addition, in the process of Sj1 in FIG. 63 and the process of Sa2Q in FIG. 64, the main control unit 161 may set a value only in the first Q register without setting a value in the second Q register, and set the value of the second Q register when the out-of-capacity program is called. In this case, the main control unit 161 may set the value of the second Q register only when the out-of-capacity program is called for the first time after power-on. In other words, as described above, in order to ensure prevention of malfunctions, the value of the second Q register is not reset every time the out-of-capacity program is called, but the value of the second Q register is set only when the out-of-capacity program is called for the first time after power-on, thereby simplifying the process.

In the extra-capacity RAM initialization process of Sa6, as shown in FIG. 65, first, the RAM parity, which is the exclusive OR of the data stored in all areas of RAM 161c, is calculated (Sb1), and it is determined whether the RAM parity is 0 (Sb2).

If power outage processing is performed normally when power is interrupted, parity adjustment data is set so that the RAM parity of all areas of RAM 161c is 0, and if the RAM parity in Sb2 is not 0, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in RAM 161c.

In addition, in Sa6, when the external RAM initialization process is called, the register values are saved to the temporary stack area of RAM 161c, but after that, after the external RAM initialization process is completed and the registers are restored, the temporary stack area is not used and the values of the temporary stack area are maintained as they are. When the external RAM initialization process is called in the initial setting process the next time the power is turned on, the same register values are stored in the temporary stack area again. In other words, the temporary stack area always stores the same data when there is no abnormality in the data in RAM 161c, so it is possible to correctly determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in RAM 161c even when a determination is made based on the RAM parity of the entire area of RAM 161c, including the value of the temporary stack area.

If it is determined in Sb2 that the RAM parity is 0, destructive diagnostic data is acquired (Sb3). The destructive diagnostic data is 1 byte of data that is set in RAM 161c during power outage processing, and is data in which multiple bits are 1.

After acquiring the destructive diagnosis data in Sb3, the destructive diagnosis data set in RAM 161c is cleared (Sb4), and it is determined whether the destructive diagnosis data acquired in Sb3 is 0 (Sb5).

If power outage processing is performed normally when power is interrupted, destructive diagnostic data in which multiple bits are 1 is set in RAM 161c as described above. If the destructive diagnostic data is 0 in Sb5, all data may have been initialized even if the RAM parity is 0. In such a case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in RAM 161c.

If the RAM parity is 0 in Sb2 and the destruction diagnostic data is not 0 in Sb5, that is, if it is determined that the data in RAM 161c is not abnormal, the process returns to the initial setting process in FIG. 64.

On the other hand, if the RAM parity is not 0 in Sb2, or if the destruction diagnostic data is 0 in Sb5, i.e., if it is determined that the data in RAM 161c is abnormal, the entire external RAM area of RAM 161c is initialized (Sb6) without returning to the initial setting process, i.e., the internal program, and a RAM destruction diagnostic flag indicating that the data in RAM 161c has been destroyed is set in a specified area of the external RAM area (Sb7), and then the initial setting process of FIG. 64 is returned to.

After the external RAM initialization process in Sa6 is completed, it is determined whether the RAM destruction diagnostic flag is set (Sa7), and if it is determined that the RAM destruction diagnostic flag is not set, i.e., if it is determined that the data in RAM 161c is not abnormal, proceed to Sa9, and if it is determined that the RAM destruction diagnostic flag is set, i.e., if it is determined that the data in RAM 161c is abnormal, initialize all initialization areas of the internal RAM area (Sa8) and proceed to Sa9. The entire initialization area initialized in Sa8 does not include the temporary stack area and the temporary stack area for payout management, and the data in the temporary stack area and the temporary stack area for payout management is maintained. In particular, by maintaining the data in the temporary stack area, it is possible to ensure that the RAM parity will be 0 after the registers are saved to the temporary stack area the next time the power is turned on.

In Sa9, the address of the temporary payout management stack area is set to the stack pointer, and the payout management area initialization process is called and executed to initialize the payout management area (Sa10).

In addition, when the payout management area initialization process is called in Sa10, the registers are saved to the payout management temporary stack area set in the stack pointer in Sa9. After that, after the payout management area initialization process is completed and the registers are restored, the payout management temporary stack area is not used and the value of the payout management temporary stack area is maintained as it is, so it is possible to correctly determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in RAM 161c even when the determination is based on the RAM parity of the entire area of RAM 161c, including the value of the payout management temporary stack area.

After the payout management area initialization process in Sa10 is completed, the address of the internal stack area is set to the stack pointer (Sa11), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 37 is ON or not (Sa12). If it is determined that the setting key switch 37 is ON, i.e., if the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, a gaming machine installation information command is sent to the medal count control board 17 (Sa13), and the process proceeds to the setting change process shown in FIG. 65.

If it is determined in Sa12 that the setting key switch 37 is not ON, it is determined whether or not the RAM destruction diagnostic flag is set (Sa14). If it is determined that the RAM destruction diagnostic flag is not set, that is, if it is determined that the data in RAM 161c is not abnormal, it is determined whether or not the reset/setting switch 38 is ON (Sa15). If it is determined that the reset/setting switch 38 is ON, that is, the setting key switch 37 is OFF but the power is turned on with the reset/setting switch 38 ON, and the data in RAM 161c is not abnormal, a gaming machine installation information command is sent to the medal count control board 17 (Sa13), and the process proceeds to the setting change process shown in FIG. 65.

As shown in FIG. 66, the setting change process initializes the area of RAM 161c that is initialized when the setting change starts, i.e., the area of the internal RAM area excluding area A where the buffer of the setting value/setting key switch 37 is stored, the internal stack area, the payout management temporary stack area, and the temporary stack area (Sc1).

Next, the external RAM clear process is called (Sc2). The external RAM clear process is the external program call process described above. In the external RAM clear process, the external RAM area excluding the external stack area is initialized.

After the extra RAM clear process in Sc2 is completed, a setting change start command indicating that the setting change state has started is sent to the performance control unit 151 (Sc3), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state (Sc4).

If it is determined in Sc4 that the setting key switch is not ON, i.e., the setting key switch 37 is OFF, but the power is turned on with the reset/setting switch 38 ON, and the process proceeds to setting change processing, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear permission flag is set in the RAM 161c (Sc5). The RAM clear permission flag is set in the RAM 61c first after the RAM 161c is initialized in the main processing described below, and indicates that the state before the power outage was other than main processing, i.e. initial setting processing, setting change processing, or error processing due to a RAM abnormality.

If it is determined in Sc5 that the RAM clear permission flag is not set, the timer interrupt is set to enabled (Sc6), a RAM abnormality error code indicating that there is an abnormality in the RAM 161c is set in a specified register (Sc7), and error processing begins. Error processing will be described later.

If it is determined in Sc5 that the RAM clear permission flag is set, the process proceeds to Sc20, where a setting change end command indicating the end of the setting change process is sent to the performance control unit 151, a one-time interrupt wait process is performed to wait until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed once (Sc21), the size of the area of RAM 161c to be initialized at the end of the setting change (initialized area at the end of the setting change) is set (Sc22), and the process proceeds to the main process. In this case, that is, the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state, but when the power is turned on with the reset/setting switch 38 in the ON state and the process proceeds to the setting change process, if the RAM clear permission flag is set, the area of the internal RAM area excluding area A where the setting value and setting key switch buffer are stored, the internal stack area, the payout management temporary stack area, and the temporary stack area, and the area of the external RAM area excluding the external stack area are initialized, but no new setting values are set, and the state proceeds to a playable state with the setting values before the power failure being maintained.

If it is determined in Sc4 that the setting key switch is ON, i.e., the setting key switch 37 is ON when power is turned on and the process proceeds to setting change, the setting value is obtained from RAM 161c into the A register (Sc8) and 1 is subtracted from the setting value in the A register (Sc9). At this time, the value obtained from RAM 161c minus 1 is set in the A register. Also, if RAM 161c is cleared due to a RAM abnormality and 0 is stored as the setting value, 0 is set in the A register.

Then, add 1 to the setting value of the A register (Sc10), determine whether the setting value after the addition exceeds 6 (Sc11), and if the setting value after the addition does not exceed 6, proceed to Sc13, and if the setting value after the addition exceeds 6, correct the setting value after the addition to 1 (Sc12) and proceed to Sc13.

In Sc13, the value of the output buffer of the setting value display 24 is updated to the updated setting value (Sc13), and a one-time interrupt wait process is performed (Sc14). As a result, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed once, and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting value display 24.

Then, the process waits until operation of the reset/set switch 38 or start switch 7 is detected (Sc15, Sc16). If operation of the reset/set switch 38 is detected in Sc15, the process returns to Sc10, and the process of Sc10 to Sc14 is performed to increment the set value by 1 (if the set value after increment exceeds 6, it is updated to 1), and the process waits again until operation of the reset/set switch 38 or start switch 7 is detected (Sc15, Sc16).

When the start switch 7 is detected in Sc16, the process waits until the OFF state of the setting key switch 37 is detected (Sc17). When the OFF state of the setting key switch 37 is detected, the setting value of the A register is confirmed and stored in the RAM 161c (Sc18), the value of the output buffer of the setting value display 24 is cleared (Sc19), a setting change end command indicating the end of the setting change process is sent to the performance control unit 151 (Sc20), and a one-time interrupt wait process is performed (Sc21). As a result, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed once, and the setting value of the setting value display 24 is erased. Next, the size of the area of the RAM 161c that is initialized when the setting change is completed (initialization area at the end of the setting change) is set (Sc22), and the process proceeds to the main process. As described later, in the main process, the area of the specified size up to the final address to be initialized is first initialized, and after the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to the main process, and the initialization area at the end of the setting change in the internal RAM area is initialized.

Returning to FIG. 64, if it is determined in Sa15 that the reset/setting switch 38 is not ON, the stack pointer is restored to the state stored in the RAM 161c at the time of power outage (Sa16), a gaming machine installation information command is sent to the medal count control board 17 (Sa17), and a restoration command indicating that the main control unit 161 has been restored is sent to the performance control unit 151 (Sa18), and the port input process is performed twice in succession (Sa19, Sa20).

The port input process is a process that updates input state data (input data indicating the current input state of the various switches, final data indicating that the previous and current input data are the same state, and edge data indicating that the final data has changed since the previous time) relating to the input state of the detection signals of the various switches input to the parallel input port. Port input buffers 0 to 2 that store the input state data of the various switches are provided in a specified area of the internal RAM area of RAM 161c, and the input state data of the various switches updated by the port input process is stored in a specified bit of the port input buffer that is predetermined for each type. In the port input process, it is set to input ports 0 to 2 of the parallel input port.

The detection state (ON or OFF state) of various switches is stored as input data in a specified bit of the port input buffer. In addition, the detection state (ON or OFF state) in the previous and current port input processing is compared, and if the current and previous input data are the same, the finalized data is updated to indicate the detection state of the current input data, while if the current and previous input data are different, the previous finalized data is maintained. In addition, the current and previous finalized data are compared, and if the finalized data changes from OFF to ON, ON edge data indicating that the finalized data has changed from OFF to ON is stored in a specified bit of the port input buffers 0 to 2, and if the finalized data changes from ON to OFF, OFF edge data indicating that the finalized data has changed from ON to OFF is stored in a specified bit of the port input buffers 0 to 2. The input data, finalized data, and edge data of various switches stored in the port input buffer can be referenced from the in-capacity program and the out-of-capacity program.

In the initial setting process, the port input process is performed twice in succession, and input state data related to the input state of the detection signals of the various switches is created based on the input state of the various switches after the initial setting process, i.e., the input state of the various switches after the power supply to the slot machine 2 is resumed, when the port input process is performed thereafter, so that it is possible to prevent unintended input situations from being identified. In addition, the port input process may be configured to create finalized data based on input data acquired by three or more port input processes (for example, input data from the current, previous, and previous-previous times). In such a configuration, by configuring the initial setting process to perform the port input process one consecutive time less than the number of port input processes required to create finalized data, when the port input process is performed after the initial setting process, input state data can be created based on the input state of the various switches after the initial setting process.

After port input processing is performed in Sa19 and Sa20, all registers are restored to the state before the power outage stored in RAM 161c (Sa21), timer interrupt is set to enabled (Sa22), the initial setting processing is terminated and a transition is made to timer interrupt processing (main), and then the processing in the main processing that was being executed before the power supply to the slot machine 2 was stopped is resumed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in Sa14 that the RAM destruction diagnostic flag is set, i.e., if it is determined that the data in RAM 161c is abnormal, the process proceeds to Sa23, where a gaming machine installation information command is sent to the medal count control board 17, the timer interrupt is set to enabled (Sa24), a RAM abnormality error code indicating that there is an abnormality in RAM 161c is set in a specified register (Sa25), and error processing is started.

Error processing is a process that controls the game to an error state in which game progress is disabled. An error command that can identify the error code set in a specified register is sent to the performance control unit 151, and the error code is set in a specified area of the RAM 161c as an error flag that can also be referenced in other processes (for example, the sensor monitoring process described later). The game control unit 151 also controls the game support display 12 to display the error code. After that, the game control unit 151 controls the error state until it is identified that the error state release condition corresponding to the error code set in the specified register has been established, and the game progress is disabled. When the RAM abnormality error code is set in a specified register and the game is moved to an error state, the setting key switch 37 is turned ON and the power switch is turned on to move to a setting change state, the data in the RAM 161c is initialized, and a new setting value is set, so that the error state can be released. On the other hand, if the power switch is turned ON without turning the setting key switch 37 ON, an abnormality in the RAM 161c is detected again, and the game is again moved to an error state.

In this way, after the power supply to the slot machine 2 is started, the main control board 16 executes the startup process of the main control unit 161 shown in FIG. 62, and then executes a user program including an initial setting process. In the initial setting process, depending on the state of the main control board 16 when the power supply to the slot machine 2 is started, the main control board 16 transitions to one of timer interrupt processing (main), setting change processing, and error processing. When transitioning to these processes, a command capable of identifying the type of processing to transition to is sent to the performance control unit 151. When transitioning to timer interrupt processing (main), that is, when the control state before the power supply to the slot machine 2 was stopped is restored, a return command is sent to the performance control unit 151. When starting the setting change processing and transitioning to the setting change state, a setting command (start) is sent to the performance control unit 151. When starting the error processing and transitioning to the error state due to an abnormality in the RAM 161c, an error command is sent to the performance control unit 151.

After the main control board 16 transitions from the initial setting process to the setting change process, it passes through the setting change state and returns to a state in which the game can be progressed. When returning to the state in which the game can be progressed, it sends a setting command (end) to the performance control unit 151 that can specify that the setting change state has ended, but does not send a return command. Also, after transitioning to error processing due to an abnormality in RAM 161c, it transitions to the setting change process as described above, the error state is cleared, and the game is returned to a state in which the game can be progressed. Even when the error processing is terminated and the game is returned to a state in which the game can be progressed, a return command is not sent to the performance control unit 151.

In this embodiment, the process of determining whether data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area of RAM 161c is corrupted when the power is turned on is performed in the external RAM initialization process, which is an external program, and the capacity of the internal program can be reduced. Note that in this embodiment, the RAM parity, which is the exclusive OR of the data stored in RAM 161c, is calculated in the external RAM initialization process, and the RAM parity is determined to be a normal value to determine whether RAM 161c is corrupted. However, other methods of determining whether RAM 161c is corrupted may also be used, such as calculating a checksum for each of multiple areas and determining whether the checksum before the power outage is a normal value.

In addition, in this embodiment, if it is determined that data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area in RAM 161c has been corrupted by the external program, the external RAM area is initialized before returning to the internal program, and the internal RAM area is initialized after returning to the internal program, thereby reducing the movement back and forth between the internal program and the external program.

In addition, in this embodiment, the internal RAM area includes an internal stack area where data is saved in response to control commands of the internal program, and in order to perform a process to determine whether data in the internal RAM area and the external RAM area has been destroyed when power is turned on, when an external program is called from an internal program, data is saved to a temporary stack area in the internal RAM area rather than to the internal stack area, so that data saved to the internal stack area when an external program is called when power is turned on can be prevented from changing the data in the internal stack area before the power was turned off.

In addition, the process of determining whether data in the internal RAM area and the external RAM area has been corrupted is performed on the area including the temporary stack area, making it possible to determine whether all data in the internal RAM area and the external RAM area has been corrupted, and the process of making the determination is not complicated by dividing the areas.

In addition, in the process of determining whether data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area has been destroyed, the determination may be made for areas that do not include the temporary stack area. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether data at the time of the power outage has been destroyed.

In addition, if the external program determines that the data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area of RAM 161c has been corrupted, the temporary stack area is not initialized when the internal RAM area is initialized, and the data in the temporary stack area set after power is turned on is maintained as is. Furthermore, when the external program is called the next time power is turned on to determine whether the data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area has been corrupted, the same data is saved in the temporary stack area. Therefore, the data in the temporary stack area at the time of power loss can be made to match the data used to determine whether the data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area has been corrupted the next time power is turned on.

In addition, the diagnostic data (RAM parity) used to determine whether data in the internal RAM area and external RAM area is corrupted is created by the external program, which reduces the size of the internal program.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, it is possible to transition to a setting change state in which a setting value is set, and the main control unit 161 initializes the RAM 161c and initializes the control state in connection with the transition to the setting change state, and also initializes the RAM 161c and initializes the control state when the power is turned on with the reset/setting switch 38 in the ON state without turning the setting key switch 37 to the ON state, so that the control state can be initialized without transitioning to the setting change state.

In addition, if the game is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality, the setting key switch 37 can be turned ON and the power can be turned back on to transition to a setting change state in which new setting values have been set, enabling the game to transition to a playable state. However, if the game is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality and the power is turned on with the reset/setting switch 38 turned ON instead of the setting key switch 37 being turned ON, the game will not transition to a playable state, ensuring that new setting values will be set if an abnormality occurs in the data.

In addition, if the game is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality, and the power is turned on with the reset/setting switch 38 in the ON position instead of the setting key switch 37, the game will not transition to a playable state, but the control state will be initialized. Even if the game does not transition to a playable state due to a data abnormality, the control state can be initialized by turning on the power with the reset/setting switch 38 in the ON position.

The machine also has a RAM clear permission flag that is set when the machine is not controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality and is cleared when the machine is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality. When the power is turned on with the reset/setting switch 38 in the ON position and without the setting key switch 37 in the ON position, it is determined whether the RAM clear permission flag is set, and if the RAM clear permission flag is set, the machine can transition to a playable state. Therefore, even if an abnormality has occurred in the data, turning on the power with the reset/setting switch 38 in the ON position will not result in transitioning to a playable state.

In addition, when the play stopping condition is met, the machine is controlled to an error state due to a play stopping error in which play cannot proceed. In addition, when the machine is controlled to an error state due to a play stopping error, if the setting key switch 37 is not turned on and the reset/setting switch 38 is turned on and the power is turned on, the control state can be initialized and the machine can move to a state in which play is possible. By turning on the power with the reset/setting switch 38 turned on, the control state is initialized and the error state due to the play stopping error can be released.

[Main processing]
Fig. 67 is a diagram for explaining the control contents of the main processing performed by the main control board 16. The main processing is repeatedly executed for each unit of play (one game). One cycle of the main processing corresponds to one unit of play. The main processing is included in an in-capacity program and includes multiple processes. As explained above, in the main processing shown in Fig. 67, the process name corresponding to the out-of-capacity program call process has the words "(outside capacity)" added to the end.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the main process, first, an area of a specified size up to the final address to be initialized in the internal RAM area is initialized (Sd1). The final address to be initialized is the final address of area E in the internal RAM area, and an area of the specified size up to the final address of area E is initialized. When transitioning from a setting change process, the size of the area to be initialized at the end of the setting change is specified, so the area of the internal RAM area at the end of the setting change is initialized. Also, at the end of a BB, the size of the area to be initialized at the end of a BB is specified, so the area of the internal area at the end of a BB is initialized. Also, at the end of one game, the size of the area to be initialized at the end of one game is specified, so the area of the internal area at the end of one game is initialized.

Then, the RAM clear permission flag is set to ON (Sd2), and a game end command transmission process is performed to transmit a game end command that can identify the end of one game to the performance control unit 151 (Sd3). The main control unit 161 transmits the game end command based on the fact that the game has ended due to the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the previous game, to notify the performance control unit 151 of the end of the game.

Next, the RT information output process included in the out-of-capacity program is performed (Sb4). In the RT information output process, a test signal is sent so that the RT information indicating the RT state of the slot machine 2 can be confirmed by a test device installed outside the slot machine. After that, the multiple interrupt wait process is performed (Sd5). The multiple interrupt wait process is performed to guarantee the output time of the information output in the RT information output process. That is, the main control unit 161 performs the multiple interrupt wait process for the purpose of delaying the progress of the game for a predetermined period. The multiple interrupt wait process is also called a delay process. As a result, the main control unit 161 can guarantee that an external device such as a test board reliably receives the test signal by generating a test signal when the previous game ends and then waiting for a predetermined period, thereby preventing information discrepancies from occurring between the external device and the main control unit 161.

Then, the game start waiting process, which will be described later (Sd6), is performed to process from the end of control of the previous game to the start of the next game. In the game start waiting process, the acceptance of bet setting is started, a process of setting the bet according to the bet setting operation is performed, and when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the specified number of bets set, a process of starting the next game is performed.

Then, an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not a winning is allowed to occur (internal lottery) (Sd7). In the internal lottery process, an internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not a winning is allowed to occur (i.e., whether or not derivation of a display result is allowed) based on a preset setting value (1 to 6) in the slot machine 2 and a random number value for the internal lottery obtained simultaneously with the start of play by detecting the start switch 7.

Then, the main control unit 161 performs a ball output control pre-processing to control the ball output at the start of the game (Sd8). The ball output control pre-processing is a pre-processing for controlling the ball output within the advantageous zone.

After that, after the AT lottery and other operations are performed, the following processes are performed in sequence: performance control processing (Sd9), test signal generation processing (Sd10), control state command group transmission processing (Sd11), and freeze control execution processing (Sd12).

The performance control process sets performance flags that are referenced when the main control board 16 controls performance. The test signal generation process corresponds to off-capacity program call processing. In the test signal generation process, a test signal is sent so that information indicating the control state of the slot machine 2 can be confirmed by a test device installed outside the slot machine. The information indicating the control state of the slot machine 2 includes the lottery results of the internal lottery process in Sd7.

In the control state command group transmission process, a control state command group including multiple commands capable of identifying various control states at the start of a game is transmitted to the performance control unit 151. In other words, the main control unit 161 outputs information related to the result of the internal lottery and information related to the game state to the performance control unit 151.

In the freeze control execution process, the system checks whether there is a request to perform freeze control, which delays the progress of the game until a specified end condition is met, and if there is a request, sets the type of freeze control and the timing to perform the freeze control in a specified area of RAM 161c, and executes freeze control based on the type of freeze control and the execution timing of the freeze control set in RAM 161c. In more detail, if it is set that freeze control is to be performed, freeze control is executed to delay control of the game for a specified period of time.

In addition, when the type of freeze control involving an effect using reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter referred to as reel effect) is set as the type of freeze control, an acceleration pattern for effect (for example, an acceleration pattern that rotates the reels in a direction different from the rotation of the reels in play, an acceleration pattern that starts rotation in the same direction as the rotation of the reels in play at a slower speed than the rotation of the reels in play, an acceleration pattern that vibrates the reels, etc.) is set in a specified area of RAM 161c as an excitation pattern for exciting reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and control is performed so that a reel effect is performed during the period in which freeze control is being performed.

Then, the multiple interruption waiting process is executed (Sd13). The multiple interruption waiting process is executed to guarantee the output time of the information output in the test signal generation process. That is, the main control unit 161 executes the multiple interruption waiting process for the purpose of delaying the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time. The multiple interruption waiting process in Sd13 and the multiple interruption waiting process in Sd5 are common processes. That is, the main control unit 161 executes the common multiple interruption waiting process when the start switch 7 is operated to start the reel rotation and when the game is ended by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. This allows the memory capacity to be reduced by commonizing the delay process performed at the start and end of the game. In this embodiment, the multiple interruption waiting process in Sd5 causes a delay of about 130 milliseconds (0.13 seconds).

In addition, in the commonly executed multiple interrupt waiting process, the process of determining whether or not to control the state of the slot machine 2 to an error state is not executed. The process of determining whether or not to control the state to an error state is, for example, the error check process shown in Sd29. This allows the main control unit 161 to prevent a discrepancy from occurring between the information of the test signal sent to the test board and the information of the slot machine 2 that has entered an error state, which would occur if the slot machine 2 is controlled to an error state during the delay process.

After the multiple interrupt wait process is performed in Sd13, the timer for managing one game time, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 161c to measure the elapsed time from the start of the reel rotation in the previous game (Sd14), is referenced, and based on the timer for managing one game time, it is determined whether or not the specified time for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the reel rotation in the previous game (Sd15). At this time, the main control unit 161 determines whether or not the specified time for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, taking into consideration that the multiple interrupt wait process is performed in Sd13. The main control unit 161 executes the multiple wait process at a timing when the multiple interrupt wait process ends before the specified time for one game (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, depending on the timing when the start switch 7 is operated. More specifically, if the start switch 7 is operated at a timing when the multiple interrupt wait process can be executed before 3.97 seconds have elapsed since the start of reel rotation in the previous game, the main control unit 161 will start executing the multiple interrupt wait process before at least 3.97 seconds have elapsed.

This makes it possible to properly determine whether 4.1 seconds have elapsed in the specific time from when the reels started spinning in the previous game until the reels can start spinning in the next game, without including the 0.13 seconds that occur due to the delay process. In other words, the main control unit 161 executes the reel spin start command transmission process in a specified game after 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the operation of the start switch 7 in the game prior to the specified game. In addition, after executing the delay process, the main control unit 161 executes the process of Sd15, which determines whether the specified time for one game has elapsed. In other words, the main control unit 161 executes the delay process so that the delay process ends before the end of the specified time for one game.

If it is determined that the prescribed time for one game has not elapsed, the process waits until the prescribed time for one game has elapsed based on the timer for managing one game time, and after the prescribed time for one game has elapsed based on the timer for managing one game time, the timer for managing one game time is set to a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to newly start timing the elapsed time from the start of reel rotation (Sd16), and a reel rotation start command transmission process is performed to transmit to the performance control unit 151 a reel rotation start command that can be specified to start the rotation control of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (Sd17). On the other hand, if it is determined in Sd15 that the prescribed time for one game has elapsed, the process of Sd16 to Sd17 is immediately performed. In addition, after a predetermined value is set in Sd16, the timer for managing one game's time is decremented every predetermined time, and becomes 0 when the specified time for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of reel rotation in a game. Whether or not the timer for managing one game's time is 0 can be used to determine whether or not the specified time for one game has elapsed.

In this way, the main control unit 161 in this embodiment executes the test signal generation process in Sd10, and then executes the multiple interrupt wait process in Sd13, which delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time. The main control unit 161 also executes the reel rotation start process shown in Sd19, which starts the rotation of the reels after the predetermined period of delay by the multiple interrupt wait process in Sd13. In this way, the main control unit 161 can ensure that external devices including, for example, a test board reliably receive the test signal by generating a test signal at the start of play and then entering a waiting state for a predetermined period of time by the delay process, thereby preventing information discrepancies from occurring between the external devices and the main control unit 161.

In addition, the main control unit 161 executes the control state command group transmission process in Sd11, which outputs information about the internal lottery result and information about the game state to the performance control unit 151, and then executes the reel rotation start process shown in Sd19. As a result, the main control unit 161 generates a test signal when play begins, outputs information about the internal lottery result to the performance control unit 151, and then goes into a waiting state for a predetermined period of time, thereby ensuring, for example, that external devices including a test board reliably receive the test signal and that the performance control unit 151 reliably receives information about the internal lottery result, and preventing information discrepancies from occurring between the external devices, the main control unit 161, and the performance control unit 151.

After the reel rotation start command transmission process is performed in Sd17, a normal acceleration pattern that controls the rotation of the reels at a predetermined speed for gaming is set in a predetermined area of RAM 161c as the excitation pattern when exciting and controlling the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (Sd18), and a reel rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of the reels by exciting and controlling the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R based on the excitation pattern set in RAM 161c (Sd19). Next, external signal processing is performed to transmit information such as the gaming machine status to an external device such as a hall management computer (hall computer) or a hall server that performs security management (Sd20).

Then, the navigation notification process is performed (Sd21). In the navigation notification process, the AT is controlled, and if the notification target role is won in the internal lottery, the game support display 12 is controlled to display a navigation number that can identify a stop pattern that is advantageous to the player according to the notification target role, whereas if the AT is not controlled, the game support display 12 is controlled not to display the navigation number.

A reel stop initial setting process (Sd22) is performed to set various information required for reel stop control according to the RT state and the results of the internal lottery. Then, a freeze control execution control process (Sd23) is performed, and if freeze control is set to be performed at that timing, the set type of freeze control is performed.

After the freeze control process is performed in Sd23, a reel stop control process is performed to control the stop of the reels (Sd24). In the reel stop control process, it is determined whether the reels under rotation control are rotating at a predetermined constant speed, and if there is a reel that is not rotating at a constant speed, a reel error is detected, and an excitation pattern is set for the relevant reel to accelerate to a constant speed, so that all reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed. On the other hand, if all reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed, acceptance of a stop operation for the reels under rotation control is enabled, and the process waits until a stop operation is performed by a stop switch. Then, when a valid stop operation is detected for a reel for which a stop operation is enabled (ON edge data is detected for a stop switch for which a stop operation is enabled), reel stop control is performed for the reel for which a valid stop operation has been performed, so that the reel stop control is performed at a predetermined stop position based on information set in the reel stop initial setting process. This reel stop control is repeated for the reels under rotation control, and the reel stop process is terminated by stopping the rotation of all reels.

After the reel stop process is completed, the freeze control process is performed (Sd25), and if freeze control is set to be performed at that timing, the set type of freeze control is performed.

Then, the RT state check process (Sd26) and the winning determination process (Sd27) are performed. In the RT state check process, it is determined whether or not a combination of RT transition symbols that transitions to the RT state is stopped on the reels, and if a combination of RT transition symbols is stopped, the current RT state set in a specified area of RAM 161c is updated to an RT state corresponding to the combination of RT transition symbols. In the winning determination process, it is determined whether or not an illegal winning has occurred based on the internal lottery result and the symbol combination stopped on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

After the winning determination process in Sd27 is performed, the game stop determination process, which corresponds to the out-of-capacity program call process, is performed (Sd28).

In the play stop determination process, it is determined whether the increase in the number of medals awarded to the player has exceeded the upper limit after the number of medals awarded to the player has started to increase. For example, a net increase counter that counts only the + range, i.e., a counter that subtracts the number of medals inserted and adds the number of medals paid out, and corrects the updated value to 0 if it falls below 0, is provided, and it is determined whether the value of the net increase counter has exceeded the upper limit. Then, if it is determined that the increase in the number of medals awarded to the player has exceeded the upper limit after the number of medals awarded to the player has started to increase, a play stop flag is set in the extra RAM area.

After the stop-play determination process is completed, an error check process is performed (Sd29), and post-ball control process is performed to control the number of balls dispensed at the end of the game (Sd30). The post-ball control process is a post-process for controlling the number of balls dispensed within the advantageous zone.

Then, the replay LED is controlled to the OFF state (light off state) (Sd31), the replay in progress flag indicating that a replay is in progress is cleared (Sd32), the display of the navigation number on the game support display 12 is cleared (Sd33), an end command is sent to the medal count control board 17 (Sd34), freeze control execution processing is performed (Sd35), and if freeze control is set to be performed at that timing, the set type of freeze control is performed.

Then, a role information command is sent to the medal count control board 17 (Sd36), and a favorable zone command is sent (Sd37). After that, external signal processing is performed to send information such as the gaming machine status to an external device such as a hall management computer (hall computer) or a hall server that performs security management (Sd38), and a game end setting process is performed (Sd39), and it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination is stopped on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. If the replay symbol combination is stopped, a process is performed to set the number of bets for replaying in the next game (in this embodiment, 3 is set as the replay medal in the replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of RAM 161c), a process is performed to set the replay flag in a predetermined area of RAM 161c, and a process is performed to control the replay LED to the ON state (lighting state). In the game end setting process, it is determined whether or not the number of medals acquired during the favorable zone has reached 2400 (limiter condition). At this time, if the number of medals won during the advantageous period reaches 2,400, the advantageous period ends and control is returned to the normal period.

Then, a payout pulse command is sent to the medal count control board 17 (Sd40), and a jackpot command is sent (Sd41). After that, the size of the area of RAM 161c to be initialized at the end of the game is set (Sd42). As a result, the area initialized at the end of one game is initialized in Sd2 in the next game.

Next, it is determined whether or not a play stop flag is set in the extra RAM area (Sd43). If it is determined in Sd43 that the play stop flag is not set, the process returns to Sd1. This causes the main control unit 161 to return to processing at Sd2, and repeats the process from Sd2 again. Once the main processing has been completed, the processing related to the control of one unit of play is completed, and the main processing is repeatedly executed for each unit of play.

On the other hand, if it is determined in Sd43 that the play stop flag is set, that is, if it is determined in Sd28 that the number of medals awarded to the player has increased and the number of medals awarded has exceeded the upper limit, a play stop error code is set (Sd46), and then error processing is started, making it impossible to continue playing. In error processing due to the play stop error code being set, the setting key switch 37 is turned ON and the power switch is turned on to switch to a setting change state, the data in RAM 161c is initialized, and a new setting value is set, or the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, but the reset/setting switch 38 is turned ON and the power switch is turned on to switch to a setting change state, the data in RAM 161c is initialized, and the error state can be released. On the other hand, if the power switch is turned ON without turning on the setting key switch 37 or the reset/setting switch 38, the error state will be entered again.

As a result, the slot machine 2 in this embodiment can prevent excessive medals from being paid out from the slot machine due to fraudulent operations. Furthermore, if the number of medals awarded increases, it can lead to a state that is likely to significantly stimulate gambling. Therefore, by setting an upper limit and restricting the number of medals awarded, it is possible to prevent the slot machine 2 from reaching a state that is significantly stimulates gambling.

As shown in FIG. 67, when the play stop flag is set, the process of transitioning to an error state due to a play stop error is a process that is performed at the end of all processes, such as the external output signal process (Sd38) that notifies an external device such as a hall computer whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous zone, and the game end setting process (Sd39) that determines whether or not the number of medals acquired during the advantageous zone has reached 2400 (limiter condition). In this way, after the medals awarded to the player start to increase, the process of disabling game progress when the increase in the number of awarded medals exceeds the upper limit is performed at the end of the main process, so that the game end setting process is performed before the game progress is controlled to a state where it is impossible to progress, and therefore, if the limiter condition is established, the game can be controlled to a state where it is impossible to progress after being controlled to a normal zone.

In addition, because external output signal processing is performed in Sd38 before controlling the game to a state in which game progress is disabled, it is possible to control the game to a state in which game progress is disabled after informing an external device whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous zone. Therefore, even if the main control unit 161 disables game progress because the number of medals awarded to the player starts to increase and the increase in the number of medals awarded exceeds the upper limit, the main control unit 161 can disable game progress after appropriately processing information related to the advantageous zone. This makes it possible to prevent inconsistencies from occurring regarding information related to the advantageous zone after the disablement of game progress is lifted.

The main processing performed by the main control board 16 in this embodiment is included in the internal program, and is configured to call processing included in the external program, such as RT information output processing and test signal generation processing. When calling processing included in the external program, each time the processing of the corresponding external program is called, the internal program that called it stores and saves the value of the flag register among the registers of the main control board 16 in the game stack area, and the external program that called it stores and saves the value of the stack pointer SP used in the internal program in the external RAM area, and stores and saves the values of all registers of the main control board 16 in the non-game stack area. Then, processing according to the called external program is performed.

In addition, after the main control board 16 has processed the off-capacity program, it loads into the appropriate registers all the register values that were saved to the non-play stack area when the off-capacity program was started, restoring the registers to the state they were in when the off-capacity program was started, and sets the value of the stack pointer SP that was stored in the off-capacity RAM area when the off-capacity program was started to the stack pointer SP, restoring the stack pointer SP to the state it was in when the off-capacity program was started. Furthermore, it loads into the appropriate flag register the value of the flag register that was stored in the play stack area before the off-capacity program was called, on the calling on-capacity program side, restoring the registers to the state they were in before the off-capacity program was called.

When the main control board 16 performs various processes according to an external program, it calls the external program from the internal program using the above-mentioned CALLEX command or the like, performs various processes according to the external program, and returns to the internal program that called it when each process according to the external program is completed.

[Communication between control units]
The following describes communications between the performance control unit 151, the main control unit 161, the medal count control unit 171, and the CU control unit 323. In this embodiment, a configuration has been described in which the main control unit 161 is included in the main control board 16, and the medal count control unit 171 is included in the medal count control board 17. In a slot machine 2 in which the main control unit 161 and the medal count control unit 171 are integrated, a configuration will be described in which the medal count control unit 171 is included in the main control board 16 together with the main control unit 161.

Figure 68 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the card unit and slot machine when the main control unit 161 and medal count control unit 171 are integrated. As shown in Figure 68, the main control unit 161 includes both the medal count control unit 171 and the main control unit 161. In other words, the main control unit 161 and the medal count control unit 171 are mounted on the same board. This eliminates the need to connect the main control unit 161 and the medal count control unit 171 with a connector or the like, thereby improving security. Furthermore, by reducing the number of parts, the probability of malfunctions occurring can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 68, the main control unit 161 is connected to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, the setting key switch 37, the reset/setting switch 38, the setting value display 24, the start switch 7, and the game support display 12. The main control unit 161 may be configured to be connected to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, the setting key switch 37, the reset/setting switch 38, the setting value display 24, the start switch 7, and the game support display 12 via the medal count control unit 171. In other words, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, the setting key switch 37, the reset/setting switch 38, the setting value display 24, the start switch 7, and the game support display 12 may be connected to the medal count control unit 171.

The medal count control unit 171 is also connected to the count button 10, the RAM clear switch 293, and the role ratio monitor 89. The medal count control unit 171 may be configured to be connected to the count button 10, the RAM clear switch 293, and the role ratio monitor 89 via the main control unit 161. The count button 10, the RAM clear switch 293, and the role ratio monitor 89 may also be connected to the main control unit 161.

Figure 69 is a diagram for explaining communication between the performance control unit 151, main control unit 161, medal count control unit 171, and CU control unit 323. As shown in Figure 69, when the main control unit 161 and medal count control unit 171 are integrated, the main control board 16 is equipped with the medal count control unit 171 and main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 comprises a first serial communication circuit SR1, a second serial communication circuit SR2, and a third serial communication circuit SR3. The first serial communication circuit SR1 to the third serial communication circuit SR3 are serial communication circuits mounted on the main control unit 161, which is realized as a control computer such as a microcomputer. The medal count control unit 171 comprises a fourth serial communication circuit SR4, a fifth serial communication circuit SR5, and a sixth serial communication circuit SR6. The fourth serial communication circuit SR4 to the sixth serial communication circuit SR6 are also serial communication circuits mounted on the medal count control unit 171, which is realized as a control computer such as a microcomputer.

The first serial communication circuit SR1 and the third serial communication circuit SR3 of the main control unit 161 have a transmission function and a reception function. As shown in FIG. 69, the first serial communication circuit SR1 has a transmission terminal Tx1 and a reception terminal Rx1 as terminals for connecting to other devices. The first serial communication circuit SR1 also has a transmission buffer Tb1, which is a buffer for transmission, and a reception buffer Rb1, which is a buffer for reception. The third serial communication circuit SR3 also has a transmission terminal Tx3, a reception terminal Rx3, a transmission buffer Tb3, and a reception buffer Rb3.

On the other hand, the second serial communication circuit SR2 of the main control unit 161 has only the transmission function out of the transmission and reception functions. In other words, the second serial communication circuit SR2 is a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission. As shown in FIG. 69, the second serial communication circuit SR2 has only a transmission terminal Tx2 and a transmission buffer Tb2, which is a buffer for transmission, as terminals for connecting to other devices. For this reason, the second serial communication circuit SR2 is configured not to be able to receive signals (commands) from other devices. This allows signals to be transmitted in one direction in an ideal manner. In other words, the second serial communication circuit SR2 can be used preferably for communication between the main control unit 161 and the performance control unit 151, where one-way signal transmission is required.

The fifth serial communication circuit SR5 and the sixth serial communication circuit SR6 of the medal count control unit 171 have a transmission function and a reception function, similar to the first serial communication circuit SR1 and the third serial communication circuit SR3. That is, the fifth serial communication circuit SR5 has a transmission terminal Tx5, a reception terminal Rx5, a transmission buffer Tb5, and a reception buffer Rb5. Also, the sixth serial communication circuit SR6 has a transmission terminal Tx6, a reception terminal Rx6, a transmission buffer Tb6, and a reception buffer Rb6. Also, the fourth serial communication circuit SR4 of the medal count control unit 171 has only a transmission function, similar to the second serial communication circuit of the main control unit 161. That is, the fourth serial communication circuit SR4 has a transmission terminal Tx4 and a transmission buffer Tb4.

As shown in FIG. 69, the main control unit 161 and the medal count control unit 171 communicate signals using the first serial communication circuit SR1 and the fifth serial communication circuit SR5. As described above, bidirectional commands such as insertion commands and settlement commands are transmitted between the medal count control unit 171 and the main control unit 161. In other words, the communication between the medal count control unit 171 and the main control unit 161 includes bidirectional communication. In this way, bidirectional communication is achieved by using the first serial communication circuit SR1, which has a transmission function, and the fifth serial communication circuit SR5, which have a reception function.

In addition, since the communication between the medal count control unit 171 and the CU control unit 323 is bidirectional, the medal count control unit 171 uses a sixth serial communication circuit SR6 having both a transmission function and a reception function for communication with the connection terminal board 1000. The medal count control unit 171 is connected to the CU control unit 323 via the connection terminal board 1000. In addition, the frame side information command is a command that is continuously transmitted in one direction from the medal count control board 17 to the main control board 16, which does not have bidirectionality. The medal count control unit 171 transmits the frame side information command to the third serial communication circuit SR3 of the main control unit 161 using the fourth serial communication circuit SR4, which has only a transmission function. The third serial communication circuit SR3 transmits a test signal to the test board 300. In this way, in a slot machine 2 in which the main control unit 161 and medal count control unit 171 are integrated, one-way communication is performed using a serial communication circuit that has only a transmission function, and two-way communication is performed using a serial communication circuit that has both a transmission function and a reception function. This allows the serial communication circuit to be used separately for one-way command transmission and two-way command transmission, allowing suitable data communication.

The test board 300 is configured to be able to convert various types of test signals into specific signals and output them to the test device. As a result, by using the test board 300, the slot machine does not need to generate specific signals that match the test device, and the test device can receive test signals from various types of slot machines via the test board 300. This eliminates the need to generate test signals that match a specified test device for each slot machine.

The main control unit 161 also receives bidirectional commands, such as an input command, from the medal count control unit 171 using the receiving terminal Rx1 of the first serial communication circuit SR1, and transmits response commands using the transmitting terminal Tx1 of the first serial communication circuit SR1. This allows the sending and receiving of bidirectional commands between the main control unit 161 and the medal count control unit 171 to be completed by just the first serial communication circuit SR1, improving security.

As described in FIG. 41, when the main control unit 161 receives a bidirectional command that is sent irregularly, such as an insertion command, it transmits a response command to the medal count control unit 171 indicating that the command has been received. This allows the medal count control unit 171 to determine that the insertion command, etc., has been successfully received by the main control unit 161.

Furthermore, the main control unit 161 receives the frame side information command from the medal count control unit 171 using the receiving terminal Rx3 of the third serial communication circuit SR3, which is different from the first serial communication circuit SR1. This allows the main control unit 161 to receive commands from the medal count control unit 171 using the third serial communication circuit SR3 even if an abnormality occurs in the first serial communication circuit SR1.

Furthermore, communication of the frame side information commands that are sent periodically is performed using the fourth serial communication circuit SR4 of the medal count control unit 171 and the third serial communication circuit SR3 of the main control unit 161. On the other hand, communication of input commands and the like that is not performed periodically uses the fifth serial communication circuit SR5 rather than the fourth serial communication circuit SR4 in the medal count control unit 171, and the first serial communication circuit SR1 rather than the third serial communication circuit SR3 in the main control unit 161. This prevents the frame side information commands that are sent periodically from overlapping with input commands and the like that are sent based on the player's operation, causing an overflow.

Next, the capacity of the transmission buffer will be described. The transmission buffer Tb2 of the second serial communication circuit SR2 and the transmission buffer Tb4 of the fourth serial communication circuit SR4 used for one-way communication are 128 bytes. On the other hand, the transmission buffer Tb1 of the first serial communication circuit SR1, the transmission buffer Tb3 of the third serial communication circuit SR3, the transmission buffer Tb5 of the fifth serial communication circuit SR5, and the transmission buffer Tb6 of the sixth serial communication circuit SR6 used for two-way communication are 64 bytes. This makes it difficult for the serial communication circuits for one-way communication to overflow even when many commands are transmitted.

Next, the memory areas for setting the functions of each serial communication circuit contained in the internal function register area will be described. The internal function register area of RAM 161c includes an area for setting the functions of the first serial communication circuit SR1 to the third serial communication circuit SR3 mounted as functions of the main control unit 161, which is a control computer such as a microcomputer. Similarly, the internal function register area (not shown) of RAM 171c includes an area for setting the functions of the fourth serial communication circuit SR4 to the sixth serial communication circuit SR6 mounted as functions of the medal count control unit 171, which is a control computer such as a microcomputer.

The capacity of the function setting area of the serial communication circuit used for one-way communication is smaller than the capacity of the function setting area of the serial communication circuit used for two-way communication. This eliminates the need for complex settings in the serial communication circuit for one-way communication, and allows for simplified settings. In other words, the capacity of the function setting area of the second serial communication circuit SR2 in RAM 161c is smaller than the capacity of the function setting area of the first serial communication circuit SR1 in RAM 161c.

As shown in FIG. 69, the main control unit 161, medal count control unit 171, performance control unit 151, and connection terminal board 1000 are connected by a serial communication circuit. This makes it easier to handle the wiring pattern. In other words, the number of wires can be reduced compared to parallel communication, making it easier to arrange the wiring pattern.

[Memory area and reading and writing data]
Next, we will explain technical matters related to reading data from the ROM 161b and RAM 161c of the main control unit 161 and writing data to the RAM 161c. Note that in this embodiment, we will explain using the ROM 161b and RAM 161c of the main control unit 161 as an example, but the technical matters described below can also be applied to the ROM 171b and RAM 171c of the medal count control unit 171 and the ROM 151b and RAM 151c of the performance control unit 151.

In the memory area used by the main control unit 161, a 2-byte address is assigned to each 1-byte area. In particular, as shown in FIG. 70, the working area (so-called work area) of the memory area of RAM 161c used by the main control unit 161 for user programs is composed of a first area (F000H-F0FFH) with a higher address of F0H, a second area (F100H-F1FFH) with a higher address of F1H, a third area (F200H-F2FFH) with a higher address of F2H, and a fourth area (F300H-F3FFH) with a higher address of F3H. As shown in FIG. 60, the first and second areas are internal RAM areas, the third area is an unused area, and the fourth area is an external RAM area.

In this embodiment, the area starting from the first area among the first to fourth areas with consecutive addresses in RAM 161c is assigned as the working area (work) of the main control unit 161, making it easier to manage the working area.

F0H, which is the upper address of the first area, is set as the initial value of the special register (Q register) used in the aforementioned LDQ command when the main control unit 161 is started and when the main control unit 161 starts a user program, making it easier to access the top area of the main control unit 161's working area in RAM 161c when reading data from RAM 161c or writing data to RAM 161c with the LDQ command.

In addition, since an unused area is assigned to the third area whose upper address is F2H, it is easy to identify the unused area of RAM 161c from the upper address value.

In addition, when initializing data in RAM 161c, instructions such as LDQ that specify an address using a higher address previously set in a special register (Q register) are not used, and the address to be initialized in RAM 161c can be specified from the code.

In addition, when calculating data (such as the aforementioned RAM parity) for determining whether or not RAM 161c is corrupted, instructions such as LDQ that specify an address using a higher address previously set in a special register (Q register) are not used, and the address of the data used to calculate data for diagnosing corruption of RAM 161c can be identified from the code.

In addition, a stack area for saving data is allocated to RAM 161c, and in this stack area, data is saved from the final address of the fourth area, whose upper address is F3, toward the first address. Therefore, the upper address of the data saved in the stack area does not change.

In addition, although the internal stack area is not the final address of the second area whose upper address is F1, data is saved from an address close to the final address toward the first address. This prevents the upper address of the data saved in the internal stack area from changing. In addition, data may also be saved in the internal stack area from the final address of an area whose upper address is a predetermined value (for example, the second area whose upper address is F1H) toward the first address, and even in this configuration, the upper address of the data saved in the internal stack area does not change.

In addition, all of the payout management data used when communicating with the medal count control unit 171 is assigned to the second area, whose upper address is F1H, making it easy to manage the payout management data related to the control of communication with the medal count control unit 171.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 161 can execute a continuous area transfer process that can read data stored in a continuous source memory area that is equal to the number of transfers from the source start address by specifying the start address of the source in ROM 161b or RAM 161c, the start address of the destination in RAM 161c, and the number of transfers, and can write the read data from the source continuous memory area to a continuous destination memory area that is equal to the number of transfers from the destination start address.

By changing the specified source start address and the number of transfers and calling the continuous area transfer process, it is possible to read data from different ranges of continuous source memory areas using a common process. In this embodiment, a common continuous area transfer process is used when reading data from different ranges of continuous source memory areas.

In addition, by changing the start address of the specified destination and the number of transfers, the continuous area transfer process can be called to write data to different ranges of destination continuous memory areas using a common process. In this embodiment, a common continuous area transfer process is used when writing data to different ranges of destination continuous memory areas.

The continuous area transfer process includes continuous transfer process A, which reads and writes data using an LD command that specifies a high-order address and a low-order address, and continuous transfer process B, which calls and writes data using an LDQ command that specifies only a low-order address.

Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the continuous area transfer process A performed by the main control unit 161. Continuous transfer process A is a process called from the main routine or a subroutine, and first sets the number of transfers in the B register (Se1), sets the upper and lower addresses of the transfer source in the HL register (Se2), and sets the upper and lower addresses of the transfer destination in the DE register (Se3).

Then, the data of the source address set in the HL register is read into the A register by the LD command (LD A, (HL)) (Se4), and the data of the A register is written into the area of the destination address set in the DE register by the LD command (LD (DE), A) (Se5).

Then, the source address in the HL register is incremented by 1 (Se6), the destination address in the DE register is incremented by 1 (Se7), the number of transfers in the B register is decremented by 1 (Se8), and it is determined whether the number of transfers in the B register is 0 (Se9).

If it is determined in Se9 that the number of transfers in the B register is not 0, the process returns to Se4 and repeats steps Se4 to Se9 again, repeating steps Se4 to Se9 until it is determined in Se9 that the number of transfers in the B register is 0.

If it is determined in Se9 that the transfer count of the B register is 0, the continuous area transfer process A ends and the process returns to the calling process.

In this way, in continuous area transfer process A, by specifying the source start address of ROM 161b or RAM 161c, the destination start address of RAM 161c, and the number of transfers, data is read from the source address and read into the A register, the read data from the A register is written into the destination address area, and then the source address and destination address are each incremented by 1 for the number of transfers, thereby reading data stored in continuous source memory areas for the number of transfers from the source start address, and writing the read data from the source continuous memory areas into continuous destination memory areas for the number of transfers from the destination start address.

Figure 72 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the continuous area transfer process B performed by the main control unit 161. Continuous transfer process B is a process called from the main routine or a subroutine, and first sets the number of transfers in the B register (Sf1), sets the lower address of the transfer source start address in the C register (Sf2), and sets the lower address of the transfer destination start address in the D register (Sf3).

Then, the LDQ command (LDQ A, (C)) reads the data of the source address, consisting of the upper address set in the Q register and the lower address of the source set in the C register, into the A register (Sf4), and the LDQ command (LDQ (D), A) writes the data of the A register into the destination address area, consisting of the upper address set in the Q register and the lower address of the destination set in the D register (Sf5).

Then, the lower address of the transfer source in the C register is incremented by 1 (Sf6), the lower address of the transfer destination in the D register is incremented by 1 (Sf7), the number of transfers in the B register is decremented by 1 (Sf8), and it is determined whether the number of transfers in the B register is 0 or not (Sf9).

If it is determined in Sf9 that the number of transfers in the B register is not 0, the process returns to Sf4 and performs the steps Sf4 to Sf9 again, and repeats the steps Sf4 to Sf9 until it is determined in Sf9 that the number of transfers in the B register is 0.

If it is determined in Sf9 that the transfer count in the B register is 0, the continuous area transfer process B ends and the process returns to the calling process.

In this way, in continuous area transfer process B, by specifying the lower address of the source start address of ROM 161b or RAM 161c, the lower address of the destination start address of RAM 161c, and the number of transfers, data is read from the source address consisting of the upper address of the Q register and the lower address of the source, read into the A register, and the read data from the A register is written into the destination address area consisting of the upper address of the Q register and the lower address of the destination, and then the process of incrementing the lower address of the source and the lower address of the destination by 1 is performed for the number of transfers, thereby reading data stored in continuous source continuous memory areas for the number of transfers from the source start address, and writing the read data from the source continuous memory areas into continuous destination continuous memory areas for the number of transfers from the destination start address.

The main control unit 161 can read two bytes of data stored in an address specified by a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address in a special register (Q register) and the address following that by specifying two registers such as the HL register and the DE register as the transfer destination using the LDQ command, and can write two bytes of data to an address specified by a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address in a special register (Q register) and the address following that by specifying two registers such as the HL register and the DE register as the transfer source using the LDQ command.

For example, as shown in FIG. 73, the LDQ command (LDQ HL, (k)) specifies the HL register as the transfer destination and the lower address of the transfer source: k, and reads the data of the address consisting of the upper address set in the Q register and the specified lower address: k into the L register, and reads the data of that address + 1 into the H register. That is, 2 bytes of data are read from a 2-byte area of consecutive addresses into the HL register. Also, by specifying the HL register as the transfer source with the LDQ command (LDQ (k), HL) and specifying the lower address of the transfer destination: k, the data of the L register is written into the address area consisting of the upper address set in the Q register and the specified lower address: k, and the value of the H register is written into the address + 1 area. That is, 2 bytes of data of the HL register are written into a 2-byte area of consecutive addresses.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to read and write data in consecutive address areas by using the consecutive area transfer process and the LDQ command. On the other hand, the memory area used by the main control unit 161 consists of multiple areas with different upper addresses. When consecutive address areas are accessed across areas with different upper addresses in this way, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult to understand the accessed address.

For this reason, in this embodiment, the source continuous memory area in which data to be read by continuous area transfer process B, which reads data using an LDQ command that specifies only a lower address, is stored is assigned to an area of RAM 161c that does not straddle the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address does not change. When data is read from the source continuous memory area by continuous area transfer process B, which is executed without specifying an upper address, the data is read from an area with the same upper address in both cases, preventing it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data is obtained from in the continuous area transfer process.

In addition, when data is read from consecutive addresses in ROM 161b, the source consecutive memory area in which the data to be read by consecutive area transfer process B, which reads data using an LDQ command that specifies only a lower address, is stored is assigned to an area in ROM 161b whose upper address does not change, and when data is read from the source consecutive memory area by consecutive area transfer process B, which is executed without specifying an upper address, the data is read from an area with the same upper address in both cases, preventing it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data is obtained from in the consecutive area transfer process.

In addition, when the source continuous memory area is assigned to an area of RAM 161c that spans the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address changes along the way, data from the source continuous memory area is read by continuous area transfer process A, which reads data using an LD command that specifies both the upper and lower addresses.When reading data from a source continuous memory area where the upper address changes along the way, it is necessary to specify both the upper and lower addresses of the source continuous memory area, which prevents it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data will be obtained from in the continuous area transfer process.

In addition, when data is read from consecutive addresses in ROM 161b, if the source consecutive memory area is assigned to an area of ROM 161b where the upper address changes along the way, the data from the source consecutive memory area is read by consecutive area transfer process A, which reads data using an LD command that specifies both the upper address and the lower address. When data is read from a source consecutive memory area where the upper address changes along the way, it is necessary to specify both the upper address and the lower address of the source consecutive memory area, which prevents it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data will be obtained from in the consecutive area transfer process.

In this embodiment, by using the continuous area transfer process A, which reads data using the LD command that specifies both the upper and lower addresses, it is possible to assign the source continuous memory area to an area of RAM 161c that straddles the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address changes along the way. However, whether using the continuous area transfer process A or the continuous area transfer process B, the source continuous memory area may be assigned to an area of RAM 161c that does not straddle the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address does not change. With this configuration, when data is read from the source continuous memory area by the continuous area transfer process, the data is read from an area with the same upper address in both cases, which prevents it from being difficult to determine which address the data is obtained from in the continuous area transfer process.

In addition, by using continuous area transfer process A, which reads data using an LD command that specifies both the upper and lower addresses, it is possible to assign the source continuous memory area to an area of ROM 161b whose upper address changes midway. However, whether using continuous area transfer process A or continuous area transfer process B, the source continuous memory area may be assigned to an area of ROM 161b whose upper address does not change. With this configuration, when data is read from the source continuous memory area by the continuous area transfer process, the data is read from an area with the same upper address in both cases, which prevents it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data is obtained from in the continuous area transfer process.

In addition, in this embodiment, the destination continuous memory area to which data is written by the continuous area transfer process B, which writes data using an LDQ command that specifies only a lower address, is assigned to an area of RAM 161c that does not straddle the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address does not change.When data is written to the destination continuous memory area by the continuous area transfer process B, which is executed without specifying an upper address, the data is written to an area with the same upper address in both cases, preventing it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data is written to in the continuous area transfer process.

In addition, when a destination continuous memory area is assigned to an area of RAM 161c that spans the first and second areas, the second and third areas, or the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address changes along the way, data is written to the destination continuous memory area by continuous area transfer process A, which writes data using an LD command that specifies both the upper and lower addresses.When writing data to a destination continuous memory area where the upper address changes along the way, it is necessary to specify both the upper and lower addresses of the destination continuous memory area, which prevents it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data will be written to in the continuous area transfer process.

In this embodiment, by using the continuous area transfer process A, which writes data using the LD command that specifies both the upper and lower addresses, it is possible to assign the destination continuous memory area to an area of RAM 161c that straddles the first and second areas, the second and third areas, and the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address changes along the way. However, whether using the continuous area transfer process A or the continuous area transfer process B, the destination continuous memory area may be assigned to an area of RAM 161c that does not straddle the first and second areas, the second and third areas, and the third and fourth areas, i.e., an area where the upper address does not change. By using such a configuration, when data is written to the source continuous memory area by the continuous area transfer process, the data is written to an area with the same upper address in both cases, which prevents it from being difficult to determine which address the data is written to in the continuous area transfer process.

In this embodiment, by specifying two registers such as the HL register and the DE register as the transfer destination using the LDQ command, it is possible to read two bytes of data stored in a special register (Q register) at an address specified by a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address, and at the address following that. When reading two bytes of data using the LDQ command, an address other than the final address of the first storage area of RAM 161c, the final address of the second storage area, the final address of the third storage area, and the final address of the fourth storage area, i.e., an address other than the address of the last area of the area to which a specific upper address is assigned, is specified as the source address. When reading two bytes of data using the LDQ command that specifies only a lower address as the source address, the two-byte area in which the source data is stored does not span areas with different upper addresses, and two bytes of data are read from areas with the same upper address in both cases, so that it is prevented from becoming difficult to determine which address the data is obtained from when reading two bytes of data using the LDQ command.

In addition, when reading two bytes of data with the LDQ command, an address other than the address of the last area of the area of ROM 161b to which a specific upper address is assigned is specified as the source address, and when reading two bytes of data with the LDQ command that specifies only a lower address as the source address, the two-byte area in which the source data is stored does not straddle areas with different upper addresses, and the two bytes of data are read from areas with the same upper address in both cases, which prevents it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data is obtained from when reading two bytes of data with the LDQ command.

In this embodiment, by specifying two registers such as the HL register and the DE register as the transfer source using the LDQ command, it is possible to write two bytes of data to an address specified by a pre-set upper address and a specified lower address in a special register (Q register) and the address following that. When writing two bytes of data using the LDQ command, an address other than the final address of the first storage area of RAM 161c, the final address of the second storage area, the final address of the third storage area, and the final address of the fourth storage area, i.e., an address other than the address of the last area of the area to which a specific upper address is assigned, is specified as the transfer destination address. When writing two bytes of data using the LDQ command that specifies only a lower address as the transfer destination address, the two-byte area in which the transfer destination data is stored does not straddle areas with different upper addresses, and two bytes of data are written to areas with the same upper address in both cases, so that it is prevented from becoming difficult to know which address the data is written to when writing two bytes of data using the LDQ command.

In addition, for areas of RAM 161c that span the first and second areas, the second and third areas, and the third and fourth areas, i.e., areas where the upper address changes along the way, where a source continuous memory area from which data is read by the continuous area transfer process A is not assigned, the final address of the relevant area and the start address of the area following the relevant area (for example, if a source continuous memory area from which data is read by the continuous area transfer process A is assigned to the first and second areas, the final address of the second area and the start address of the third area, and the final address of the third area and the start address of the fourth area) may be made an unused area, i.e., an area where no data used for control is stored and where 0 is always stored. By configuring in this way, when data is read by the continuous area transfer process B that reads data using the LDQ command that specifies only the lower address, when 2 bytes of data are read using the LDQ command, data is read from an area where the upper address does not change, which prevents it from being difficult to determine from which address the data is obtained. In addition, when writing data using the continuous area transfer process B, which reads data using an LDQ command that specifies only the lower address, when writing two bytes of data using the LDQ command, the data is written to an area where the upper address does not change, which prevents it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data is written to.

In addition, for any of the areas of RAM 161c that straddle the first and second areas, the second and third areas, and the third and fourth areas, i.e., any of the areas where the upper address changes midway, the final address of the corresponding area and the start address of the area following the corresponding area may be set to an unused area, i.e., an area where no data used for control is stored and where 0 is always stored. With this configuration, when data is read by a continuous area transfer process, when 2 bytes of data are read by an LDQ command, data is read from an area where the upper address does not change, which prevents it from being difficult to know which address the data is obtained from. In addition, when data is written by a continuous area transfer process, when 2 bytes of data are written by an LDQ command, data is written to an area where the upper address does not change, which prevents it from being difficult to know which address the data is written to.

In addition, even in areas of RAM 161c where the upper address changes midway and where the source continuous memory area from which data is read by the continuous area transfer process A is not assigned, the area that is distinguished as a whole, such as the in-capacity RAM area, may not be treated as an unused area, and for other areas, the final address of the relevant area and the start address of the area following the relevant area (for example, if the distinguished areas are the first and second areas, the final address of the second area and the start address of the third area, and the final address of the third area and the start address of the fourth area) may be treated as an unused area. With this configuration, when data is read by the continuous area transfer process or when 2 bytes of data are read by the LDQ command, data is read from an area whose upper address does not change, preventing it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data is obtained from, and allowing the areas of RAM 161c to be used efficiently. In addition, when writing data using a continuous area transfer process, or when writing two bytes of data using the LDQ command, the data is written to an area where the upper address does not change, which prevents it from becoming difficult to determine which address the data is being written to, while allowing for efficient use of RAM area.

[Game Information Display Section]
In the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, a game information display unit 90 is provided on an upper surface 96 of a protruding portion 95. The game information display unit 90 notifies players of advantageous states such as an AT1 state, an AT2 state, or a high probability state. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the appearance of the game information display unit 90.

The game information display section 90 includes a 1BET LED 14, a 2BET LED 15, a 3BET LED 16, a game auxiliary display 12, a replay lamp 91, an outer end signal lamp 92, a slot possible lamp 93, and a start valid lamp 94.

The gaming support display 12 displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs, operation information (navigation notification) corresponding to the operation mode, etc. Below, the number of medals paid out displayed by the gaming support display 12 may be referred to as the "number of medals paid out." In other words, the gaming support display 12 displays the gaming value awarded to the player according to the result of one game. The gaming support display 12 is composed of a 7-segment LED display, and is controlled by the main control unit 161.

The 1BET LED 14 lights up to indicate that a bet has been set to 1. The 2BET LED 15 lights up to indicate that a bet has been set to 2. The 3BET LED 16 lights up to indicate that a bet has been set to 3. The replay lamp 91 lights up to indicate that a replay has been won. The outer end signal lamp 92 lights up to indicate that the slot machine 2 will transition to the AT1 state or the AT2 state. The insertion possible lamp 93 lights up to indicate that a bet can be set. The start valid lamp 94 indicates that the operation of the start switch 7 is valid.

As described above, the slot machine 2 in this embodiment can be controlled to the normal advantageous zone, high probability state, AT1 state, and AT2 state. The normal advantageous zone is a state in which navigation is not executed. The high probability state is a state in which the number of points awarded is greater than that of the normal advantageous zone, and is a state in which it is easy to transition to the AT1 state. The AT1 state is a state in which navigation is displayed, and ends when a predetermined number of games have been played. The AT2 state is a so-called pseudo bonus state in which the player can increase the net increase in the number of coins they can earn by following the navigation.

As shown in FIG. 4, the AT2 state can be controlled from the AT1 state. For example, if the AT2 state is controlled when the number of games remaining in the AT1 state is not 0, the AT2 state is controlled while maintaining the AT1 state. For example, if the AT2 state is controlled when the number of games remaining in the AT1 state is 30, after play in the AT2 state ends, the game in the AT1 state with 30 games remaining is resumed.

In the slot machine 2 in this embodiment, an external output terminal is provided for communicating with a hall management computer or a hall server that performs security management, an external display device, and the like. As explained in the main processing flowchart, the main control unit 161 transmits the gaming machine status information received from the slot machine 2 via the external output terminal to an external device such as a hall management computer (hall computer) or a hall server that performs security management. In other words, the main control unit 161 notifies whether the status of the slot machine 2 is controlled to the advantageous zone normal, high probability state, AT1 state, or AT2 state by lighting the outer end signal lamp 92.

Figure 75 is a flowchart showing external signal processing. In the external signal processing (Sd20, Sd38) of the main processing, the main control unit 161 executes the flowchart shown in Figure 75. The main control unit 161 acquires the advantageous state in which the slot machine 2 is controlled, and judges whether the advantageous state is controlled to the AT1 state (St1). In St1, as described above, in the case of a gaming state in which the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is left and the state is controlled to the AT2 state, the main control unit 161 judges that the slot machine 2 is controlled to the AT1 state. In addition, even if the slot machine 2 is simply controlled to the AT1 state, the main control unit 161 judges that the slot machine 2 is controlled to the AT1 state. When the main control unit 161 judges that the slot machine 2 is controlled to the AT1 state (YES in S11), the main control unit 161 controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to a light-emitting state (St2). After that, the main control unit 161 starts outputting the external signal 1 (St3). The external signal 1 is a signal indicating that the slot machine 2 is controlled to the AT1 state. If external signal 1 is already being output, the main control unit 161 maintains the state of outputting external signal 1.

The main control unit 161 further obtains the advantageous state in which the slot machine 2 is being controlled, and judges whether the advantageous state is the AT2 state (St4). That is, in St4, the main control unit 161 judges whether the slot machine 2 is being controlled to the AT2 state while the AT1 state is being held. When it is judged that the slot machine 2 is being controlled to the AT2 state while the AT1 state is being held (YES in St4), the main control unit 161 starts outputting the external signal 2 (St5). The external signal 2 is a signal indicating that the slot machine 2 is being controlled to the AT2 state. When the external signal 2 has already been output, the main control unit 161 holds the state in which the external signal 2 is being output. When it is judged that the slot machine 2 is not being controlled to the AT2 state while the AT1 state is being held (NO in St4), the main control unit 161 ends outputting the external signal 2 (St5). When the external signal 2 has not already been output, the main control unit 161 holds the state in which the external signal 2 is not being output.

Returning to St1, if it is determined that the lamp is not controlled to the AT1 state (No in St1), then the main control unit 161 stops outputting the external signal 1 (St7). If the external signal 1 is no longer being output, the main control unit 161 maintains the state in which the external signal 1 is not being output. Then, the main control unit 161 controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to the normal state (St8). The normal state of the outer end signal lamp 92 means a state in which no light is being emitted.

The main control unit 161 judges whether the advantageous state is controlled to the AT2 state (St9). When it is judged that it is controlled to the AT2 state (YES in St9), the main control unit 161 controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to the light emitting state (St10). After that, the main control unit 161 starts outputting the external signal 2 (St11). When the external signal 2 has already been output, the main control unit 161 maintains the state in which the external signal 2 is being output. When it is judged that it is not controlled to the AT2 state (NO in St9), the main control unit 161 stops outputting the external signal 2 (St12). When the external signal 2 has not already been output, the main control unit 161 maintains the state in which the external signal 2 is not being output. After that, the main control unit 161 controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to the normal state (St13). The main control unit 161 makes the outer end signal lamp 92 light as shown in FIG. 76 by following the flowchart shown in FIG. 75.

Figure 76 is a diagram for explaining the lighting state of the outer end signal lamp 92 in this embodiment. As shown in Figure 76, at timing t1, the outer end signal lamp 92 is controlled to a lighting state by being controlled from a high probability state or a normal favorable zone to an AT2 state. Also, at timing t2, the outer end signal lamp 92 is controlled to a normal state by being controlled from the AT2 state to a high probability state or a normal favorable zone. Next, at timing t3, the outer end signal lamp 92 is controlled to a lighting state by being controlled from a high probability state or a normal favorable zone to an AT1 state. Furthermore, at timing t4, it is controlled to an AT2 state while maintaining the AT1 state. At this time, the outer end signal lamp 92 maintains a lighting state. Also, at timing t5, when it is controlled from the AT2 state to the AT1 state, the outer end signal lamp 92 maintains a lighting state. Finally, at timing t6, the outer end signal lamp 92 is controlled to a normal state by being controlled from the AT1 state to a normal zone.

In this way, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, external signal 1 is output when it is controlled to the AT1 state, and external signal 2 is output when it is controlled to the AT2 state, so that the output of the external signal can prevent the player from judging whether the slot machine 2 is controlled to the AT1 state or the AT2 state. Furthermore, the main control unit 161 controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to emit light before outputting either external signal 1 or external signal 2 to the outside. This makes it possible to notify the external device that it has been controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state by the specific light-emitting means before outputting a signal regarding the advantageous state, so that it is possible to prevent the advantageous state from being notified to the external device before the slot machine.

Furthermore, the main control unit 161 controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to the normal state after stopping the output of the external signal 1 as shown at St7, St8 in FIG. 75 and at timing t6 in FIG. 76, and controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to the normal state after stopping the output of the external signal 2 as shown at St12, St13 in FIG. 75 and at timing t2 in FIG. 76. As a result, the outer end signal lamp 92 is controlled to the normal state after stopping the output of the external signal related to the advantageous state to the external device, so that it is possible to prevent the slot machine 2 from being controlled to an advantageous state other than the AT1 state or the AT2 state even though the external device has notified that it is in the AT1 state or the AT2 state. In addition, the main control unit 161 controls the specific light-emitting means to the specific state during the period in which either the external signal 1 or the external signal 2 is output. As a result, the outer end signal lamp 92 is controlled to the light-emitting state, so that it is possible to externally determine that it is controlled to either the AT1 state or the AT2 state.

As shown at timing t4 and timing t5 in FIG. 76, the main control unit 161 may start and stop outputting the external signal 2 during the period in which the external signal 1 is being output. The main control unit 161 maintains the light emission state of the outer end signal lamp 92 regardless of whether the output of the external signal 2 has been started or ended. In this way, the light emission state of the outer end signal lamp 92 can be controlled so that it can be determined from the outside that it is at least controlled to the AT1 state.

Figure 77 is a diagram for explaining a first modified example of the lighting state of the outer end signal lamp 92. In the first modified example, it is controlled to a high probability state from timing t2 to timing t3. As shown in modified example 1, the main control unit 161 controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to a light emitting state between timing t2 and timing t3. That is, the main control unit 161 controls the outer end signal lamp 92 to a light emitting state during the period when either external signal 1 or external signal 2 is output. In this way, the main control unit 161 can externally determine that the outer end signal lamp 92 may be controlled to an AT1 state or an AT2 state by controlling the outer end signal lamp 92 to a light emitting state.

Figure 78 is a diagram for explaining a second modified example of the lighting state of the outer end signal lamp 92. In the second modified example, the main control unit 161 does not continuously output the external signal 2 during the period in which it is controlled to the AT2 state, but transmits only one pulse of the external signal 2 to the external device. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of communication in external signal processing.

[Regarding ball output control processing in advantageous zones]
As explained in the flow chart of the main process shown in FIG. 67, in the slot machine 2 in this embodiment, ball output control is performed in the advantageous zone. The ball output control in the advantageous zone is a control that ends the advantageous zone when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and is a so-called limiter control. In this embodiment, the main control unit 161 counts the difference between the total number of medals awarded, which is the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous zone, and the total number of medals used, which is the total number of medals used in the advantageous zone, as a difference count value, and performs ball output control using the difference count value. That is, the main control unit 161 counts the number of medals acquired by the player using the difference count value. The difference count value is held by a difference counter stored in the RAM 161c of the main control unit 161.

More specifically, when the value obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used from the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous zone exceeds +2400 medals, the main control unit 161 ends control of the advantageous zone and starts control of the normal zone. An example of when the value obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used from the total number of medals awarded exceeds +2400 medals is when, in the advantageous zone, 10,000 medals are awarded to the player and the player has used more than 7,600 medals.

The main control unit 161 executes ball output control pre-processing (Sd8) in the main processing of FIG. 67. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ball output control pre-processing of the main control unit 161. The ball output control pre-processing is executed at the start of a game. In the ball output control pre-processing (Sd8), the main control unit 161 judges whether the state of the slot machine 2 is being controlled to the advantageous zone (Su1). If it is being controlled to the advantageous zone (YES in Su1), the main control unit 161 increments the value of the advantageous zone counter (Su2).

The favorable zone counter is a counter stored in the RAM 161c of the main control unit 161, and is a counter for determining the upper limit of the number of games in the favorable zone. In the slot machine 2 in this embodiment, in addition to the limiter control that ends the favorable zone using the difference between the total number of medals awarded and the total number of medals used, two limiter controls are performed: a limiter control that ends the favorable zone using the number of games played in the favorable zone. In other words, the limiter control in the favorable zone is performed from two perspectives: the number of medals and the number of games played.

In limiter control using the number of games, the main control unit 161 ends control of the advantageous zone and starts control of the normal zone based on a predetermined number of games having been played since the advantageous zone began. The predetermined number in this embodiment is 4000 games. In other words, the main control unit 161 adds 1 to the value of the advantageous zone counter for each game (unit play) to count whether or not the maximum number of games in the advantageous zone, 4000 games, has been reached.

Then, the main control unit 161 judges whether the difference count value has reached the ending transition number (Su3). As described above, in the slot machine 2 in this embodiment, when the difference count value reaches the ending transition number (e.g., 2300), the slot machine 2 is controlled to the ending state, which determines that control to the advantageous zone will continue until the upper limit number (e.g., 2400) is reached.

When the main control unit 161 determines that the difference count value has reached the ending transition number (YES in Su3), it transitions the gaming state of the slot machine 2 to the ending state (Su4). When the main control unit 161 determines that the difference count value has not reached the ending transition number (NO in Su3), it does not transition to the ending state.

Then, the main control unit 161 judges whether or not the condition for the end of the advantageous zone has been met as a result of the internal lottery (Su5). In this embodiment, when the AT1 state is ended, the main control unit 161 can end the advantageous zone based on the result of the internal lottery, regardless of the difference count value, and control to the normal zone. In other words, when the AT1 state is ended, the main control unit 161 ends the advantageous zone when a predetermined special role is won. In Su5, the condition for the end of the advantageous zone is that a predetermined special role is won. If a predetermined special role is won in the internal lottery process of the main process, the main control unit 161 determines that the condition for the end of the advantageous zone has been met (Yes in Su5), and sets the advantageous zone end flag to "3" (Su6).

The favorable zone end flag is a flag stored in RAM 161c, and is used in subsequent processing to determine whether or not the favorable zone has ended. The favorable zone end flag is, for example, a counter that can hold values from 0 to 3. The favorable zone end flag stores "0" as its initial value. In Su6, the main control unit 161 updates the value held by the favorable zone end flag to "3", ends the ball output control pre-processing, and returns to the main processing. Also, if the main control unit 161 determines as a result of the internal lottery that the conditions for the end of the favorable zone have not been met (NO in Su5), it ends the ball output control pre-processing and returns to the main processing.

In addition, when it is determined in Su1 that the ball is being controlled to the normal zone rather than the advantageous zone (NO in Su1), the main control unit 161 determines whether or not to transition to the advantageous zone (Su7). More specifically, the main control unit 161 determines whether or not to transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone depending on the result of the internal lottery process in the main process. When it is determined to remain in the normal zone as a result of the internal lottery process (NO in Su7), the main control unit 161 ends the ball output control pre-processing and returns to the main process.

When it is determined that the internal lottery process will result in a transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone (YES in Su7), the main control unit 161 initializes the difference number counter (Su8). In other words, the main control unit 161 returns the difference number count value to its initial value. Various values can be set for the initial value of the difference number count value depending on the method for calculating the difference between the total number of awarded points and the total number of used points. More details will be given later, using multiple examples.

Then, the main control unit 161 initializes the advantageous zone counter (Su9). That is, the main control unit 161 returns the value of the advantageous zone counter to its initial value. In this embodiment, the initial value of the advantageous zone counter is "0". After initializing the difference counter and the advantageous zone counter, the main control unit 161 ends the ball output control pre-processing.

As shown in FIG. 67, after the ball output control pre-processing is completed in Sd8, internal lottery processing, winning determination processing, etc. are performed, and then the main control unit 161 performs ball output control post-processing in Sd30. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the ball output control post-processing of the main control unit 161, which executes the advantageous zone end determination based on the initial value.

In post-ball control processing (Sd30), the main control unit 161 determines whether or not a replay win has occurred in the winning determination processing (Sv1). If it is determined that a replay win has not occurred (NO in Sv1), the main control unit 161 reads out the difference count value stored in the difference counter in RAM 161c to a register included in the first register bank R1 (Sv2). The main control unit 161 stores the difference count value, for example, by combining the A register of the first register bank R1 with other registers. Hereinafter, the value read out to the register of the first register bank R1 is referred to as the "value corresponding to the difference count value."

The main control unit 161 adds the number of medals awarded in the game (unit game) being executed to the value corresponding to the difference count value read into the first register bank R1 (Sv3). Furthermore, the main control unit 161 subtracts the number of medals used in the game (unit game) being executed from the value corresponding to the difference count value read into the first register bank R1 (Sv4). In other words, the main control unit 161 adds or subtracts the number of medals awarded and the number of medals used in the game being executed to or from the value corresponding to the difference count value in the first register bank R1, and updates the value corresponding to the difference count value.

Finally, the value corresponding to the difference count value stored in the first register bank R1 updated by the processes of Sv3 and Sv4 is written to RAM 161c (Sv5). In Sv2, the read difference count value is subjected to addition and subtraction processes in the first register bank R1, and the value corresponding to the difference count value after the addition and subtraction processes are performed is written back to RAM 161c. This updates the difference counter in RAM 161c to reflect the number of awards and usages for the game being executed.

Next, the main control unit 161 determines whether a specific event has occurred in the difference count value (Sv6). Specific events will be explained in detail later. If the main control unit 161 determines that a specific event has occurred in the difference count value (YES in Sv6), it sets the favorable zone end flag to "1" (Su7). In other words, the main control unit 161 updates the value held by the favorable zone end flag to "1". If a specific event has not occurred in the difference count value (NO in Su6), the main control unit 161 does not perform the update process of the favorable zone end flag in Sv7.

Then, the main control unit 161 determines whether the value of the favorable zone counter is greater than a predetermined number (4000) (Sv8). The specific event will be explained in detail later. If the main control unit 161 determines that a specific event has occurred in the difference count value (YES in Sv8), it sets the favorable zone end flag to "2" (Sv9). In other words, the main control unit 161 updates the value held by the favorable zone end flag to "1" in Sv9. If the value of the favorable zone counter is equal to or less than the predetermined number (NO in Sv9), the main control unit 161 does not perform the update process of the favorable zone end flag.

Furthermore, the main control unit 161 determines whether or not the advantageous zone end flag is set to a value other than "0" (Sv10). A value other than "0" is set when the advantageous zone end flag is updated in at least one of the processes Su6 in the pre-ball output control process and Sv7 and Sv9 in the post-ball output control process. When a value other than "0" is set in the advantageous zone end flag (YES in Sv10), the main control unit 161 transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone (Sv11). In other words, the main control unit 161 ends the advantageous zone and starts the normal zone.

In addition, when the main control unit 161 determines in Sv1 that a replay has been won (NO in Sv1), it ends the post-ball payout control processing without executing the update process of the difference count value shown in Sv2 to Sv5. In other words, the main control unit 161 determines whether or not a replay display result (replay role) has been derived when the unit game ends, and if it determines that a replay display result has been derived, it does not update the difference count value. This makes it possible to omit the update process when a replay display result is derived, thereby reducing the processing burden.

Also, as shown in Figures 67 and 80, in the post-ball control processing of the main processing, the main control unit 161 determines in Sv6, 8 whether to end control to the advantageous zone for each unit game based on the difference count value, regardless of whether the difference count value changes between when the unit game starts and when the unit game ends. This makes it possible to reliably determine whether to end control to the advantageous zone for each unit game.

In this way, when a unit game ends, the main control unit 161 stores the difference count value in the first register bank R1, adds a value corresponding to the number of medals awarded to the difference count value stored in the first register bank R1, and then subtracts a value corresponding to the number of medals used. This ensures that addition is followed by subtraction, preventing subtraction alone from occurring and preventing the difference count value from becoming an unintentionally small value.

Figure 81 is a diagram for explaining the difference counter of RAM 161c. The difference counter is a storage area with a capacity of 2 bytes. The difference counter of RAM 161c can store an area of 16 bits (2 bytes) in binary. In other words, the difference counter can count and hold values from 0 to 65535. Similarly, a usable area of 16 bits (2 bytes) is arranged in the first register bank R1 to store a value corresponding to the difference count value.

As shown in Figure 81(A), if all the bits in the two bytes are "0", the corresponding decimal number is "0". As shown in Figure 81(B), if the 6th to 8th, 10th to 12th, and 14th bits are "1" and the other bits are "0", i.e., "0010 1110 1110 0000", the corresponding decimal number is "12000". Also, as shown in Figure 81(C), if only the 15th bit is "1" and the other bits are "0", i.e., "0100 0000 0000 0000", the corresponding decimal number is "16384". Finally, as shown in Figure 81(D), if all the bits are "1", the corresponding decimal number is "65535".

Figure 82 is a diagram showing the flow of communication between the first register bank R1 and RAM 161c via the CPU 161a. After the post-ball control process is executed, if there is no replay win, the CPU 161a reads the difference count value of RAM 161c to the first register bank R1. For example, if the difference counter in RAM 161c stores "0010 1110 1110 0000" in Figure 81 (B), the CPU 161a writes "0010 1110 1110 0000" to the first register bank as the value corresponding to the difference count value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82, the number of medals awarded in the game being executed is added to the value corresponding to the difference count value of the first register bank R1. If the CPU 161a determines that, for example, eight medals have been awarded in the game being executed, it adds the value corresponding to eight medals to the "0010 1110 1110 0000" stored in the first register bank R1 to obtain "0010 1110 1110 1000". In other words, it rewrites the fourth bit from "0" to "1".

Furthermore, the number of uses occurring in the game being executed is subtracted to a value corresponding to the difference count value of the first register bank R1. When the CPU 161a determines that, for example, three medals have been used in the game being executed, it subtracts the value corresponding to three medals from "0010 1110 1110 1000" stored in the first register bank R1 after the number of awarded medals has been added, resulting in "0010 1110 1110 0101". In other words, the 1st to 4th bits are rewritten from "1000" to "0101".

Finally, the CPU 161a writes the value "0010 1110 1110 0101" of the first register bank R1 after the addition of the given number and the subtraction of the used number back to the difference number counter of the RAM 161c. As a result, the difference number count value contained in the RAM 161c is rewritten from "0010 1110 1110 0000" to "0010 1110 1110 0101", which is the value to which the addition and subtraction of the given number and the used number have been applied. In other words, the difference number count value of the RAM 161c is updated.

In this way, the difference count value is stored in RAM 161c, and the main control unit 161 reads out the difference count value stored in RAM 161c to the first register bank R1, updates the read value of the first register bank R1 with a value corresponding to the number of medals awarded and a value corresponding to the number of medals used, and determines whether or not to end control over the advantageous zone based on the updated value of the first register bank R1. This allows the difference count value to be counted using the first register bank R1, thereby reducing the processing burden on the CPU 161a.

In addition, before determining whether or not to end control of the favorable zone in Sv10 of FIG. 80, the main control unit 161 updates the value of the first register bank R1 updated in FIG. 80 to the difference count value stored in RAM 161c. This makes it possible to prevent the difference count value stored in RAM 161c from becoming an unintended value even when the favorable zone is ended.

[Determining the end of the favorable period based on the initial value]
As described above, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, the limiter control is executed when the value obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used from the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. In other words, the upper limit of the difference obtained by subtracting the number of medals used from the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous zone is 2400, and when the number of medals paid out exceeds 2400, the slot machine transitions to the normal zone. This makes it possible to prevent excessive gambling.

There are various possible methods for the main control unit 161 to determine whether the difference count value has exceeded a specific number (+2400). Below, four patterns for determining the end of the advantageous period (limiter control) based on initial value settings are explained using Figures 83 to 86.

Figure 83 is a diagram for explaining the first pattern of determining the end of the advantageous period based on the initial value setting. As explained in Sv6 and Sv10 of Figure 80, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, the main control unit 161 ends the advantageous period based on the occurrence of a specific event in the difference number count value.

Which type of event constitutes a specific event can be varied by settings and programs, but it must be set up so that a specific event occurs when the total number of uses minus the total number of granted exceeds a specific number. In the example of FIG. 83, a specific event is set as the 15th bit of the difference count value changing from "0" to "1". The main control unit 161 determines that a specific event has occurred when the 15th bit of the difference count value is carried over from "0" to "1".

The initial value of the difference count value in FIG. 83 is "0011 0110 1001 1111", which is "13983" in decimal. In the following, to simplify the explanation, the difference count value held as a binary number may be converted to a decimal number. In Su8 of FIG. 79, when the difference counter is initialized, "0011 0110 1001 1111" is stored in the difference counter.

The initial value of the difference count value is the value set when the favorable zone ends, so it means that the value obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used from the total number of medals given is "0". In other words, the difference count value "13983" in FIG. 83 corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used from the total number of medals given being "0". In the center of FIG. 83, a one-dimensional horizontal axis showing the capacity of the difference count value described above is shown. The left end of the horizontal axis shows the difference count value of "0000 0000 0000 0000" ("0" in decimal) as shown in FIG. 81(A), and the right end shows the difference count value of "1111 1111 1111 1111" ("65535" in decimal) as shown in FIG. 81(D). For convenience, the upper part of the one-dimensional horizontal axis shows the value when the difference count value is expressed as a decimal number. The bottom of the one-dimensional horizontal axis shows the difference between the total number of grants and the total number of uses, which corresponds to the difference count value.

When the specific number "2400" is added to the initial value "13983", the result is "16383". When "16383" is expressed as a binary number, it becomes "0011 1111 1111 1111". When the difference between the number of granted and the number of used exceeds +2400, "1" is added to the difference count value "16383" to become "16384". When "16384" is expressed in binary, it becomes "0100 0000 0000 0000". In other words, when the difference between the total number of granted and the total number of used exceeds +2400, a specific event occurs in which the 15th bit changes from "0" to "1". In this way, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous zone exceeds +2400 coins, the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event has occurred by the occurrence of a carryover of the 15th bit of the difference count value. As a result, in the post-ball payout control process, as described in FIG. 80, the advantageous zone can be ended by transitioning from Sv10 to Sv11.

In this way, in FIG. 83, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that a specific event occurs when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used exceeds +2400 coins. As a result, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, it is possible to determine that the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used has exceeded a specific number simply by setting the initial value to "13983" without performing any specific calculations on the difference count value to determine whether it has exceeded a specific number, and it is possible to appropriately determine the end of the advantageous period.

To explain more specifically, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that the 15th bit of the difference count value is incremented when the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses exceeds +2400. The main control unit 161 ends control over the advantageous zone when the 15th bit of the difference count value is incremented. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to end control over the advantageous zone by referring to a specific bit of the difference count value, without applying any specific calculation to the difference count value.

In the example of FIG. 83, the specific event is set as the 15th bit being carried over, but the specific event may be set as the value of a bit other than the 15th bit being carried over. For example, the specific event may be set as the value of the 14th bit being carried over. In this case, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that the 14th bit is carried over when the difference between the number of coins awarded and the number of coins used exceeds +2400.

Figure 84 is a diagram for explaining the second pattern of determining the end of the favorable zone by setting initial values. As described above, the type of event that is determined as a specific event can be changed by the settings and programs of the main control unit 161. In the example of Figure 84, an overflow caused by an addition of the difference count value is set as the specific event. The main control unit 161 uses the flag register described in Figure 61 to determine whether an overflow has occurred as a result of the addition of the difference count value. More specifically, the main control unit 161 determines that an overflow has occurred when the value of the second bit of the first F register changes from "0" to "1".

The initial value of the difference count value in FIG. 84 is "1111 0110 1001 1111", which is "63135" when expressed as a decimal number. In FIG. 84, the initial value of the difference count value, "63135", corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting the total number of uses from the total number of granted coins being "0 coins".

If the specific number "2400" is added to the initial value "63135", it becomes "65535". If "65535" is expressed as a binary number, it becomes "1111 1111 1111 1111". In other words, when the difference count value exceeds "65535", an overflow occurs due to addition set as a specific event in the difference count value. In other words, when it exceeds "65535", the flag register is turned on. In this way, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous zone exceeds +2400 coins, the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event has occurred because the second bit of the flag register is carried over. As a result, in the post-ball control process, as described in FIG. 80, it is possible to transition from Sv10 to Sv11 and end the advantageous zone.

In this way, in FIG. 84, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that a specific event, an overflow due to addition, occurs when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used exceeds +2400. As a result, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, by using the flag register that the first register bank R1 has as a function, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to end control over the advantageous zone.

Figure 85 is a diagram for explaining the third pattern of determining the end of the advantageous zone by initial value setting. In Figure 85, the method of adding and subtracting the number of medals awarded and the number of medals used is different from Figures 83 and 84. As shown in the lower part of Figure 85, when medals are used, a value corresponding to the number of medals used is added. Also, when medals are awarded, a value corresponding to the number of medals awarded is subtracted. That is, in the third pattern shown in Figure 85, in Sv3 in Figure 80, the number of medals awarded in a unit game is subtracted, and in Sv4 in Figure 80, the number of medals used in a unit game is added. In other words, in Figure 85, the relationship between use and award and addition and subtraction is reversed compared to Figures 83 and 92.

In the example of Figure 85, similar to Figure 83, a specific event is set when the 15th bit of the difference count value changes from "1" to "0". The initial value of the difference count value in Figure 85 is "0100 1001 0110 0000", which is "18784" when expressed as a decimal number. The difference count value "18784" in Figure 85 corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting the total number of uses from the total number of granted being "0".

When the specific number "2400" is subtracted from the initial value "18784", the result is "16384". When "16384" is expressed as a binary number, it becomes "0100 0000 0000 0000". When the difference between the number of granted and the number of used exceeds +2400, it occurs when "1" is subtracted from the difference count value "16384" to become "16383". When "16383" is expressed as a binary number, it becomes "0011 1111 1111 1111", so when the difference between the number of granted and the number of used exceeds +2400, a specific event occurs in which the 15th bit changes from "1" to "0".

In this way, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous zone exceeds +2400 coins, the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event has occurred based on the down-signal of the 15th bit of the difference count value. As a result, in the post-ball payout control process, the system can transition from Sv10 to Sv11 as described in FIG. 80, and the advantageous zone can be ended.

In this way, in FIG. 85, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used exceeds +2400 coins, a specific event occurs in which the 15th bit of the difference count value is down-digited. This makes it possible to determine that the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used exceeds +2400 coins without performing any specific calculations on the difference count value, and makes it possible to appropriately determine the end of the advantageous period.

To be more specific, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that the 15th bit of the difference count value is dropped when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used exceeds +2400. The main control unit 161 ends control over the advantageous zone in response to the 15th bit of the difference count value being dropped. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to end control over the advantageous zone by referring to the 15th bit of the difference count value, without performing any calculations on the difference count value.

Figure 86 is a diagram to explain the fourth pattern of determining the end of an advantageous period based on initial value settings. In Figure 86, like Figure 85, addition occurs when medals are used and subtraction occurs when medals are awarded. That is, in the fourth pattern shown in Figure 86, like Figure 85, the number of medals awarded in a unit game is subtracted in Sv3 in Figure 80, and the number used in a unit game is added in Sv4 in Figure 80.

In the example of Figure 86, an overflow caused by subtraction of the difference count value is set as a specific event. The initial value of the difference count value in Figure 86 is "0000 1001 0110 0000", which is "2400" expressed as a decimal number. The difference count value "2400" in Figure 86 corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting the total number used from the total number given being "0".

If the specific number "2400" is subtracted from the initial value "2400", the decimal number becomes "0". If "0" is expressed as a binary number, it becomes "0000 0000 0000 0000". In other words, when the difference between the number of coins awarded and the number of coins used exceeds +2400, "1" is subtracted from the difference count value "0", and the difference count value falls below "0", causing an overflow. In other words, the flag register is turned on. In this way, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous zone exceeds +2400, the second bit of the flag register is carried over, so that the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event, which is an overflow due to subtraction, has occurred. As a result, in the post-ball control process, the system transitions from Sv10 to Sv11 as described in FIG. 80, and the advantageous zone can be ended.

In this way, in FIG. 86, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that a specific event, an overflow due to subtraction, occurs when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used exceeds +2400. As a result, in the slot machine 2 of FIG. 86, by using the flag register that the first register bank R1 has as a function, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to end control over the advantageous zone.

[Determining the end of the favorable period based on the judgment value]
As described above, in Figures 83 to 86, the initial value of the difference count value is set so that a specific event occurs when the difference between the number of awarded coins and the number of used coins exceeds a specific number, thereby ending the advantageous period. Below, in Figures 87 to 91, an example will be described in which the initial value is not set to a specific value, but a judgment value is used to end the advantageous period.

Figure 87 is a flowchart showing post-ball control processing of the main control unit 161 when executing a favorable zone end determination based on a determination value. In the flowchart shown in Figure 87, Sv5A processing is added to the flowchart in Figure 80. The other processes are the same as those in Figure 80, so the explanation will not be repeated. In Figure 87, after executing Sv5 processing, Sv5A processing is executed. In Sv5A processing, a determination value is added to a value corresponding to the difference count value stored in the first register bank. The determination value is a value for determining the end of the favorable zone, and is explained in Figure 88.

Figure 88 is a diagram for explaining the first pattern of determining the end of a favorable period based on a judgment value. In Figure 88 as well, as explained in Sv10 and Sv11 of Figure 80, the main control unit 161 ends the favorable period based on the occurrence of a specific event in the difference count value.

In the example of FIG. 88, as in FIG. 83, the change of the 15th bit of the difference count value from "0" to "1" is set as a specific event. The initial value of the difference count value in FIG. 88 is different from that in FIG. 83. The initial value of the difference count value in FIG. 88 is "0010 1110 1110 0000", which is "12000" when expressed as a decimal number. The initial value of the difference count value in FIG. 88 is determined based on the upper limit of the advantageous zone counter. As described above, the upper limit of the advantageous zone in terms of the number of games is 4000 games. If no winnings are won during the 4000 games, the difference between the number of awards and the number of uses is -12000. Therefore, by setting the initial value of the difference count value in FIG. 88 to "12000", no overflow due to subtraction will occur even if the number of uses increases excessively. Note that in FIG. 88, the initial value is not limited to "12000" and may be, for example, a value greater than "12000".

As shown in Sv5A in FIG. 87, after updating the difference count value, the main control unit 161 adds a judgment value to the value corresponding to the difference count value. The judgment value in FIG. 88 is "1983". If the specific number "2400" is added to the initial value "12000", it becomes "14400". Furthermore, if the judgment value "1983" is added to "14400", it becomes "16383".

If "16383" is expressed as a binary number, it becomes "0011 1111 1111 1111." When the difference between the number of granted and the number of used exceeds +2400 and a judgment value is added, the difference count value changes from "16383" to "16384." If "16384" is expressed as a binary number, it becomes "0100 0000 0000 0000," so when the difference between the number of granted and the number of used exceeds +2400 and a judgment value is added, a specific event occurs in which the 15th bit changes from "0" to "1."

In this way, also in FIG. 88, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous zone exceeds +2400 coins, the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event has occurred based on the carry of the 15th bit of the difference count value. In the example of FIG. 88, the main control unit 161 determines whether or not a specific event has occurred for the difference count value after adding the determination value "1983". As a result, in the post-ball payout control processing, the system transitions from Sv10 to Sv11 as described in FIG. 80, and the advantageous zone can be ended.

In FIG. 88, the judgment value of the difference count value is set so that a specific event occurs when the difference between the total awarded number and the total used number exceeds +2400 coins. As a result, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, by determining that the difference between the total awarded number and the total used number exceeds +2400 coins depending on whether or not a specific event occurs when the judgment value is added to the difference count value, the end of the advantageous period can be suitably determined without having to set a specific initial value for the difference counter in advance.

To be more specific, the judgment value is set so that the 15th bit of the difference count value is incremented when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used exceeds +2400. The main control unit 161 ends control over the advantageous zone in response to the 15th bit of the difference count value being incremented. This allows the main control unit 161 to determine whether or not to end control over the advantageous zone based on the difference count value to which the judgment value has been added.

In addition, the initial value in FIG. 88 is set to "12000" in relation to the advantageous zone counter, but it may be a value other than "12000", for example, any value greater than "12000". In this case, the judgment value may be set so that when the difference between the total number of awarded and the total number of used exceeds +2400, the 15th bit of the difference count value is carried over.

Figure 89 is a diagram for explaining the second pattern of determining the end of the favorable period based on the determination value. In the example of Figure 89, an overflow caused by an addition to the difference count value is set as a specific event. The main control unit 161 uses a flag register to determine whether an overflow has occurred due to an addition to the difference count value.

The initial value in Figure 89 is set to "12000" in relation to the advantageous zone counter, just like in Figure 88. On the other hand, the judgment value in Figure 89 is "51135". If the specific number "2400" is added to the initial value "12000", it becomes "14400". Furthermore, if the judgment value "51135" is added to "14400", it becomes "65535".

In other words, when the difference between the number of coins awarded and the number of coins used exceeds +2400 and the difference count value exceeds "65535", an overflow occurs due to the addition, and the flag register turns on. In this way, in FIG. 89 as well, when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous zone exceeds +2400, the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event has occurred because the flag register turns on.

In the example of FIG. 89, the main control unit 161 judges whether or not a specific event has occurred for the difference count value after adding the judgment value "51135". As a result, in the post-ball control processing, as described in FIG. 80, it is possible to transition from Sv10 to Sv11 and end the advantageous zone. As a result, in the slot machine 2 shown in FIG. 89, based on the value corresponding to the difference count value after adding the judgment value "51135", and by using the flag register that the first register bank R1 has as a function, it is possible to suitably judge whether or not to end control over the advantageous zone.

Figure 90 is a diagram for explaining the third pattern of determining the end of the advantageous period based on the determination value. In Figure 90, similar to Figures 85 and 94, in Sv3 in Figure 80, the number of awarded points in a unit game is subtracted, and in Sv4 in Figure 80, the number of uses in a unit game is added. In other words, in Figure 90, the relationship between use and award and addition and subtraction is reversed compared to Figures 88 and 97.

In the example of Figure 90, a specific event is set when the 15th bit of the difference count value changes from "1" to "0". The initial value of the difference count value in Figure 90 is "1100 0111 1011 1111", which is "53535" when expressed as a decimal number. Adding "12000" to the initial value "53535" results in "65535". In other words, the initial value "53535" is determined in relation to the advantageous zone counter, as explained above.

The judgment value in Figure 90 is "34751". Subtracting the specific number "2400" from the initial value "53535" results in "51135". Furthermore, subtracting the judgment value "34751" from "51135" results in "16384". When the difference between the number of granted and the number of used exceeds +2400 and the judgment value is subtracted, this occurs when "1" is subtracted from the difference count value "16384" to become "16383". In other words, when the difference between the number of granted and the number of used exceeds +2400 and the judgment value is subtracted, a specific event occurs in which the 15th bit changes from "1" to "0".

When the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used in the advantageous zone exceeds +2400 coins and the judgment value is subtracted, the main control unit 161 can determine that a specific event has occurred based on the down-signal of the 15th bit of the difference count value. As a result, in the post-ball payout control process, the system can transition from Sv10 to Sv11 as described in FIG. 80, and the advantageous zone can be ended.

In this way, the judgment value in FIG. 90 is set so that when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used exceeds +2400 and the judgment value is subtracted, a specific event occurs in which the 15th bit of the difference count value is downgraded. In this way, by determining that the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used exceeds a specific number, the end of the advantageous period can be appropriately determined without having to set a specific initial value in advance for the difference counter.

To explain more specifically, the judgment value in FIG. 90 is set so that the 15th bit of the difference count value is shifted down when the difference between the total number of awarded coins and the total number of used coins exceeds a specific number. The main control unit 161 ends control over the advantageous zone in response to the 15th bit of the difference count value being shifted down. This allows the main control unit 161 to determine whether or not to end control over the advantageous zone based on the difference count value from which the judgment value has been subtracted.

Figure 91 is a diagram to explain the fourth pattern of determining the end of the advantageous period based on the judgment value. In Figure 91, as in Figure 90, an addition is made when a medal is used, and a subtraction is made when a medal is awarded.

In the example of FIG. 91, an overflow caused by subtraction of the difference count value is a specific event. The initial value of the difference count value in FIG. 91 is "53535", as in FIG. 90. On the other hand, the judgment value in FIG. 91 is "51135". If the initial value "53535" is subtracted by the specific number "2400" and then the judgment value "51135" is subtracted, the result is "0". When the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses exceeds +2400 and the judgment value is subtracted, "1" is subtracted from the difference count value "0", it falls below "0", and an overflow occurs. In other words, the flag register is turned on. As a result, in the post-ball control process, as described in FIG. 80, the system transitions from Sv10 to Sv11, and the advantageous zone can be ended.

In this way, in FIG. 91, the judgment value is set so that when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used exceeds +2400 and the judgment value is subtracted, a specific event occurs, which is an overflow due to subtraction. As a result, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, by using the flag register that the first register bank R1 has as a function, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to end control over the advantageous zone.

[Counting of Difference Count Value in the Production Control Unit 151]
In the above, it has been explained that the main control unit 161 updates the difference count value for each unit game by using the RAM 161c and the first register bank R1. The performance control unit 151 also holds a counter similar to the difference counter held in the main control unit 161, and updates the difference count value for each unit game. That is, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, the main control unit 161 and the performance control unit 151 each hold a counter for storing the difference count value. Hereinafter, the counter for storing the difference count value held by the performance control unit 151 is referred to as the "difference counter on the performance control side."

Figure 92 is a diagram for explaining command communication between the main control board 16 and the performance control board 15. As shown in Figure 92, when the start switch 7 is operated (start operation), the main control unit 161 transmits the game start command shown in Figure 11 to the performance control unit 151. Also, as shown in Figure 92, when the stop switch is stopped for the third time (when all reels are stopped), the main control unit 161 transmits the game end command shown in Figure 12 to the performance control unit 151.

As shown in FIG. 11, the command at the start of the game includes the command No. 12 "Insert medal", which stores information indicating that medals have been bet. The command at the end of the game includes the command "Winning number", which stores information about the winning.

Figure 93 is a diagram explaining the control contents of the update process of the difference number counter on the effect control side performed by the effect control unit 151 with respect to the number of medals used. The effect control unit 151 judges whether or not a game start command has been received (Sm1). If a game start command has not been received (NO in Sm1), the effect control unit 151 ends the process without updating the difference number counter on the effect control side. If a game start command has been received (YES in Sm1), the effect control unit 151 refers to the command "insert medal" included in the game start command to obtain the number of medals used in the game in which the start switch 7 was pressed (Sm2). After that, the effect control unit 151 updates the difference number counter on the effect control side (Sm3).

More specifically, in the pattern examples of Figures 83, 84, 88, and 89, the performance control unit 151 subtracts the value of the difference number counter on the performance control side. On the other hand, in the pattern examples of Figures 85, 86, 90, and 91, the performance control unit 151 adds to the value of the difference number counter on the performance control side.

Next, the update of the number of awarded medals in the difference number counter on the performance control unit 151 side will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram explaining the control contents of the update of the number of awarded medals in the performance control unit performed by the performance control unit 151. The performance control unit 151 judges whether or not a game end command has been received (Sn1). If the game end command has not been received (NO in Sn1), the performance control unit 151 ends the process without performing the update process of the number of awarded medals in the difference number counter on the performance control side. If the game end command has been received (YES in Sn1), the performance control unit 151 refers to the command "winning number" included in the game end command to obtain the number of awarded medals used in the game in which the start switch 7 was pressed (Sn2). After that, the performance control unit 151 updates the number of awarded medals in the difference number counter on the performance control side (Sn3).

More specifically, in the pattern examples of Figures 83, 84, 88, and 89, the performance control unit 151 adds to the value of the difference number counter on the performance control side. On the other hand, in the pattern examples of Figures 85, 86, 90, and 91, the performance control unit 151 subtracts from the value of the difference number counter on the performance control side.

The difference number counter on the presentation control side is a variable contained in RAM 151c of the presentation control unit 151, and corresponds to the difference number counter contained in RAM 161c of the main control unit 161. Each time the presentation control unit 151 receives a game start command, it updates the number of uses of the difference number counter on the presentation control side, so that the difference number counter on the presentation control unit 151 side and the difference number counter on the main control unit 161 side will be the same number at the end of a unit game unless any fraud or malfunction occurs.

Returning to FIG. 92, after receiving the game start command, the performance control unit 151 executes performance control based on the difference count value on the performance control side. The performance control unit 151 can obtain the number of coins until limiter control is executed from the difference count value. If the number of coins until limiter control is executed is smaller than a specific threshold, the performance control unit 151 does not execute a provocative performance. For example, it is conceivable that an unnecessary provocative performance may be executed for the player immediately before limiter control, thereby reducing the player's interest. Therefore, in the slot machine 2 in this embodiment, the performance control unit 151 executes performance control based on the difference count value to prevent the player's interest from being reduced.

In this way, the performance control unit 151 counts the difference count value on the performance control side using values corresponding to the number of balls inserted and the number of winning balls sent from the main control unit 161 based on the command received from the main control unit 161, and executes performance control based on the difference count value on the performance control side after counting. As a result, the difference counters are counted by both the performance control unit 151 and the main control unit 161, so that performance control can be executed by the performance control unit 151 based on an accurate difference counter.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which the performance control unit 151 and the main control unit 161 each have a difference counter, but the performance control unit 151 may not perform the update process for the difference counter, and the difference count value in RAM 161c in the main control unit 161 may be sent directly to the performance control unit 151. In this case, the main control unit 161 sends the difference count value to the performance control unit 151. The performance control unit 151 executes performance control based on the difference count value sent from the main control unit 161. This allows the performance control unit 151 to execute performance control based on the difference count value of the main control unit 161.

[Example of transmission of difference count value between the production control unit and the main control unit]
As described above, the performance control unit 151 may receive the difference count value directly from the main control unit 161. FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining commands transmitted from the main control board 16 to the performance control board 15.

The main control board 16 transmits a set of two-byte commands shown in FIG. 95(A) to the performance control board 15. The main control unit 161 transmits the difference count value to the performance control unit 151 by including it in the two-byte command shown in FIG. 95(A). Of the two-byte commands shown in FIG. 95(A), the first byte command shown in the upper part of FIG. 95(A) is a command indicating the type of information. For example, the first byte command shown in the upper part of FIG. 95(A) contains data indicating the type of information of the transmitted command, such as whether it is a command related to an internal lottery or a command indicating the remaining number of safety device activations in safety device processing.

On the other hand, of the two-byte command shown in FIG. 95(A), the second byte command shown at the bottom of FIG. 95(A) is a command indicating information content. The first byte command shown at the bottom of FIG. 95(A) stores data indicating the result of the internal lottery and the number of remaining safety activations. In both the first byte command and the second byte command, the eighth bit (first bit) stores information for the command itself to distinguish between the first byte command and the second byte command. To explain more specifically, the performance control unit 151 receives a two-byte command from the main control unit 161. The performance control unit 151 refers to the eighth bit (first bit) of one of the received two-byte commands, and if "1" is stored, it determines that the referenced command is the first byte command indicating the information type. On the other hand, the performance control unit 151 refers to the eighth bit (first bit) of the other of the received two-byte command, and if "0" is stored, it determines that the referenced command is the first byte command indicating the information content.

The capacity of the difference counter is 16 bits (2 bytes). The maximum number that can be stored in a 7-bit area is 127, so the entire capacity of the difference counter cannot be transmitted in one command transmission.

Therefore, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, when the difference count value is transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the performance control unit 151, two sets of commands (a total of four bytes) are transmitted. Figure 95 (B) is an example of a transmitted command. As shown in Figure 95 (B), "0001 0101 1111 1000" is stored in the difference counter in RAM 161c of the main control unit 161.

The main control unit 161 stores type information meaning "bits 1 to 7 of the difference count value" in the first byte of the command in the first set, and transmits it. To indicate to the performance control unit 151 that the first byte of the first set represents type information, the first bit of the first byte of the first set is "1". Furthermore, the main control unit 161 stores information from bits 1 to 7 of the main control unit 161's difference count value, "000 0000", in the second byte of the command in the first set, and transmits it. To indicate to the performance control unit 151 that the second byte of the first set represents information content, the first bit of the second byte of the first set is "0".

The main control unit 161 also stores type information meaning "8 bits to 14 bits of the difference count value" in the first byte of the command in the second set and transmits it. Furthermore, the main control unit 161 stores information on the 8th to 14th bits of the difference count value of the main control unit 161, "11 1111 1", in the second byte of the command in the second set and transmits it. In this way, if the difference count value is a value that can be expressed using up to 14 bits, the main control unit 161 transmits two sets of commands (4 bytes) to the performance control unit 151. If the difference count value is a value that cannot be expressed without using 15 or 16 bits, the main control unit 161 transmits three sets of commands (6 bytes) to the performance control unit 151.

In this way, the main control unit 161 transmits the difference count value to the performance control unit 151 using multiple commands. As shown in FIG. 95(B), the area for storing the difference count value in multiple commands is divided evenly. In other words, the difference count value is divided into an area of 1 to 7 bits in the first byte and an area of 1 to 7 bits in the second byte. This makes it possible to transmit and receive data that exceeds 1 byte, even if the first bit is used for the type of information.

[Mode allocation in AT1 state]
As described above, in the slot machine 2 of this embodiment, in the advantageous zone, it can be controlled to a plurality of states including the AT1 state. When controlled to the AT1 state, the main control unit 161 draws the mode of the AT1 state. The AT1 state includes three modes, the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. Depending on which mode it is controlled to, the minimum number of games (guaranteed number of games) to be executed in the AT1 state differs, and the added advantageous degree also differs.

Figure 96 shows a lottery table for allocating the mode of the AT1 state. When the main control unit 161 is controlled to the AT1 state, it determines the mode of the AT1 state based on the lottery table shown in Figure 96. As shown in Figure 96, which mode is allocated is determined based on the number obtained by subtracting the number of uses from the number of granted. In other words, the main control unit 161 draws the mode of the AT1 state based on the difference count value.

As explained in Figures 83 to 86 and Figures 87 to 91, there are multiple possible patterns for storing the difference count value data, but in any pattern, the difference count value indicates the value obtained by subtracting the total number of uses from the total number of awards in the advantageous zone. The main control unit 161 performs a mode lottery according to the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses indicated by the difference count value.

As shown in FIG. 96, when the difference between the total number of awarded coins and the total number of used coins is +2000 or more, the probability of the first mode being selected is 90%, the probability of the second mode being selected is 10%, and the probability of the third mode being selected is 0%. Also, when the difference between the total number of awarded coins and the total number of used coins is less than +2000 coins and exceeds -2000 coins, the probability of the first mode being selected is 5%, the probability of the second mode being selected is 90%, and the probability of the third mode being selected is 5%. Finally, when the difference between the total number of awarded coins and the total number of used coins is -2000 coins or less, the probability of the first mode being selected is 33%, the probability of the second mode being selected is 34%, and the probability of the third mode being selected is 33%.

Figure 97 is a diagram showing the settings for each mode in the AT1 state. When the main control unit 161 is controlled to the first mode, it sets the added advantage level lower than in the second and third modes. The added roles are, for example, watermelon and cherry.

The degree of advantage of the addition is determined by the number of games to be added when an additional role is won, or the probability of executing the addition process. More specifically, the slot machine 2 is configured so that the number of games to be added when an additional role (e.g., watermelon and cherry) is won differs depending on whether it is controlled in the first mode, the second mode, or the third mode. For example, when watermelon is won in the first mode, an average of 5 games are added, when watermelon is won in the second mode, an average of 10 games are added, and when watermelon is won in the third mode, an average of 20 games are added. This allows the degree of advantage of the addition to differ depending on which mode it is controlled in.

The slot machine 2 may be configured so that the probability of executing an add-on process when an add-on role is won differs depending on whether the slot machine 2 is controlled to the first mode, the second mode, or the third mode. For example, when a watermelon is won in the first mode, 10 games are added with a 10% probability, when a watermelon is won in the second mode, 10 games are added with a 33% probability, and when a watermelon is won in the third mode, 10 games are played with an 85% probability. This allows the degree of add-on advantage to differ for each mode depending on whether the slot machine 2 is controlled to the first mode. The slot machine 2 may also differ in the degree of add-on advantage for each mode by varying both the number of add-on games and the probability of executing the add-on process.

When the main control unit 161 is in the AT1 state and controlled to the first mode, it executes at least 30 games or more while being controlled to the AT1 state. Also, when the main control unit 161 is in the AT1 state and controlled to the second mode, it executes at least 50 games or more while being controlled to the AT1 state. Also, when the main control unit 161 is controlled to the second mode, it sets the added advantage degree higher than the first mode and lower than the third mode. When the main control unit 161 is in the AT1 state and controlled to the third mode, it executes at least 300 games or more while being controlled to the AT1 state. Also, when the main control unit 161 is controlled to the third mode, it sets the added advantage degree higher than the first mode and the second mode.

When controlled to the third mode, the AT1 state is most likely to continue, and when controlled to the first mode, the AT1 state is least likely to continue. In addition, the main control unit 161 is more likely to be controlled to the first mode when the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses until the limiter control is executed is greater than +2000, that is, when the player's allowable number of acquisitions until the limiter control is executed is less than 400 coins. In addition, when the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses until the limiter control is executed is less than -2000, that is, when the player's allowable number of acquisitions until the limiter control is executed is greater than 4400 coins, the main control unit 161 is more likely to be controlled to the third mode. In the slot machine 2 in this embodiment, when the allowable number of coins that a player can acquire before the limiter control is small, the mode in which the AT1 state is more likely to continue is selected, and when the allowable number of coins that a player can acquire before the limiter control is large, the mode in which the AT1 state is less likely to continue is selected.

In other words, when the main control unit 161 is controlled to the AT1 state, if the difference between the total number of awarded medals and the total number of used medals indicated by the difference count value is greater than +2000, the main control unit 161 has a higher probability of continuing the AT1 state than when the difference between the total number of awarded medals and the total number of used medals indicated by the difference count value is less than +2000. This makes it easier for the player to continue the AT1 state when the maximum number of medals that can be awarded in the advantageous zone is large. Note that the main control unit 161 may control to continue the AT1 state more frequently when the difference between the total number of awarded medals and the total number of used medals indicated by the difference count value is greater than +2000, when the main control unit 161 is controlled to the AT1 state, if the difference between the total number of awarded medals and the total number of used medals indicated by the difference count value is greater than +2000, than when the difference between the total number of awarded medals and the total number of used medals indicated by the difference count value is less than +2000.

As explained in Su5 of FIG. 79, when the AT1 state is ended, the main control unit 161 can end the advantageous zone and control to the normal zone based on the result of the internal lottery, regardless of which value is stored in the difference count value. At this time, if the main control unit 161 determines that a specific role determined in advance in the internal lottery has been won and the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses is greater than, for example, +2000, the control to the advantageous zone is ended at the first rate. Also, if the main control unit 161 determines that a specific role determined in advance in the internal lottery has been won and the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses is less than +2000, the control to the advantageous zone is ended at the second rate. The first rate is higher than the second rate. In other words, when the allowable number of coins that the player can acquire before the limiter control is small, the main control unit 161 can increase the allowable number of coins that the player can acquire by ending the advantageous zone and initializing the difference count value. As a result, when the AT1 state ends, if the difference count value indicates that the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used is greater than +2000, the rate at which the advantageous zone ends is higher than when the difference count value indicates that the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used is less than +2000, making it easier to continue the AT1 state when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used is small, and improving interest in the game.

The main control unit 161 may make it easier to end the advantageous zone when the difference count value between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used falls below -10,000, for example. When the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used falls below -10,000, this means that the number of coins that the player can acquire has increased, which can significantly stimulate gambling, so by resetting the difference count value, it is possible to prevent the encouragement of gambling.

In the above example, when the AT1 state ends, the difference count value for determining the percentage at which the advantageous zone ends regardless of the difference count value is described as increasing the percentage at which the advantageous zone ends when the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used is greater than +2000 or less than -10000. In other words, +2000 and 10000 are used as thresholds for determining whether to end the advantageous zone when the AT1 state ends. This threshold may be the same value as the specific number. In other words, when the difference count value indicates that the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used is greater than +2400, the advantageous zone may end at a percentage of 100%, and when the difference count value indicates that the difference between the total number of coins awarded and the total number of coins used is +2400 or less, the advantageous zone may end at a percentage of 0%.

As shown in FIG. 97, the main control unit 161 selects the winning of the added role in the advantageous zone with a lower advantageous degree in the first mode than in the second and third modes, and with a higher advantageous degree in the third mode than in the first and second modes. The main control unit 161 determines which of the first to third modes to control to the AT1 state according to the difference count value. This allows the selection process of the added role in the AT1 state to be executed according to the difference count value.

The main control unit 161 also sets a guaranteed number of games for each mode when controlling to the AT1 state. The guaranteed number of games is the number of unit games that are at least executed while maintaining the AT1 state after being controlled to the AT1 state. The main control unit 161 also determines which of the first to third modes to control to the AT1 state in accordance with the difference count value. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation that corresponds to the difference count value.

In the examples of Figures 96 and 97 above, an example was described in which the guaranteed number of games is predetermined for each mode. However, instead of the guaranteed number of games in the AT1 state, a configuration may be adopted in which control is uniformly made to the third mode when controlling to the AT1 state, and the number of transition games for transitioning from the third mode to the first mode is set according to the difference count value, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation according to the difference count value. Below, an example of controlling the number of games in the AT1 state using the transition game number is described. In a configuration using the transition game number, the second mode is not used, and only the first and third modes are used.

In a configuration using the number of transition games, the main control unit 161 uniformly controls to the third mode when controlling to the AT1 state. Furthermore, when controlling to the AT1 state, the main control unit 161 determines the number of transition games from the third mode to the first mode according to the difference count value.

For example, if the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses indicated by the difference count value is +2000 or more, when 30 games have been played since the control was set to the third mode, the main control unit 161 transitions the state of the slot machine 2 from the third mode to the first mode. That is, the number of transition games is 30 games. If the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses indicated by the difference count value is less than +2000 and greater than -2000, when 50 games have been played since the control was set to the third mode, the main control unit 161 transitions the state of the slot machine 2 from the third mode to the first mode. That is, the number of transition games is 50 games. If the difference between the total number of awards and the total number of uses indicated by the difference count value is less than -2000, when 300 games have been played since the control was set to the third mode, the main control unit 161 transitions the state of the slot machine 2 from the third mode to the first mode. That is, the number of transition games is 300 games.

In a configuration using the number of transition games, the added advantage is set so that the continuation rate of the AT1 state is different between the first mode and the third mode. The continuation rate of the AT1 state is the probability that the AT1 state is maintained and controlled per a specific number of games. For example, in the third mode, the added advantage of the third mode is set so that the probability that the AT1 state will continue is, for example, 98% per game. Also, in the first mode, the added advantage of the first mode is set so that the probability that the AT1 state will continue is, for example, 10% per game.

This allows the duration of time spent in the third mode, which has a high continuation rate of the AT1 state, to vary depending on the value of the difference count value, thereby creating a sense of expectation in the player that corresponds to the difference count value. Also, since the AT1 state can be started in the third mode, which has the highest advantage in terms of added bonuses, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

[Special flags]
The main control unit 161 of this embodiment assigns a flag for each event to each bit constituting one byte of data stored in the RAM 161c, and when any of the conditions occurs, changes the bit corresponding to the established condition from "0" to "1." The main control unit 161 then determines whether the bit to which the flag is assigned is 1 or not, and when it determines that 1 is set, it determines that the corresponding condition is established. At this time, in order to determine whether the value of a specific bit is 1, it is necessary to perform an operation between the data in which the flag is stored and the determination data.

In addition to the flags mentioned above, the main control unit 161 can also set a special 1-byte flag when certain conditions are met.

The special flag consists of one byte of data, and the area in which the special flag is stored is 00H when a specific condition is not met, and when a specific condition is met, data is set in which multiple bits corresponding to that condition are set to 1.

For example, as shown in FIG. 98, when the first condition is met, the main control unit 161 sets a one-byte special flag 1 in the first area of the RAM 161c. The special flag 1 is data in which the first lowest bit and the fifth lowest bit are 1, and the other bits are 0.

When a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the main control unit 161 sets a one-byte special flag 2 in a second area of the RAM 161c. The special flag 2 is data in which the second lowest bit and the fifth lowest bit are 1 and the other bits are 0.

Then, the main control unit 161 reads data from the first area of the RAM 161c where special flag 1 is stored, determines whether the read data is 0 or not, and if it is determined that the data is not 0, determines that the first condition is met. The main control unit 161 also reads data from the second area of the RAM 161c where special flag 2 is stored, determines whether the read data is 0 or not, and if it is determined that the data is not 0, determines that the second condition is met.

In this embodiment, when a specific condition is met, a special flag consisting of 1 byte of data can be set, and data from the area in RAM 161c where the special flag is stored is read, and when it is determined that the read data is not 0, it is determined that the specific condition is met. Since there is no need to compare the value of a specific bit with judgment data as in normal flags, the judgment of the specific condition is simplified, and not only can the program capacity be reduced, but the judgment data is also unnecessary, so the data capacity can also be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific condition is met, a one-byte special flag is set in which multiple bits are set to 1, making it easier to check the flag setting status when debugging, etc., and facilitating data management.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific conditions include a first condition and a second condition, and when the first condition is met and when the second condition is met, different bits among the multiple bits become 1, making it easier to distinguish between the first special flag and the second special flag.

In this embodiment, the first special flag and the second special flag have completely different bits set to 1, but even if some of them overlap, it will be easier to distinguish between the first special flag and the second special flag if the rest of the flag is different.

In addition, although the above describes the special flags used by the main control unit 161, the medal count control unit 171 or the performance control unit 151 may also be configured to use the special flags.

[Commands sent to the production control unit]
Based on commands sent from the main control unit 161, the performance control unit 151 controls the performance in accordance with the control state of the main control unit 161.

The commands sent from the main control unit 161 to the performance control board 151 include a BET command, a settlement command, a game start command, a spin start command, a stop command, a game end command, an error command, a setting change command, and a setting confirmation command.

The BET command is a command sent each time the bet amount is set. The settlement command is a command that specifies the start and end of settlement. The game start command is a command that specifies that the game start operation has been performed, and further specifies the game information at the start of the game, instruction number, type of minor role, ball output status, next ball output status, zone status, advantageous zone notification flag, advantageous end flag, ART premonition games, points, winning number, number of medals inserted, and reel stop (reel stop position). The spin start command is a command sent when the reel starts spinning. The stop command is a command sent each time the reel stops, and specifies the reel stop operation position and reel stop position, as shown in FIG. 11. The game end command is a command that specifies that the third stop operation has been released, and further specifies the game information, instruction number, type of minor role, ball output status, next ball output status, section status, advantageous section notification flag, advantageous end flag, ART premonition games, points, winning number, number of medals inserted, and reel stop (reel stop position) at the time of game end, as shown in FIG. 12. The error command is a command that specifies the start of an error state, the type of error, and the end of an error state. The setting change command is a command that specifies the start and end of a setting change state. The setting confirmation command is a command that specifies the start and end of a setting confirmation state.

[About the push order navigation]
When a push order role is won, the main control unit 161 can perform navigation to display on the game assistance display 12 an instruction number that can identify the operation mode corresponding to the type of push order role that has been won, i.e., the operation mode that will stop the main role, and the player can make the main role win by performing the stopping operation in the operation mode that follows the navigation.

In addition, when performing navigation when the push order is selected, the main control unit 161 is configured to send a game start command that can identify the instruction number, and the performance control unit 151 can execute push order navigation that can identify the operation mode that will stop the main character according to the instruction number identified from the game start command.

When the game starts and a play start command is received, the play start command identifies a winning push order role, and the instruction number identifies the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the performance control unit 151 displays a navigation image suggesting the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R identified from the instruction number in the navigation area above the see-through window 3W in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), for example, when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification is a center left right stop order, a navigation image "1" suggesting the reel that should be stopped first is displayed in the largest first size in the position of the navigation area corresponding to the center reel for which the first stop operation is to be performed, a navigation image "2" suggesting the reel that should be stopped second is displayed in a second size smaller than the first size in the position of the left reel for which the second stop operation is to be performed, and a navigation image "3" suggesting the reel that should be stopped third is displayed in a third size smaller than the second size in the position of the right reel for which the third stop operation is to be performed. In this case, the navigation images are displayed in the order of "1", "navigation image "2", and "navigation image "3". In addition, the speaker 53, 54 outputs the sound "middle" to indicate the middle reel that should be stopped first, and among the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51, the central area corresponding to the middle reel that should be stopped first is lit in yellow, and the left area corresponding to the left reel and the right area corresponding to the right reel are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 99(b), after a navigation image suggesting the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in the navigation area, when a stop command is received and it is determined that the operation to stop the center reel suggested as the first stop operation has been performed, the navigation image "1" is erased and the image is switched to one in which the navigation image "2" is enlarged to the first size and the navigation image "3" is enlarged to the second size. In addition, the sound "left" indicating the left reel that should be stopped second is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the left side area of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 that corresponds to the center reel that should be stopped second is lit in yellow, and the central area corresponding to the center reel and the right side area corresponding to the right reel are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 99(c), when a stop command is further received and it is determined that the left reel stop operation suggested as the second stop operation has been performed, the navigation image "2" is erased and the image is switched to one in which the navigation image "3" is enlarged to the first size. In addition, the sound "Right" is output from the speakers 53 and 54 to indicate the right reel that should be stopped third, and among the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51, the right area corresponding to the right reel that should be stopped third is lit in yellow, and the left area corresponding to the left reel and the center area corresponding to the center reel are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 99(d), when a stop command is further received and it is determined that the right reel stop operation suggested as the third stop operation has been performed, the image is switched to one in which the navigation image "3" disappears. In addition, all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 are turned off, and then, as shown in FIG. 99(e), all navigation images are erased.

In addition, when a stop command is received and it is determined that a stop operation has been performed on a reel other than the suggested reel, as shown in FIG. 99(f), regardless of whether it is the first stop operation, the second stop operation, or the third stop operation, all navigation images are erased and all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 are turned off.

[About 7Navi]
When a 7-matched lip accompanied by the award of a special prize or a non-matched 7-matched lip without the award of a special prize is won, the main control unit 161 can perform navigation to display an instruction number that can specify the operation mode for stopping the 7-matched lip or the ready state of the black 7 symbol (a mode in which the black 7 symbols are lined up until the center reel and the right reel stop, and the 7-matched state is not reached when the left reel stops) on the game assistance display 12, and the player can stop the 7-matched lip or the ready state of the black 7 symbol by performing a stop operation in accordance with the operation mode indicated by the navigation. In particular, the stopping of the 7-matched lip indicates that a special prize has been awarded.

In addition, when navigating when a 7-matching lip or a non-matching 7-matching lip is won, the main control unit 161 is configured to send a game start command that can specify an instruction number, and the performance control unit 151 can execute 7 navigation that can specify an operation mode that stops the ready state of the 7-matching lip or the black 7 pattern according to the instruction number specified from the game start command.

When the game starts and a play start command is received, and the play start command identifies a winning combination of 7-match or 7-mismatch, and the instruction number identifies the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the performance control unit 151 displays a navigation image suggesting the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R identified from the instruction number in the navigation area above the see-through window 3W in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51.

As shown in FIG. 100(a), the navigation image "7" is displayed in the navigation area at a position corresponding to the right reel where the first stop operation should be performed, and the navigation image "left arrow" is displayed at a position corresponding to the center reel where the second stop operation should be performed, and at a position corresponding to the right reel where the third stop operation should be performed, suggesting that the stop operation should be performed aiming for the black 7 symbol in the order of right, center, and left. At this time, the sound "Aim" is output from the speakers 53 and 54, suggesting that the stop operation should be performed aiming for the black 7 symbol, and the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 are lit in red in a way that flows from the right side to the center and then to the left side in the right area corresponding to the right reel that should be stopped first, the center area corresponding to the center reel that should be stopped second, and the left area corresponding to the left reel that should be stopped third.

As shown in FIG. 100(b), after a navigation image suggesting the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in the navigation area, a stop command is received, the right reel stop operation suggested as the first stop operation is performed, and when it is determined that the black 7 symbol has stopped on the right reel, the navigation image "7" corresponding to the right reel is erased and the image is switched to one in which the navigation image "left arrow" corresponding to the center reel changes to the navigation image "7". In addition, of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51, the right area corresponding to the right reel is turned off, and the central area corresponding to the center reel that should be stopped second and the left area corresponding to the left reel that should be stopped third are lit in red, flowing from the center to the left.

As shown in FIG. 100(c), when a stop command is further received, the stop operation of the center reel suggested as the second stop operation is performed, and it is specified that the black 7 symbol has stopped on the center reel and the black 7 symbols have been completed on the right reel and center reel, the navigation image "7" corresponding to the center reel is erased, and the image is switched to one in which the navigation image "left arrow" corresponding to the left reel changes to the navigation image "7". In addition, of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51, the right area corresponding to the right reel and the center area corresponding to the center reel are turned off, and the lighting state of the left area corresponding to the left reel that should be stopped third is turned on in red, flowing from top to bottom.

As shown in FIG. 100(d), when a stop command is further received, the left reel stop operation suggested as the third stop operation is performed, and the black 7 symbol stops on the left reel and the right, center, and left reels are identified as aligned, the image is switched to one in which the navigation image "7" disappears. In addition, all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 are turned off, and then, as shown in FIG. 100(e), all navigation images are erased.

In addition, when a stop command is received and it is determined that a stop operation has been performed on a reel other than the suggested reel, as shown in FIG. 100(f), or when it is determined that the suggested reel has been stopped but that the 7 symbol will not stop, all navigation images are erased regardless of whether it is the first stop operation, the second stop operation, or the third stop operation, and all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 are turned off.

[About Navigation!]
The performance control unit 151 can execute a navigation that suggests a win of a weak cherry, a strong cherry, a chance eye A, a chance eye B, or a watermelon when a win of any of the weak cherry, strong cherry, chance eye A, chance eye B, or watermelon is specified from a game start command.

! The navigation includes a first mode navigation image "! Light red" (Fig. 101(a)) is displayed! A light red navigation and a second mode navigation image "! Big red" (Fig. 101(f)) are displayed! A big red navigation and a third mode navigation image "! Light purple" (Fig. 101(g)) are displayed! A light purple navigation and a fourth mode navigation image "! Big purple" (Fig. 101(h)) are displayed! A big purple navigation and a fifth mode navigation image "! Green" (not shown) are displayed! A green navigation.

The navigation image of the first aspect is a navigation image of a predetermined size with an "!" image placed on a red polygonal pedestal image as shown in FIG. 101(a). The navigation image of the second aspect is a navigation image of a larger size than the predetermined size with an "!" image placed on a red polygonal pedestal image as shown in FIG. 101(f). The navigation image of the third aspect is a navigation image of a predetermined size with an "!" image placed on a purple star-shaped pedestal image as shown in FIG. 101(g). The navigation image of the fourth aspect is a navigation image of a larger size than the predetermined size with an "!" image placed on a purple star-shaped pedestal image as shown in FIG. 101(h). The navigation image of the fifth aspect is a navigation image with an "!" image placed on a green circular pedestal image (not shown). The different aspects of the navigation images make it possible to distinguish between the different navigation images.

The ! Small Red Navigation and ! Big Red Navigation are ! Navigations that can be executed when a weak or strong cherry is won, and the execution of the ! Small Red Navigation or ! Big Red Navigation indicates that a weak or strong cherry will be won.

In addition, when a strong cherry is won, it is more advantageous for the player in terms of the awarding of bonuses than when a weak cherry is won, and when comparing the percentage x of strong cherries won when the ! Small Red Navi appears with the percentage X of strong cherries won when the ! Big Red Navi appears, the ! Small Red Navi and ! Big Red Navi are executed so that x < X, suggesting that when the ! Big Red Navi is executed, there is a higher chance of the player winning a strong cherry, which is more advantageous for the player in terms of the awarding of bonuses, than when a weak cherry is won, than when the ! Small Red Navi is executed.

!Ko-Murasaki Navi and !Big-Murasaki Navi are !navigations that can be executed when Chance Eye A or Chance Eye B is won, and the execution of !Ko-Murasaki Navi or !Big-Murasaki Navi indicates that Chance Eye A or Chance Eye B will be won.

In addition, when Chance Eye B is won, it is more advantageous for the player in terms of the awarding of bonuses than when Chance Eye A is won, and when comparing the percentage y of Chance Eye B being won when ! Little Purple Navi appears with the percentage Y of Chance Eye B being won when ! Big Purple Navi appears, ! Little Purple Navi and ! Big Purple Navi are executed so that y < Y, suggesting that when ! Big Purple Navi is executed, there is a higher probability of the player winning Chance Eye B, which is more advantageous for the player in terms of the awarding of bonuses than when Chance Eye A is won, than when ! Little Purple Navi is executed.

In addition, the ! Green Navi is a ! Navi that can be executed when a watermelon is won, and the execution of the ! Green Navi indicates that a watermelon has been won.

When the game starts and a game start command is received, and the game start command specifies that a weak cherry, strong cherry, chance eye A, chance eye B, or watermelon will be won, and the execution of a navigation is decided, the performance control unit 151 displays a navigation image suggesting a weak cherry, strong cherry, chance eye A, chance eye B, or watermelon will be won in the navigation area above the see-through window 3W of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), for example, when a weak or strong cherry is determined to be a winning combination, and the "! Small Red Navi" is selected, a first type of navigation image suggesting a weak or strong cherry has been won is displayed at the positions corresponding to the left, middle, and right reels. Also, a cherry A sound is output from speakers 53 and 54, suggesting a weak or strong cherry has been won, and all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 are lit up in red.

As shown in FIG. 101(b), after a navigation image of a first aspect suggesting a weak or strong cherry win is displayed in the navigation area, when a stop command is received and it is determined that a first stop operation has been performed, the image is switched to one in which the navigation image corresponding to the reel that is stopped by the first stop operation disappears. In addition, all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 remain lit in red.

As shown in FIG. 101(c), when a stop command is further received and it is determined that a second stop operation has been performed, the image is switched to one in which the navigation image corresponding to the reel that is stopped by the second stop operation disappears. In addition, all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 remain lit in red.

As shown in FIG. 101(d), when a stop command is further received and it is determined that a third stop operation has been performed, the image is switched to one in which the navigation image corresponding to the reel that is stopped by the third stop operation disappears. In addition, all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 remain lit in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 101(e), all navigation images are erased.

As shown in FIG. 101(f), when a weak or strong cherry is determined to have been won, and the Big Red Navi is selected, a navigation image of the second type, suggesting that a weak or strong cherry has been won, is displayed at the positions corresponding to the left, middle, and right reels. In addition, a cherry B sound, suggesting that a weak or strong cherry has been won, is output from speakers 53 and 54, and all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 are lit up in red. After that, each time a stop command is received and it is determined that a stop operation has been performed, the video is switched to one that erases the corresponding navigation image.

As shown in FIG. 101(g), when a win of Chance Eye A or Chance Eye B is identified and the "! Small Purple Navi" is selected, a navigation image of the third mode suggesting a win of Chance Eye A or Chance Eye B is displayed at the positions corresponding to the left reel, center reel, and right reel. Also, a Chance A sound suggesting a win of Chance Eye A or Chance Eye B is output from speakers 53, 54, and all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 are lit up in purple. After that, each time a stop command is received and it is identified that a stop operation has been performed, the video is switched to one that erases the corresponding navigation image.

As shown in FIG. 101(h), when a win of chance eye A or chance eye B is identified and the big purple navigation is selected, a navigation image of the fourth type suggesting a win of chance eye A or chance eye B is displayed at the positions corresponding to the left reel, center reel, and right reel. In addition, a chance B sound suggesting a win of chance eye A or chance eye B is output from speakers 53 and 54, and all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 are lit up in purple. After that, each time a stop command is received and it is identified that a stop operation has been performed, the video is switched to one that erases the corresponding navigation image.

Although not specifically shown, when it is determined that a watermelon has been won and the green navigation is selected, a navigation image of the fifth mode, suggesting that a watermelon has been won, is displayed at the positions corresponding to the left reel, center reel, and right reel. In addition, a watermelon sound indicating that a watermelon has been won is output from speakers 53 and 54, and all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 are lit up in green. After that, each time a stop command is received and it is determined that a stop operation has been performed, the video is switched to one that erases the corresponding navigation image.

[Error notification]
The performance control unit 151 executes an error notification when it receives an error command indicating the start of an error state from the main control unit 161.

When the performance control unit 151 receives an error command indicating the start of an error state in which game progress is disabled, it causes the LCD display 51 to display an error image indicating an error state, as shown in FIG. 102(a). The error image is an image that displays an error code indicating the type of error specified from the error command and the contents of the error. It also causes the speakers 53 and 54 to output an error notification sound, and causes all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 to flash red. Thereafter, when an error command indicating the end of the error state is received, it causes the display on the LCD display 51, the output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the lighting state of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 to return to the state before the error notification was executed.

[About setting change notification]
The performance control unit 151 executes a setting change notification when it receives a setting change command indicating the start of a setting change state from the main control unit 161.

When the performance control unit 151 receives a setting change command indicating the start of a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed and game progress is disabled, it causes the LCD display 51 to display a setting change image indicating that the setting is being changed, as shown in FIG. 102(b). It also causes the speakers 53 and 54 to output an error notification sound, and causes all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 to flash red. Thereafter, when it receives a setting change command indicating the end of the setting change state, it controls the display on the LCD display 51, the output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the lighting state of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the LCD display 51 to the initial state after the setting change.

[About setting confirmation notification]
The performance control unit 151 executes a setting confirmation notification when it receives a setting confirmation command indicating the start of a setting confirmation state from the main control unit 161.

When the performance control unit 151 receives a setting confirmation command indicating the start of a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed and game progress is disabled, it causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display a setting confirmation image indicating that the setting is being confirmed, as shown in FIG. 102(c). The setting confirmation image is an image that indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and also displays management information such as the door opening history. It also causes the speakers 53 and 54 to output an error notification sound, and causes all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 to flash red. Thereafter, when it receives a setting confirmation command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state, it returns the display on the liquid crystal display 51, the output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the lighting state of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 to the state before the setting confirmation notification was executed.

[Startup notification]
The performance control unit 151 executes a startup notification at the time of startup following power-on.

When the power is turned on and the device is started up, the performance control unit 151 displays a maintenance image showing maintenance information such as the data loading status and the results of a ROM check, as shown in FIG. 102(d). In addition, there is no output from the speakers 53 and 54, and all areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 arranged around the liquid crystal display 51 are lit in white.

[About the configuration of the performance control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the performance control board 15 is equipped with a performance control unit 151, a display control circuit (VDP) 152 which controls the display of the LCD display 51, a shared memory 153 to which data can be written and read from both the performance control unit 151 and the display control circuit (VDP) 152, an LED drive circuit 156 which drives the performance effect LEDs 52 and the reel LEDs 55, and a sound control unit 157 which controls the sound output from the speakers 53, 54, and these performance control unit 151, display control circuit (VDP) 152, shared memory 153, LED drive circuit 156, and sound control unit 157 are connected via a data bus so that data can be sent and received.

The performance control board 15 is also equipped with a CGROM 154 in which image data and video data are stored, and a VRAM 155 in which the display control circuit (VDP) expands the image data and video data read from the CGROM 154, and is connected to the display control circuit (VDP) 152 so as to be able to send and receive data. The performance control board 15 is also equipped with an audio ROM 158 in which audio data is stored, and is connected to the sound control unit 157 so as to be able to send and receive data.

[About the main processing of performance control]
Next, the main operations of the performance control unit 151 will be described. When the performance control unit 151 receives a supply of power voltage, the CPU 151a starts up and executes the main performance control process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 104. When the main performance control process shown in Fig. 104 starts, the performance control unit 151 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S101), setting various initial values, setting registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit), etc.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (S102). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 3 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process of S102 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in S102, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (S103), and the performance control process is executed (S104). In the performance control process, display control, lamp control, sound output control settings, etc. are performed in response to commands received from the main control unit 161.

After the performance control process of S104, a display control process (S105) for controlling the display, a lamp control process (S106) for controlling the lamp, and a sound control process (S107) for controlling the sound are performed based on the contents set in the performance control process. Then, a performance random number update process (S108) is executed, and the performance random number is updated by the software. Then, by returning to the process of S102, the processes of S103 to S108 are repeatedly executed each time the timer interrupt flag is turned on in S102.

[Regarding production control processing]
FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the performance control processing executed in the performance control main processing.

In the performance control process, it is determined whether or not a command sent from the main control unit 161 has been received (S151). Whether or not a command has been received is determined by checking whether or not a command has been stored in the command receiving register.

If no command is received in S151, the process returns to the main performance control process. If a command is received in S151, the first command received from the commands stored in the command receiving register is obtained, and data identified from the obtained command is stored in RAM 151c (S152). In addition, when a command is obtained from the command receiving register, the obtained command is cleared.

Next, it is determined whether the received command is a game start command (S153), and if so, it is further determined whether all game start commands have been received (S154).

If there are any unreceived start-of-game commands remaining in S154, the process returns to the main presentation control process. If all start-of-game commands have been received, the process performs start-of-game fail-safe processing (S155), presentation decision processing 1 (S156), and presentation setting processing (S157), and then returns to the main presentation control process.

The start fail-safe process of S155 executes a process to command the erasure of unnecessary images when the game starts. The presentation decision process 1 of S156 executes a process to determine the presentation pattern of the game according to the setting situation at the start of the game (winning flag, etc.), and to set a process table that defines the presentation content for each timing during one game according to the presentation pattern. The presentation setting process of S157 executes a process to set the display command, lamp command, and voice command that are set in the process table in response to the received command. The display command specifies the content of the display control, the lamp command specifies the LED light emission pattern, and the voice command specifies the content of the sound output control.

If the command received in S153 is not a start-of-game command, it is determined whether it is an end-of-game command (S158), and if it is an end-of-game command, it is further determined whether all end-of-game commands have been received (S159).

If there are any unreceived end-of-game commands remaining in S159, the process returns to the main presentation control process. If all end-of-game commands have been received, the process performs end-of-game fail-safe processing (S160), presentation decision processing 2 (S161), and presentation setting processing (S157), and then returns to the main presentation control process.

The end fail-safe process in S160 commands the deletion of unnecessary images when the game ends. The presentation decision process 2 in S161 sets the process table for the next game according to the setting situation at the end of the game (the game status of the next game, etc.).

If the received command is not a game end command in S158, it is determined whether or not it is a disable command indicating the start of a disabled state (S162). Disable commands indicating the start of a disabled state include an error command indicating the start of an error state, a setting change command indicating the start of a setting change state, and a setting check command indicating the start of a setting check state.

In S162, if the received command is a disabling command indicating the start of a disabled state, a disabling flag is set in RAM 151c (S163). Here, if the disabled state is an error state, an error flag capable of identifying the type of error state is set, if the disabled state is a setting change state, a setting change in progress flag indicating the setting change state is set, and if the disabled state is a setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation in progress flag is set.

Next, the disable start setting is performed (S164), and the process returns to the main performance control processing. In the disable start setting, a process is performed to set a display command, a lamp command, and a voice command corresponding to the disabled state. For example, if the disabled state is an error state, a display command that specifies the display of an error image, a lamp command that specifies the light emission pattern corresponding to the error notification, and a voice command that specifies the output of an error notification sound are set.

If the received command is not a command indicating the start of a disabled state in S162, it is determined whether or not it is a disable command indicating the end of a disabled state (S165). A disable command indicating the end of a disabled state is an error command indicating the end of an error state, a setting change command indicating the end of a setting change state, or a setting confirmation command indicating the end of a setting confirmation state.

In S165, if the received command is a disable command indicating the end of the disabled state, the disable flag set in RAM 151c is cleared (S166), the disable end setting is performed (S167), and the process returns to the main performance control process. In the disable end setting, a process is performed to set a display command, a lamp command, and a voice command corresponding to the end of the disabled state. The display command corresponding to the end of the disabled state is a display command that specifies the erasure of an error image, an image during setting change, and an image during setting confirmation, and more specifically, a display command that specifies the clearing of video data specified in layer 20 described below in which the error image, the image during setting change, and the image during setting confirmation are displayed. In addition, the lamp command corresponding to the end of the disabled state is a lamp command that specifies the stop of a light emission pattern corresponding to an error notification, and more specifically, a lamp command that specifies the clearing of lamp data specified in lamp layer 1 described below in which the lamp data of the light emission pattern corresponding to an error notification is set. Additionally, the voice command corresponding to the end of the disabled state is a voice command that specifies the halt of output of the error notification sound, and more specifically, is a voice command that specifies the clearing of the audio data specified in track 1, which is described below and in which the audio data for the error notification sound is set.

If the command received in S165 is not a disable command indicating the end of the disabled state, the performance setting process is performed (S157) and then the main performance control process is resumed.

[Regarding the rendering decision process 1]
FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the performance determination process 1 executed in the performance control process.

In the presentation decision process 1, a presentation pattern lottery is performed to determine the presentation pattern of the game according to the setting contents of the game start command sent from the main control unit 161 (S201). In the presentation pattern lottery, if a winning flag indicating a push order role is received and a push order command specifying the correct procedure for the push order role is received, it is determined that push order navigation will be performed. Also, if a winning flag indicating a 7-matching lip or a 7-missing lip is received and a push order command specifying an operation mode for stopping the tenpai mode of the 7-matching lip or the black 7 pattern is received, it is determined that 7 navigation will be performed. Also, if a winning flag indicating a weak cherry or a strong cherry is received, it may be determined that ! Small red navigation or ! Big red navigation will be performed. Also, if a winning flag indicating a chance eye A or a chance eye B is received, it may be determined that ! Small purple navigation or ! Big purple navigation will be performed. Also, if a winning flag indicating a watermelon is received, it may be determined that ! Green navigation will be performed. Push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! Small red navigation, ! Big red navigation, ! If it is decided to perform light purple navigation, big purple navigation, or green navigation, a navigation flag that can specify the type is set in RAM 151c.

Next, a presentation process table corresponding to the presentation pattern determined by the presentation pattern lottery is set (S202). The presentation process table is a table in which display commands, lamp commands, and voice commands corresponding to the presentation pattern are set in accordance with the timing according to the progress of the game, and as shown in FIG. 107(a), display commands, lamp commands, and voice commands specifying the control content according to the corresponding presentation pattern are set in accordance with the game start, spin start, first stop, second stop, third stop, third stop release, and next game BET.

Next, an additional effect lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute an additional effect such as a cut-in for the effect pattern determined in the effect pattern lottery (S203), and an additional effect process table is set for executing the additional effect determined in the additional effect lottery (S204). The additional effect process table is a table in which display commands, lamp commands, and audio commands corresponding to the additional effects are set in accordance with the timing at which the additional effects are executed among the timings according to the progress of the game.

Next, the navigation flag is checked to determine whether or not 7-navigation has been determined (S205). If 7-navigation has been determined in S205, the navigation flag is checked to determine whether or not push order navigation has been determined (S206). If push order navigation has not been determined in S206, the winning flag specified from the game start command is checked to determine whether or not a predetermined role (weak cherry, strong cherry, chance eye A, chance eye B, watermelon) has been won (S207). Then, if it is determined that 7-navigation has been determined in S205, it is determined that push order navigation has not been determined in S206, and it is determined that a predetermined role has not been won in S207, a navigation process table corresponding to 7-navigation is set (S208). The navigation process table is a table in which display commands, lamp commands, and voice commands according to the type of navigation are set in response to the timing according to the progress of the game, and navigation is executed by setting the navigation process table. As shown in FIG. 107(b), the navigation process table has display commands, lamp commands, and voice commands set for the game start, spin start, first stop, second stop, and third stop, which specify the control content according to the type of navigation. In addition, for the first stop, second stop, and third stop, display commands, lamp commands, and voice commands are set that specify the control content according to the type of navigation not only for the timing but also for each stopped reel and the order in which they stop.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S206 that push order navigation has been determined, i.e., both 7-navigation and push order navigation have been determined, the navigation process table is not set and the process proceeds to S209, in which case neither navigation is executed. Also, if it is determined in S206 that a predetermined role has been won, i.e., 7-navigation has been determined and the predetermined role has been won, the navigation process table is not set and the process proceeds to S209, in which case neither navigation is executed.

If the 7-navigation has not been determined in S205, it is determined whether or not other navigations (push order navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, green navigation) have been determined (S210), and if other navigations have been determined, a navigation process table corresponding to the determined navigation is set (S208). If other navigations have not been determined in S210, the process proceeds to S209.

In S209, the stop time process table is set, and then the process returns to the performance control process. The stop time process table is a table that defines the performance content to be executed at the third stop release, and as shown in FIG. 107(c), display commands, lamp commands, and voice commands are set to specify the respective control contents in cases where the conditions are met at the third stop release (for example, when a win occurs, or when a specific stop mode is achieved) and cases where the conditions are not met.

[About production setting processing]
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the performance setting process executed in the performance control process.

In the effect setting process, a display command, a lamp command, and a voice command corresponding to the timing of the game progress status specified by the command that triggered the execution of the effect setting process are obtained from the effect process table, the additional process table, the navigation process table, and the stop time process table, and a process is performed to set them in the command area of RAM 151c (S251, S252, S253). At this time, if a display command, a lamp command, and a voice command are obtained from multiple process tables among the effect process table, the additional process table, the navigation process table, and the stop time process table, each of the display commands, lamp commands, and voice commands is set in the command area of RAM 151c, and multiple control contents are specified. For example, if a display command is set in multiple process tables at a specific timing, each display command is set in the designated area of RAM 151c.

[Display control processing]
Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the display control processing executed in the performance control main processing.

In the display control process, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed display command is set in the designated area of RAM 151C (S301), and if an unprocessed display command is set, the video table stored in ROM 151b is referenced, and the video data corresponding to the set display command is added to the video list (S302).

As shown in FIG. 110(a), the video table stores the address (CGROM address) of CGROM 154 where the video data is stored, the display position, layer, transparency, and brightness corresponding to the display command. In S302, the CGROM address, display position, layer, transparency, and brightness corresponding to the display command set in the designated area of RAM 151C are obtained and added to the video list shown in FIG. 110(b).

As shown in FIG. 111, for video data set in the video table, a prescribed layer is set according to the image type of the video data. The layer indicates the priority when displaying the video data; the smaller the layer number, the closer the video data is displayed, and when images constituting the video data overlap, the image of the video data with the smaller layer number is displayed preferentially. A layer of 0 to 255 can be set for the display control circuit (VDP) 152. Also, the size of the video data is all data of one size that matches the display area, and the display position is set to the same coordinate (0.0) for all, but when using video data of different sizes, it is sufficient to set coordinates that specify the position at which the video data is to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 111, the following layers are set: 10 as a layer of video data for displaying maintenance images, 20 as a layer of video data for displaying error images, images in progress of changing settings, and images in progress of checking settings, 50 as a layer of video data for displaying navigation images constituting push order navigation, 7 navigation, and ! navigation, 70 as a layer of video data for additional effects such as cut-ins, 80 as a layer of video data for upper layer effects, 100 as a layer of video data for constituting UI (user interface) values such as bet numbers, 110 as a layer of video data for UI decorative images, 130 as a layer of video data for lower layer effects, and 150 as a layer of video data for background effects.

After S302, the processed display commands are cleared from the specified area (S303), and the process returns to S301, repeating the processes of S301 to S303 until video data corresponding to unprocessed display commands is added to the video list.

If there are no unprocessed display commands remaining in S301, as shown in FIG. 110(b), "END" is added to the end of the video list, the video list is written to the shared memory 153 (S304), and then a command to read the video list is sent to the display control circuit (VDP) 152 (S305), and the process returns to the main performance control process.

[Display processing]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the display process executed by the display control circuit (VDP) 152.

The display process is executed when a read command is sent from the performance control unit 151. First, it is determined whether or not unprocessed video data remains in the video list written in the shared memory 153 (S351). If unprocessed video data remains, the video data specified by the video list is read and set in the playback list (S352).

After S352, the processed video data is cleared from the video list (S353), and the process returns to S351. The process repeats S351 to S353 until unprocessed video data is set in the playback list. If there is no unprocessed video data remaining in S351, a completion setting is made (S354), and the display process ends.

As shown in FIG. 113, the playlist is an area in which the CGROM address, display position, transparency, and brightness of video data are set for layers 0 to 255. One CGROM address, display position, transparency, and brightness can be set for one layer. If video data specifying the same layer is included in the video list, the video data that is read later is overwritten on the playlist, and the video data that is read later is set as the video data for that layer.

When the completion setting is performed, the display control circuit (VDP) 152 starts the process of reading out the video data stored in the CGROM address set in the playlist, playing the video data based on the settings set in the playlist, and displaying it on the LCD display 51. At this time, videos based on the video data are displayed overlapping each other according to the priority based on the layer of the playlist, and videos based on video data set in an area with a lower layer number are displayed in the foreground.

For example, as shown in Figures 114(a) to (e), if video data for push order navigation is set to layer 50 of the playlist, video data for UI numerical values is set to layer 100, video data for UI images is set to layer 110, video data for lower layer effects is set to layer 130, and video data for background effects is set to layer 150, a video based on the video data for lower layer effects is displayed in front of the video based on the video data for background effects, a video based on the video data for UI images is displayed in front of the video based on the video data for lower layer effects, a video based on the video data for UI images is displayed in front of the video based on the video data for UI numerical values, and a video based on the video data for push order navigation is displayed in front of the video based on the video data for UI numerical values. By overlapping these videos, a video such as that shown in Figure 114(f) is displayed.

[Lamp control process]
Figure 115 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the lamp control processing executed in the performance control main processing.

In the lamp control process, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed lamp command is set in a specified area of RAM 151C (S401), and if an unprocessed lamp command is set, the lamp data table stored in ROM 151b is referenced, and the lamp data corresponding to the set lamp command is set in the lamp layer assigned to RAM 151C (S402).

As shown in FIG. 116(a), the lamp data table has the address (lamp data address) in ROM 151b where the lamp data is stored and the lamp layer set in response to the lamp command, and in S402, the lamp data address corresponding to the lamp command set in the designated area of RAM 151C is obtained and set to the corresponding lamp layer.

As shown in FIG. 117, a lamp data address setting area is assigned to each of lamp layers 1 to 4, with the lamp layer having a lower numerical value being set with a higher priority. As a result, when lamp data is set in multiple lamp layers, the lighting of the LEDs is controlled based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data with the highest priority.

As shown in FIG. 116(b), for lamp data set in the lamp data table, a prescribed lamp layer is set according to the type of light emission of the lamp data. Lamp layer 1 is set for lamp data that defines the light emission pattern for error notifications, lamp layer 2 is set for lamp data that defines the light emission patterns for push order navigation, 7 navigation, and ! navigation, lamp layer 3 is set for lamp data that defines the light emission pattern corresponding to the performance, and lamp layer 4 is set for lamp data that defines the light emission pattern corresponding to the background.

After S402, the processed lamp commands are cleared from the specified area (S403), and the process returns to S401, repeating steps S401 to S403 until lamp data corresponding to the unprocessed lamp commands is set.

In addition, only one lamp data can be set for each of lamp layers 1 to 4, and when lamp commands that specify the same lamp layer are set, the lamp data specified by the lamp command that is read later is overwritten, and the lamp data that is read later is set as the lamp data for that lamp layer.

If there are no unprocessed lamp commands remaining in S401, LED signal output processing is performed to set the output signal to be output to the LED drive circuit 156 (S405), and the process returns to the main performance control processing.

In the LED signal output process, as shown in FIG. 118, when multiple lamp data are set in lamp layers 1 to 4, the output signal output to the LED drive circuit 156 is set based on the lamp data set in the lamp layer with the highest priority among the set lamp data. For example, when lamp data is set only in lamp layer 4 among lamp layers 1 to 4, the light emission pattern is controlled based on the lamp data set in lamp layer 4, and in this state, when lamp data is set in lamp layer 2, the light emission pattern is controlled based on the lamp data set in lamp layer 2, and when the lamp data set in lamp layer 2 is subsequently cleared, the light emission pattern is again controlled based on the lamp data set in lamp layer 4.

In addition, the lamp data can specify all groups or only some of the groups for multiple groups of LEDs. When lamp data specifying all groups is set to a lamp layer with a higher priority, control based on the lamp data set to the lamp layer with a higher priority is applied to the LEDs of all groups. On the other hand, when lamp data specifying only some groups is set to a lamp layer with a higher priority, control based on the lamp data set to the lamp layer with a higher priority is applied to the LEDs of the specified group, and control based on the lamp data set to the lamp layer with the next highest priority is applied to the LEDs of the remaining groups. Thus, depending on the group of LEDs, the light emission pattern may be controlled based on the lamp data set to different lamp layers.

[Sound control processing]
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the sound control processing executed in the performance control main processing.

In the sound control process, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed voice command has been set in the designated area of RAM 151C (S451), and if an unprocessed voice command has been set, the sound designation command table stored in ROM 151b is referenced, and the sound designation command corresponding to the set voice command is added to the command list (S452).

As shown in FIG. 120(a), the sound designation command table stores the address (audio ROM address) of the audio ROM 158 where the audio data is stored, the track, and the volume corresponding to the audio command. In S452, the audio ROM address, track, and volume corresponding to the audio command set in the designated area of RAM 151C are obtained and added to the command list shown in FIG. 120(b).

As shown in FIG. 121, for a sound designation command set in the sound designation command table, a prescribed track is set according to the sound type of the sound data specified by the sound designation command. A track is an area for setting sound data, and by setting sound data in multiple tracks, sounds based on the respective sound data are synthesized and output. Tracks 0 to 15 can be set for the sound control unit 157.

As shown in FIG. 121, track 1 is set as the sound data track for the error notification sound, track 2 is set as the sound data track for the push order navigation, 7 navigation, and ! navigation, tracks 3 to 10 are set as the sound data tracks for the effects, tracks 11 to 13 are set as the sound data tracks for the game notification sound, and tracks 14 to 15 are set as the sound data tracks for the background music.

After S452, the processed voice command is cleared from the designated area (S453), and the process returns to S451, repeating the processes of S451 to S453 until a sound designation command corresponding to an unprocessed voice command is added to the command list.

If there are no unprocessed voice commands remaining in S451, as shown in FIG. 120(b), "END" is added to the end of the command list, the sound designation commands set in the command list are sent to the sound control unit 157 (S454), and the process returns to the main performance control process.

[Sound settings processing]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the control content of the sound setting process executed by the sound control unit 157.

The sound setting process is executed when a sound designation command is sent from the performance control unit 151. First, it is determined whether or not there are any unprocessed sound designation commands remaining (S501). If there are any unprocessed sound designation commands remaining, the sound designation commands are read, the specified audio data is read, and set in the playback list (S502).

After S502, the sound designation data that has been processed is cleared (S503), and the process returns to S501. The process repeats S501 to S503 until the sound data specified by the unprocessed sound designation command is set in the playback list. If there are no unprocessed sound designation commands remaining in S501, a completion setting is performed (S504), and the sound setting process ends.

As shown in FIG. 123, the playlist is an area in which the audio ROM address and volume are set for tracks 1 to 16, and one audio ROM address and volume can be set for one track. If a sound designation command specifying the same track is included, the audio data specified by the sound designation command read last is overwritten on the playlist, and the audio data specified by the sound designation command read last is set as the audio data for that track.

When the completion setting is performed, as shown in FIG. 123, the sound control unit 157 reads out the audio data stored in the audio ROM address set in the play list, plays the audio data based on the volume set in the play list, and outputs the audio based on the audio data from the speakers 53 and 54. At this time, if audio data is set on multiple tracks, the audio based on this audio data is synthesized and output from the speakers 53 and 54.

[Fail-safe processing at start-up]
Figure 124 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the start-up fail-safe processing executed in the performance control processing.

In the start fail-safe process, the navigation image is set to be erased (S551) and the maintenance image is set to be erased (S552). In S551, a display command that specifies the erasure of the navigation image, i.e., a display command that specifies the clearing of the video data specified in layer 50 in which the navigation image is displayed, is set in a designated area of RAM 151c, and in S552, a display command that specifies the erasure of the maintenance image, i.e., a display command that specifies the clearing of the video data specified in layer 10 in which the maintenance image is displayed, is set in a designated area of RAM 151c.

Next, it is determined whether the disable flag (error flag, setting change flag, setting confirmation flag) is set (S553), and if the disable flag is set, the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if the disable flag is not set in S553, the process sets the disable image (error image, setting change image, setting confirmation image) to be erased (S554), and returns to the main performance control process. In S554, a display command that specifies the erasure of the disabled image, that is, a display command that specifies the clearing of the video data specified in the layer 20 in which the error image, setting change image, and setting confirmation image are displayed, is set in a specified area of RAM 151c. The display command set in S554 is the same command as the display command set in S167 when a disable command indicating the end of the disabled state is received in the performance control process, and the disable image (error image, setting change image, setting confirmation image) is erased by the same control as when a disable command indicating the end of the disabled state is received.

[Fail-safe processing at termination]
Figure 125 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the start-up fail-safe processing executed in the performance control processing.

In the fail-safe process at the time of termination, the navigation image is set to be erased (S601) and the process returns to the main performance control process. In S601, a display command that specifies the erasure of the navigation image, i.e., a display command that specifies the clearing of the video data specified in layer 50 where the navigation image is displayed, is set in a specified area of RAM 151c.

[About controlling the push order navigation]
When executing push order navigation, the performance control unit 151 controls the display of the LCD display 51, controls the lighting of the LEDs, and controls the output of audio by setting display commands, lamp commands, and audio commands by referring to the navigation process tables shown in Figures 126 to 129.

Specifically, at the start of a game, by setting a display command specifying video data and layer 50 for displaying navigation images suggesting the stopping order of the reels in the positions in the navigation area corresponding to the reel that should stop first, the reel that should stop second, and the reel that should stop third, a lamp command specifying a light emission pattern for lighting the area of the performance effect LED 52 corresponding to the reel that should stop first in yellow, and a voice command specifying the output of a navigation voice corresponding to the reel that should stop first, for example, as shown in FIG. 99(a), a navigation image suggesting the stopping order of the reel that should stop first, the reel that should stop second, and the reel that should stop third is displayed in the navigation area, the area of the performance effect LED 52 corresponding to the reel that should stop first is lit, and a navigation voice suggesting the reel that should stop first is output.

At the first stop, if the reel that should be stopped first as suggested by the push order navigation is stopped, the navigation image suggesting the stopping order of the reel that should be stopped first disappears, and the navigation image suggesting the stopping order of the reel that should be stopped second and the reel that should be stopped third is enlarged. A display command that specifies the video data and layer 50 that enlarges and displays the navigation image suggesting the stopping order of the reel that should be stopped second and the reel that should be stopped third, a lamp command that specifies the light emission pattern that lights up the area of the performance effect LED 52 that corresponds to the reel that should be stopped second in yellow, and a voice command that specifies the output of the navigation voice corresponding to the reel that should be stopped second are set, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 99(b), the navigation image suggesting the stopping order of the reel that should be stopped first disappears, the navigation image suggesting the stopping order of the reel that should be stopped second and the reel that should be stopped third is enlarged, the area of the performance effect LED 52 that corresponds to the reel that should be stopped second is turned on, and the navigation voice suggesting the reel that should be stopped second is output.

At the second stop, if the reel that should be stopped second in the stop order suggested by the push order navigation is stopped, the navigation image suggesting the stop order of the reel that should be stopped second is erased, and the navigation image suggesting the stop order of the reel that should be stopped third is enlarged and displayed by setting a display command that specifies the video data and layer 50, a lamp command that specifies a lighting pattern that lights up the area of the performance effect LED 52 that corresponds to the reel that should be stopped third in yellow, and a voice command that specifies the output of the navigation voice corresponding to the reel that should be stopped third. For example, as shown in FIG. 99(c), the navigation image suggesting the stop order of the reel that should be stopped second is erased, the navigation image suggesting the stop order of the reel that should be stopped third is enlarged and the area corresponding to the reel that should be stopped third is lit, and the navigation voice suggesting the reel that should be stopped third is output.

At the third stop, if a stop operation is performed on the reel that should be stopped third in the stop order suggested by the push order navigation, video data for erasing the navigation image suggesting the stop order of the reel that should be stopped third and a display command specifying the layer 50, and a lamp command specifying a lighting pattern for turning off the areas of the performance effect LED 52 corresponding to all reels are set. For example, as shown in FIG. 99(d), the navigation image suggesting the stop order of the reel that should be stopped third disappears, and the areas of the performance effect LED 52 corresponding to all reels are turned off.

In addition, at the time of the third stop release (when the third stop operation is released), regardless of which stop order operation mode was suggested by the termination fail-safe processing shown in FIG. 125, by setting a display command that specifies clearing of the video data specified in layer 50 where the navigation images are displayed, all navigation images displayed in layer 50 are erased as shown in FIG. 99(e) regardless of which stop order operation mode was suggested.

In addition, if a stop operation is performed at the first stop, second stop, or third stop in a stop order other than that suggested by the push order navigation, regardless of which stop order operation mode was suggested, by setting a display command that specifies the clearing of the video data specified in layer 50 where the navigation image is displayed, and a lamp command that specifies a lighting pattern that turns off the areas of effect LED 52 corresponding to all reels, all navigation images displayed on layer 50 are erased and the areas of effect LED 52 corresponding to all reels are turned off, as shown in Figure 99 (f), regardless of which stop order operation mode was suggested.

[About controlling 7Navi]
When executing 7Navi, the performance control unit 151 controls the display of the LCD display 51, controls the lighting of the LEDs, and controls the output of audio by setting display commands, lamp commands, and audio commands by referring to the navigation process table shown in Figure 130.

Specifically, at the start of the game, a display command that specifies the video data and layer 50 that displays the navigation image "7" in the navigation area in a position corresponding to the right reel where the first stop operation should be performed, and the navigation image "left arrow" in the position corresponding to the center reel where the second stop operation should be performed, and the navigation image "left arrow" in the position corresponding to the right reel where the third stop operation should be performed, a lamp command that specifies a light emission pattern that lights up the right, center, and left areas of the performance effect LED 52 in red so as to flow from the right side to the center and then to the left, and a voice command that specifies the output of a navigation voice that suggests that the stop operation should be performed with the aim of the black 7 symbol, are set, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 100(a), the navigation image "7", the navigation image "left arrow", and the navigation image "left arrow" are displayed in the navigation area in positions corresponding to the right reel, center reel, and left reel, respectively, and the lighting pattern of the right, center, and left areas of the performance effect LED 52 lights up in red so as to flow from the right side to the center and then to the left, and a navigation voice that suggests that the stop operation should be performed with the aim of the black 7 symbol is output.

At the first stop, if the right reel stop operation suggested as the first stop operation is performed and the black 7 symbol stops on the right reel, the navigation image "7" corresponding to the right reel disappears, and the navigation image "left arrow" corresponding to the center reel changes to the navigation image "7". By setting video data and display commands specifying the layer 50, and lamp commands specifying a lighting pattern in which the right area of the performance effect LED 52 is turned off and the central and left areas are lit in red flowing from the right side to the center and then to the left side, for example, as shown in FIG. 100(b), the navigation image "7" corresponding to the right reel disappears, the navigation image "left arrow" corresponding to the center reel changes to the navigation image "7", the right area of the performance effect LED 52 is turned off, and the central and left areas are lit in red flowing from the right side to the center and then to the left.

At the second stop, when the stop operation of the center reel suggested as the second stop operation is performed, and the black 7 symbol stops on the center reel, and the black 7 symbol is ready on the right reel and center reel, the navigation image "7" corresponding to the center reel is erased, and the navigation image "left arrow" corresponding to the left reel is changed to the navigation image "7", a display command specifying the video data and layer 50, and a lamp command specifying a lighting pattern in which the right and center areas of the performance effect LED 52 are turned off and the lighting pattern of the left area is lit in red flowing from top to bottom, for example, as shown in FIG. 100(c), the navigation image "7" corresponding to the center reel is erased, the navigation image "left arrow" corresponding to the left reel is changed to the navigation image "7", the right and center areas of the performance effect LED 52 are turned off, and the lighting pattern of the left area is lit in red flowing from top to bottom.

At the third stop, if the left reel is stopped and a black 7 symbol stops on the left reel and black 7 symbols line up on the right, center and left reels, video data is set to erase the navigation image indicating the stopping order of the third reel, a display command specifying the layer 50, and a lamp command specifying a lighting pattern to turn off the areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 corresponding to all reels. For example, as shown in FIG. 99(d), the navigation image "7" corresponding to the left reel disappears and the areas of the performance effect LEDs 52 corresponding to all reels are turned off.

In addition, when the third stop is released (when the third stop operation is released), the end fail-safe process shown in FIG. 125 sets a display command that specifies clearing of the video data specified in layer 50 on which the navigation images are displayed, and as shown in FIG. 100(e), all navigation images displayed in layer 50 are erased.

Also, if the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the right-center-left order suggested by the 7-Navi at the first, second, or third stop, if the black 7 symbol does not stop at the first stop, if the black 7 symbol is not completed at the second stop, or if the black 7 symbols are not aligned at the third stop, in any of these cases, by setting a display command that specifies the clearing of the video data specified in the layer 50 on which the navigation image is displayed, and a lamp command that specifies the illumination pattern that turns off the areas of the performance effect LED 52 corresponding to all reels, in any case, as shown in FIG. 100(f), all of the navigation images displayed on the layer 50 are erased, and the areas of the performance effect LED 52 corresponding to all reels are turned off.

[! About navigation control]
When executing the navigation, the performance control unit 151 refers to the navigation process table shown in Fig. 131 and sets display commands, lamp commands, and voice commands to control the display of the liquid crystal display 51, the lighting of the LEDs, and the output of the voice.

Specifically, at the start of a game, by setting a display command that specifies video data and layer 50 for displaying the determined type of navigation image "!" at positions corresponding to the left, center, and right reels in the navigation area, a lamp command that specifies a lighting pattern for lighting up the areas of performance effect LED 52 corresponding to all reels in the color corresponding to the navigation image "!", and a voice command that specifies the output of an alarm sound corresponding to the navigation image "!", for example, as shown in FIG. 101(a), the determined type of navigation image "!" is displayed in the navigation area corresponding to the left, center, and right reels, the areas of performance effect LED 52 corresponding to all reels are lit up in the color corresponding to the navigation image "!", and an alarm sound corresponding to the navigation image "!" is output.

At the first and second stops, by setting a display command that specifies video data and layer 50 that causes the navigation image "!" corresponding to the stopped reel to disappear and the navigation image "!" corresponding to the unstopped reels to remain displayed, for example, as shown in Figures 101 (b) and (c), the navigation image "!" corresponding to the stopped reel disappears and the navigation image "!" corresponding to the unstopped reels remains displayed.

At the third stop, by setting video data that causes the navigation image "!" corresponding to the stopped reel to disappear and a display command that specifies layer 50, the navigation image "!" corresponding to the stopped reel will disappear, for example, as shown in Figure 101 (d).

In addition, when the third stop is released (when the third stop operation is released), the end fail-safe process shown in FIG. 125 sets a display command that specifies clearing of the video data specified in layer 50 on which the navigation images are displayed, and as shown in FIG. 101 (e), all navigation images displayed in layer 50 are erased.

[About stop control and navigation]
When a push order role is won, the performance control unit 151 can perform push order navigation that suggests an operation mode corresponding to the type of push order role, i.e., an operation mode that will stop the main role, and by performing a stop operation in accordance with the operation mode suggested by the push order navigation, it is possible to stop the main role according to the type of push order role.

In this embodiment, when any of the multiple types of navigation target roles is won, the main character is stopped by performing a stop operation in a stop order according to the type of navigation target role, and the main character is not stopped by performing a stop operation in a stop order other than the stop order according to the type of navigation target role. However, when any of the multiple types of navigation target roles is won, the main character is stopped by performing a stop operation in a stop operation timing according to the type of navigation target role, and the main character is not stopped by performing a stop operation in a stop operation timing other than the stop operation timing according to the type of navigation target role. In addition, when any of the multiple types of navigation target roles is won, the main character is stopped by performing a stop operation in a stop order and a stop operation timing according to the type of navigation target role, and the main character is not stopped by performing a stop operation in a stop order other than the stop order according to the type of navigation target role or a stop operation timing other than the stop operation timing according to the type of navigation target role.

Furthermore, when a 7-matching lip that gives a special benefit to the player is won, the performance control unit 151 can perform 7-navigation, which suggests an operation mode for stopping the 7-matching lip to form a 7-matching, and the 7-matching lip can be stopped by performing a stop operation according to the operation mode suggested by the 7-navigation, and the 7-matching lip stops to form a 7-matching, suggesting that a special benefit has been granted. Furthermore, the performance control unit 151 can perform 7-navigation not only when a 7-matching lip is won, but also when a 7-mismatching lip is won, and when a 7-mismatching lip is won, 7-navigation is performed, and the black 7 pattern ten-pai mode can be stopped by performing a stop operation according to the operation mode suggested by the 7-navigation. This allows 7 Navi to be executed when a 7-match lip is won, where black 7 symbols line up, or when a 7-match lip is won, where black 7 symbols are ready but ultimately do not line up, increasing the opportunities for 7 Navi and allowing players to look forward to winning a 7-match lip, which will grant them a special bonus.

In this embodiment, when a 7-matched lip or a 7-mismatched lip is won, the 7-matched lip or the black 7 pattern is stopped in a predetermined stopping order (right, center, left stopping order) and at a predetermined stopping operation timing (a stopping operation timing within the pulling range of the black 7 pattern to the top of the left reel, the middle of the middle reel, and the bottom of the right reel (5 patterns including the stopping operation position)), and the 7-matched lip or the black 7 pattern is not stopped in a stopping order other than the predetermined stopping order (right, center, left stopping order) or at a stopping operation timing other than the predetermined stopping operation timing. However, when a 7-matched lip or a 7-mismatched lip is won, the stop operation is performed in a predetermined stopping order to control the stopping of the 7-matched lip or the black 7 symbol in the ready state, and the stop operation is performed in a stopping order other than the predetermined stopping order to control the stopping of the 7-matched lip or the black 7 symbol in the ready state, or the stop operation is performed at a predetermined stopping operation timing to control the stopping of the 7-matched lip or the black 7 symbol in the ready state, and the stop operation is performed at a stopping operation timing other than the predetermined stopping operation timing to control the stopping of the 7-matched lip or the black 7 symbol in the ready state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a 7 replay or a mismatched 7 replay is won, control is performed so that the 7 replay or the ready state of the black 7 symbol is not stopped by performing a stop operation in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order or at a stop operation timing other than the predetermined stop operation timing. However, even in this case, control is performed to stop the state in which any replay wins, so the player will not be disadvantaged even if 7 Navi is not executed when a 7 replay or a mismatched 7 replay is won.

The performance control unit 151 can also execute ! Small Red Navigation and ! Big Red Navigation, which suggest the winning of a weak cherry or a strong cherry, when a weak cherry or a strong cherry is won. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is won, the left reel is set as the first stop and the left reel is stopped within the range of the No. 5 cherry symbol in the lower row, resulting in different stopping patterns when a weak cherry is won and when a strong cherry is won. On the other hand, when a reel other than the left reel is set as the first stop, or the left reel is stopped outside the range of the No. 5 cherry symbol in the lower row, the stopping pattern is the same when a weak cherry is won and when a strong cherry is won. When ! Small Red Navigation and ! Big Red Navigation are executed, the left reel is set as the first stop and the left reel is stopped using the No. 6 BAR symbol as a guide, making it possible to determine whether a weak cherry or a strong cherry is won when a weak cherry or a strong cherry is won.

In addition, because it is suggested that there is a higher probability of winning a strong cherry when the ! Big Red Navi is executed than when the ! Small Red Navi is executed, by executing the ! Big Red Navi, the player can have hope of winning a strong cherry, which is more advantageous for the player in terms of granting bonuses than when a weak cherry is won.

In addition, the performance control unit 151 can execute ! Small Purple Navigation and ! Big Purple Navigation, which suggest the winning of chance eye A and chance eye B, when chance eye A and chance eye B are won. In addition, when chance eye A and chance eye B are won, the left reel is set as the first stop and the left reel is stopped within the range of the BAR symbol No. 6 in the lower row, resulting in different stop patterns when chance eye A is won and when chance eye B is won. On the other hand, when a reel other than the left reel is set as the first stop, or when the left reel is stopped outside the range of the BAR symbol No. 6 in the lower row, the stop pattern is the same when chance eye A is won and when chance eye B is won. When ! Small Purple Navigation and ! Big Purple Navigation are executed, the left reel is set as the first stop and the left reel is stopped using the BAR symbol No. 6 as a guide, making it possible to determine whether chance eye A or chance eye B is won when chance eye A and chance eye B are won.

In addition, because it is suggested that there is a higher probability of winning Chance B when ! Big Purple Navi is executed than when ! Small Purple Navi is executed, by executing ! Big Purple Navi, the player can be made to expect to win Chance B, which is more advantageous for the player in terms of the awarding of a bonus than when Chance A is won.

The performance control unit 151 can also execute a green navigation when a watermelon is won, suggesting that a watermelon has been won! Also, when a watermelon is won, stopping the center reel and right reel within the range in which the watermelon symbol is drawn into the middle of the center reel and the bottom of the right reel will result in a watermelon stopping state and a win can be made, whereas stopping the center reel and right reel at a timing outside the range in which the watermelon symbol is drawn into the middle of the center reel and the bottom of the right reel will not result in a watermelon stopping state and no win can be made.

[About navigation images and layers]
When it is determined that one of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, and ! green navigation is to be executed, and when it is determined that one of the push order navigations suggesting different operation modes is to be executed, the performance control unit 151 sets a display command specifying video data for displaying different navigation images, creates a video list specifying the video data and layers, etc., specified by the display command through a display control process, and executes a read command for the video list to the display control circuit (VDP) 152. As a result, the display control circuit (VDP) 152 creates a playback list in which the video data specified by the video list is set, and reproduces the video data based on the settings set in the playback list, thereby displaying the corresponding navigation image on the liquid crystal display 51.

In addition, all of the video data that displays the navigation images that make up the Push Order Navigation, the video data that displays the navigation images that make up the 7 Navigation, the video data that displays the navigation images that make up the !Small Red Navigation, the video data that displays the navigation images that make up the !Big Red Navigation, the video data that displays the navigation images that make up the !Small Purple Navigation, the video data that displays the navigation images that make up the !Big Purple Navigation, and the video data that displays the navigation images that make up the !Green Navigation are video data that display navigation images in a common navigation area, and at least a portion of these navigation images are displayed in a position where at least a portion of the navigation images overlap in the common navigation area, making it easier to recognize the operation mode suggested by the navigation images when any of the Push Order Navigation, 7 Navigation, !Small Red Navigation, !Big Red Navigation, !Small Purple Navigation, !Big Purple Navigation, and !Green Navigation are executed.

In addition, among the navigation images constituting the push order navigation, all of the video data that display navigation images suggesting different operation modes are video data that display the navigation images in a common navigation area, and these navigation images are displayed in positions where at least a portion of the navigation images overlap in the common navigation area, so that no matter which push order navigation suggesting which operation mode is executed, the operation mode suggested by the navigation images is easy to recognize.

When video data is specified for different layers by the video list, the display control circuit (VDP) 152 creates a playlist in which video data for each layer is set based on the specified video data, and plays the video data based on the settings set in the playlist. At this time, videos based on the video data are displayed overlapping each other according to the priority based on the layer of the playlist, and videos based on video data set in areas with lower layer values are displayed in the foreground.

In addition, while it is possible to specify multiple video data by specifying the same layer in the video list, only one video data can be set for the same layer in the play list. Even if multiple video data specifying the same layer are specified in the video list, only one video data is set for the same layer in the play list, and a video based on the set video data is displayed.

In this embodiment, when multiple video data specifying the same layer are specified by the video list, the video data specified later for that layer by the video list is set in the playback list as the video data for that layer. In such a case, it is only necessary to display the video based on the video data specified later, simplifying the control by the display control circuit (VDP) 152.

In addition, when multiple video data specifying the same layer are specified by the video list, the video data specified first for that layer by the video list may be set in the playback list as the video data for that layer. Even in such a case, it is sufficient to display only the video based on the video data specified first, simplifying the control by the display control circuit (VDP) 152.

In addition, in this embodiment, when multiple video data specifying the same layer are specified by the video list, only one video data is set for the same layer in the playlist, so that when multiple video data are set for the same layer, only a video based on one of the video data specified for the same layer is displayed. However, when multiple video data specifying the same layer are specified by the video list, multiple video data specifying the same layer can also be set in the playlist, but when multiple video data are set for the same layer during playback, only a video based on one video data may be displayed. In this case, when multiple video data are specified for the same layer in the playlist, the control by the display control circuit (VDP) 152 can be simplified by displaying only a video based on the video data set later for that layer, or displaying only a video based on the video data set earlier for that layer.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 151 creates a video list that specifies the same layer 20 as the layer of video data that displays the navigation image, regardless of whether the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! Small red navigation, ! Big red navigation, ! Small purple navigation, ! Big purple navigation, or ! Green navigation is executed. For this reason, even if a previous display command remains due to some malfunction, and video data of navigation images that suggest different operation modes or contents are specified by the video list among the navigation images that make up the push order navigation, the navigation image that makes up the 7 navigation, the navigation image that makes up the ! Small red navigation, the navigation image that makes up the ! Big red navigation, the navigation image that makes up the ! Small purple navigation, the navigation image that makes up the ! Big purple navigation, and the navigation image that makes up the ! Green navigation, only one of the video data is set in the playback list, and only the navigation image that suggests the one content is displayed.

Specifically, even if video data of navigation images constituting the push order navigation and video data of navigation images constituting the 7Navi are specified by the video list, only one of the video data is set in the playlist and only the navigation image suggesting one content is displayed, preventing navigation images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other. In particular, the navigation images constituting the push order navigation and the navigation images constituting the 7Navi are not displayed overlapping each other with some overlapping in the navigation area, making it difficult to understand the suggested operation mode.

In addition, even if video data of navigation images that suggest different stop orders are simultaneously specified by the video list among the video data of navigation images that make up the push sequence navigation, only one of the video data is set in the playback list and only the navigation image suggesting one content is displayed, preventing navigation images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other. In particular, navigation images suggesting different operation modes will not be displayed overlappingly with some parts overlapping in the navigation area, making it difficult to understand the suggested operation modes.

Also, even if the video list specifies video data of the navigation image that constitutes the !Small Red Navi or the !Big Red Navi and the video data of the navigation image that constitutes the !Small Purple Navi or the video data of the navigation image that constitutes the !Big Purple Navi or the video data of the navigation image that constitutes the !Green Navi, only one of the video data is set in the playlist and only the navigation image that suggests one content is displayed, so it is possible to prevent navigation images that suggest different winning roles from being overlapped and displayed. In particular, there is no overlapping in the navigation area between the navigation images that constitute the !Small Red Navi or the !Big Red Navi and the navigation images that constitute the Small Purple Navi or the !Big Purple Navi or the navigation images that constitute the !Green Navi, making it difficult to understand the suggested winning role.

Furthermore, even if video data of the navigation image that makes up the !Small Red Navigator and video data of the navigation image that makes up the !Big Red Navigator, or video data of the navigation image that makes up the !Small Purple Navigator and video data of the navigation image that makes up the !Big Purple Navigator are specified by the video list, only one of the video data is set in the playlist and only the navigation image that suggests one content is displayed, preventing navigation images that suggest different winning possibilities from being overlapped. In particular, there is no overlapping in the navigation area between the navigation images that make up the !Small Red Navigator and the !Big Red Navigator, or the navigation images that make up the !Small Purple Navigator and the !Big Purple Navigator, making it difficult to understand the suggested winning possibilities.

In addition, when executing any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! Light red navigation, ! Big red navigation, ! Light purple navigation, ! Big purple navigation, and ! Green navigation, the performance control unit 151 creates a video list that specifies the same layer for the image data of the navigation image from the start of displaying the navigation image until the display ends, and can display the navigation image with the same priority relative to images based on video data with other layers specified from the start of displaying the navigation image until the display of the navigation image ends.

In addition, when executing any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! Light red navigation, ! Big red navigation, ! Light purple navigation, ! Big purple navigation, and ! Green navigation, the performance control unit 151 changes the video to one based on different video data each time a stop operation is performed after starting to display the navigation image, and creates a video list that specifies the same layer as the video data before the change for the image data after the change, so that after starting to display the navigation image, the navigation image that has changed due to the stop operation can be displayed with the same priority as images based on video data with other layers specified.

In addition, a video list can be created that specifies a layer with a higher priority for the post-change video data than the image data before the change. By configuring it in this way, even if video data for displaying the pre-change navigation image remains, the post-change navigation image can be displayed with priority.

[Display Control Variation 1]
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 151 sets a display command in the performance control process, creates a video list in the display control process that specifies the video data and layers, etc. specified by the display command, and executes a video list read command to the display control circuit (VDP) 152, which causes the display control circuit (VDP) 152 to create a playback list in which the video data specified by the video list is set, and plays the video data based on the settings set in the playback list, thereby displaying the corresponding image on the liquid crystal display 51. However, the performance control unit 151 may also be configured to execute the display control process for each frame in which an image is updated, and to set in the shared memory 153 for each frame an image list that specifies the image data and layers, etc. for each frame that constitutes the video data specified by the display command, and the display control circuit (VDP) 152 may be configured to draw the image data specified by the image list in the frame buffer of the VRAM 155 in the next frame, thereby displaying an image based on the settings set in the image list on the liquid crystal display 51.

In such a configuration, when image data is specified for different layers by the image list, the display control circuit (VDP) 152 sets the image data for each layer based on the specified image data, and draws an image in the frame buffer based on the settings. At this time, images based on image data are drawn so that they are displayed overlapping each other according to the priority based on the specified layer, and images based on image data set in areas with lower layer values are displayed in the foreground.

In addition, it is possible to specify multiple image data by specifying the same layer in the image list, but the display control circuit (VDP) 152 can set only one image data for the same layer, and even if multiple image data specifying the same layer are specified by the image list, the display control circuit (VDP) 152 sets only one image data for the same layer, and an image based on the set image data is displayed as the image of that layer.

In addition, in the display control circuit (VDP) 152, when multiple image data specifying the same layer are specified by the image list, the image data specified later for that layer by the image list is set as the image data for that layer. In such a case, it is sufficient to display only the image based on the image data specified later as the image for that layer, thereby simplifying the control by the display control circuit (VDP) 152.

When multiple image data specifying the same layer are specified by the image list, the image data specified first for that layer by the image list may be set as the image data for that layer. Even in such a case, it is sufficient to display only the image based on the image data specified first as the image for that layer, simplifying the control by the display control circuit (VDP) 152.

In addition, in this configuration, the performance control unit 151 creates an image list that specifies the same layer as the layer of image data that displays the navigation image when executing any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! Small red navigation, ! Big red navigation, ! Small purple navigation, ! Big purple navigation, and ! Green navigation. This allows for cases where a portion of the image list for an earlier frame remains due to some malfunction, and image data of navigation images that suggest different operation modes or contents are specified by the image list for the push order navigation, the 7 navigation, the navigation image that makes up the ! Small red navigation, the navigation image that makes up the ! Big red navigation, the navigation image that makes up the ! Small purple navigation, the navigation image that makes up the ! Big purple navigation, and the navigation image that makes up the ! Green navigation, by specifying the same layer for all of them, only one of the image data is set as the image data for that layer, and only the navigation image that suggests the one content can be displayed.

Specifically, even if the image list specifies image data for navigation images that make up the push order navigation and image data for navigation images that make up the 7Navi, the same layer is specified for both, so that only one of the image data is set as the image data for that layer and only the navigation image suggesting one content is displayed, preventing navigation images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other.

In addition, even if image data of navigation images that make up the push sequence navigation are simultaneously specified by the image list, which suggest different stop orders, the same layer is specified for all of them, so that only one of the image data is set as the image data for that layer and only the navigation image suggesting one content is displayed, thereby preventing navigation images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other.

In addition, even if the image data of the navigation image that constitutes the !Small Red Navi or the image data of the navigation image that constitutes the !Big Red Navi and the image data of the navigation image that constitutes the !Small Purple Navi or the image data of the navigation image that constitutes the !Big Purple Navi or the image data of the navigation image that constitutes the !Green Navi are specified by the image list, the same layer is specified for all of them, so that only one of the image data is set as the image data of that layer and only the navigation image suggesting one content is displayed, preventing navigation images suggesting different winning roles from being displayed overlapping each other.

In addition, even if the image data of the navigation image that makes up the ! Small Red Navigator and the image data of the navigation image that makes up the ! Big Red Navigator are specified by the image list, or the image data of the navigation image that makes up the ! Small Purple Navigator and the image data of the navigation image that makes up the ! Big Purple Navigator are specified, the same layer is specified in both cases, and only one of the image data is set as the image data for that layer, and only the navigation image that suggests one content is displayed, preventing navigation images that suggest different winning possibilities from being displayed on top of each other.

In addition, when executing any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! Small red navigation, ! Big red navigation, ! Small purple navigation, ! Big purple navigation, and ! Green navigation, the performance control unit 151 creates an image list that specifies the same layer for the image data of the navigation image from the start of displaying the navigation image until the end of displaying the navigation image, so that the navigation image can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data with other layers specified from the start of displaying the navigation image until the end of displaying the navigation image.

In addition, when executing any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! Light red navigation, ! Big red navigation, ! Light purple navigation, ! Big purple navigation, and ! Green navigation, the performance control unit 151 changes the image based on different image data each time a stop operation is performed after starting to display the navigation image, and creates an image list that specifies the same layer as the image data before the change for the image data after the change, so that after starting to display the navigation image, the navigation image that has changed due to the stop operation can be displayed with the same priority as images based on image data with other layers specified.

In addition, an image list can be created that specifies a layer with a higher priority for the post-change image data than for the pre-change image data. By configuring it in this way, even if image data for displaying the pre-change navigation image remains, the post-change navigation image can be displayed with priority.

[Display Control Variation 2]
In display control variant 1, the performance control unit 151 executes display control processing for each frame in which an image is updated, and sets in the shared memory 153 for each frame an image list that specifies the image data and layers for each frame that make up the moving image data specified by the display command, and the display control circuit (VDP) 152 draws the image data specified by the image list in the frame buffer of the VRAM 155 in the next frame, thereby causing the liquid crystal display 51 to display an image based on the settings set in the image list. However, it is also possible to configure the performance control unit 151 to execute display control processing for each frame in which an image is updated, and to create an image list for each frame in which the image data for each frame that makes up the moving image data specified by the display command is set in order of image data with lowest display priority, and to set the created image list in the shared memory 153, and the display control circuit (VDP) 152 draws the image data specified by the image list in the frame buffer of the VRAM 155 in the order set in the image list in the next frame, thereby causing the liquid crystal display 51 to display an image based on the settings set in the image list.

In this configuration, the display control circuit (VDP) 152 draws the image data set in the image list in the frame buffer of the VRAM 155 in the order set in the image list, so that image data set later in the image list is drawn so that it is superimposed on top of image data set earlier, and the later the image data set in the image list, the closer it is to the front.

In addition, a priority is set for the image data in advance, and when creating an image list, the performance control unit 151 specifies the image data to be used for the frame, and from the specified image data, extracts image data with the lowest priority and sets them in the image list, creating an image list in which the image data are arranged in ascending order of priority. At this time, when multiple image data with the same priority are specified as image data to be used for the frame, the performance control unit 151 sets only one image data, and multiple image data with the same priority are not set in the image list, and only images based on any one image data are displayed.

In addition, the performance control unit 151 is configured such that when multiple image data with the same priority are specified, the image data extracted later is set as the image data with that priority. In such a case, it is only necessary to set the image data extracted later, simplifying the control for creating the image list.

When multiple image data with the same priority are specified, the image data extracted first may be set as the image data with that priority. Even in such a case, it is only necessary to set the image data extracted first, simplifying the control for creating the image list.

Even in this configuration, when the performance control unit 151 executes any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! Small red navigation, ! Big red navigation, ! Small purple navigation, ! Big purple navigation, and ! Green navigation, the same priority is set as the priority of the image data for displaying the navigation image, so that even if, due to some malfunction, multiple image data of navigation images that suggest different operation modes or contents are specified among the navigation images that make up the push order navigation, the navigation images that make up the 7 navigation, the navigation images that make up the ! Small red navigation, the navigation images that make up the ! Big red navigation, the navigation images that make up the ! Small purple navigation, the navigation images that make up the ! Big purple navigation, and the navigation images that make up the ! Green navigation, all have the same priority, so only one of the image data is set in the image list, and only the navigation image that suggests one content can be displayed.

Specifically, even if image data of a navigation image constituting the push order navigation and image data of a navigation image constituting the 7 navigation are specified, they all have the same priority, so only one of the image data is set in the image list and only the navigation image suggesting one content is displayed, preventing navigation images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other.

In addition, even if image data of navigation images that suggest different stop orders are specified at the same time among the image data of navigation images that make up the push order navigation, all of them have the same priority, so only one of the image data is set in the image list and only the navigation image suggesting one content is displayed, preventing navigation images suggesting different operation modes from being displayed overlapping each other.

In addition, even if image data of the navigation image that constitutes the Small Red Navi or image data of the navigation image that constitutes the Big Red Navi and image data of the navigation image that constitutes the Small Purple Navi or image data of the navigation image that constitutes the Big Purple Navi or image data of the navigation image that constitutes the Green Navi are specified, all of them have the same priority, so only one of the image data is set in the image list and only the navigation image suggesting one content is displayed, preventing navigation images suggesting different winning roles from being displayed overlapping each other.

In addition, even if image data of the navigation image that makes up the !Small Red Navigator and image data of the navigation image that makes up the !Big Red Navigator are specified, or even if image data of the navigation image that makes up the !Small Purple Navigator and image data of the navigation image that makes up the !Big Purple Navigator are specified, they all have the same priority, so only one of the image data is set in the image list and only the navigation image that suggests one content is displayed, preventing navigation images that suggest different winning possibilities from being displayed overlapping each other.

In addition, when the performance control unit 151 executes any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! Small red navigation, ! Big red navigation, ! Small purple navigation, ! Big purple navigation, and ! Green navigation, the same priority is set for the image data of the navigation image from the start of displaying the navigation image until the display ends, so that the navigation image can be displayed with the same priority relative to images based on other image data from the start of displaying the navigation image until the display ends.

In addition, when the performance control unit 151 executes any of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, and ! green navigation, after starting to display the navigation image, it changes to an image based on different image data each time a stop operation is performed, and the same priority is set for the image data after the change as for the image data before the change, so that after starting to display the navigation image, the navigation image that has changed due to the stop operation can be displayed with the same priority as images based on other image data.

It is also possible to set a higher priority for the image data after the change than for the image data before the change. By configuring it in this way, even if image data for displaying the navigation image before the change remains, the navigation image after the change can be displayed preferentially.

[Lamp data and lamp layers]
When it is determined that one of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, and ! green navigation is to be executed, or when it is determined that one of the push order navigations suggesting different operation modes is to be executed, the performance control unit 151 sets a lamp command that specifies lamp data for lighting the LEDs in different light emission patterns, and sets the lamp data specified by the lamp command in the corresponding lamp layer by the lamp control process. As a result, the performance control unit 151 is adapted to control the lighting of the LEDs in a light emission pattern based on the lamp data set in the lamp layer.

In addition, when one of the push order navigations suggesting different operation modes is executed, lamp data is set that defines a lighting pattern that lights up different areas (left area, center area, right area) of the performance effect LED 52. When the push order navigation is executed, if the operation mode suggested according to the type of push order role is different, different areas will light up, so that the operation mode can be easily recognized from the difference in the lit areas.

In addition, when lamp data is set for different lamp layers, the performance control unit 151 controls the lighting of the LEDs with a light emission pattern based on the lamp data set for the lamp layer with the highest priority among the set lamp data.

In addition, only one lamp data can be set for the same lamp layer, and even if multiple lamp commands that specify the same lamp layer are set, only one lamp data is set for the same lamp layer, and the lighting of the LED is controlled with a light emission pattern based on the set lamp data.

In this embodiment, when multiple lamp commands that specify the same lamp layer are set, the lamp data specified by the lamp command set last is set as the lamp data for that lamp layer. In such a case, the LED lighting control can be simplified by controlling the lighting of the LEDs with a light emission pattern based on the lamp data specified by the lamp command set last.

When multiple lamp commands are set specifying the same lamp layer, the lamp data specified by the lamp command set first may be set as the lamp data for that lamp layer. Even in this case, LED lighting control can be simplified by controlling the lighting of the LEDs with a light emission pattern based on the lamp data specified by the lamp command set first.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 151 sets the corresponding lamp data to the same lamp layer 2 regardless of whether the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! Light red navigation, ! Big red navigation, ! Light purple navigation, ! Big purple navigation, or ! Green navigation is executed. For this reason, even if a previous lamp command remains due to some malfunction, and a light pattern that suggests a different operation mode or content is specified among the light patterns corresponding to the push order navigation, the light pattern corresponding to the 7 navigation, the light pattern corresponding to the light small red navigation, the light pattern corresponding to the light big red navigation, the light pattern corresponding to the light small purple navigation, the light pattern corresponding to the light big purple navigation, and the light pattern corresponding to the light big green navigation, only one of the light patterns is set to the lamp layer, and the LED lighting control is performed with the light pattern of the one content.

Specifically, even if lamp data for a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the push order navigation and a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the 7-navigation navigation are specified, only one of the lamp data is set in the lamp layer, and the LED lighting is controlled with a light-emitting pattern that suggests one content, preventing the operation mode suggested by the light-emitting pattern from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, even if lamp data with light-emitting patterns suggesting different stop orders among the lamp data with light-emitting patterns corresponding to the push order navigation are simultaneously specified, only one of the lamp data is set in the lamp layer and the lighting of the LED is controlled with a light-emitting pattern suggesting one content, preventing the operation mode suggested by the light-emitting pattern from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, even if lamp data with a light-emitting pattern corresponding to a! Small Red Navigator or! Big Red Navigator, lamp data with a light-emitting pattern corresponding to a! Small Purple Navigator or! Big Purple Navigator, or lamp data with a light-emitting pattern corresponding to a! Green Navigator are specified, only one of the lamp data is set in the lamp layer, and the LED lighting is controlled with a light-emitting pattern that suggests one content, preventing the winning combination suggested by the light-emitting pattern from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, if the light emission pattern corresponding to the ! Small Red Navigator and the ! Large Red Navigator, and the light emission pattern corresponding to the ! Small Purple Navigator and the ! Large Purple Navigator are configured differently, when lamp data for the light emission pattern corresponding to the ! Small Red Navigator and the ! Large Red Navigator are specified, or when lamp data for the light emission pattern corresponding to the ! Small Purple Navigator and the ! Large Purple Navigator are specified, only one of the lamp data is set in the lamp layer, and the LED lighting is controlled with a light emission pattern that suggests one content, it is possible to prevent the possibility of winning suggested by the light emission pattern from becoming difficult to recognize.

[About navigation voice and tracks]
When it is determined that one of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, and ! green navigation is to be executed, and when it is determined that one of the push order navigations suggesting different operation modes is to be executed, the performance control unit 151 sets a voice command that specifies voice data for outputting a different navigation voice, and creates a sound designation command that specifies the voice data and track, etc., specified by the voice command through a sound control process, and transmits the sound designation command to the sound control unit 157. As a result, the sound control unit 157 creates a playlist in which the voice data specified by the sound designation command is set, and reproduces the voice data based on the settings set in the playlist, thereby outputting the corresponding voice from the speakers 53 and 54.

The sound specification command also allows you to specify the volume for each piece of audio data, so when executing push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, ! green navigation, or when suggesting a different operation mode, the same volume is specified for the audio data used to output the corresponding navigation voice. This means that even when the navigation voice suggests a different operation mode or different content, the volume of the navigation voice does not change, making it easier to hear.

When audio data is specified for different tracks by a sound specification command, the sound control unit 157 creates a playlist in which audio data for each track is set based on the specified audio data, and plays the audio data based on the settings set in the playlist. At this time, when audio data is set for multiple tracks, the sound based on this audio data is synthesized and output from the speakers 53 and 54.

In addition, the sound designation command can specify multiple pieces of audio data by specifying the same track, but only one piece of audio data can be set for the same track in the playlist. Even if multiple pieces of audio data specifying the same track are specified by the sound designation command, only one piece of audio data is set for the same track in the playlist, and the set audio data is played.

In this embodiment, when multiple pieces of audio data that specify the same track are specified by a sound designation command, the audio data that is specified later for that track by the sound designation command is set in the playback list as the audio data for that track. In such a case, it is only necessary to play back the audio data that is specified later, simplifying the control by the sound control unit 157.

In addition, when multiple pieces of audio data specifying the same track are specified by a sound designation command, the audio data that was specified first for that track by the sound designation command may be set in the playback list as the audio data for that track. Even in such a case, it is sufficient to play back only the audio data that was specified first, simplifying the control by the sound control unit 157.

In addition, in this embodiment, when multiple pieces of audio data that specify the same track are specified by a sound specification command, only one piece of audio data is set for the same track in the playback list, so that when multiple pieces of audio data are set for the same track, only one piece of audio data specified for the same track is played. However, when multiple pieces of audio data that specify the same track are specified by a sound specification command, multiple pieces of audio data that specify the same track can also be set in the playback list, but when multiple pieces of audio data are set for the same track, only one piece of audio data may be played. In this case, when multiple pieces of audio data are specified for the same track in the playback list, the control by the sound control unit 157 can be simplified by playing only the audio data that is set later for the track, or by playing only the audio data that is set earlier for the track.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 151 creates a sound designation command that specifies the same track 2 as the track of the audio data that will output the navigation voice, regardless of whether the push order navigation, 7 navigation, ! small red navigation, ! big red navigation, ! small purple navigation, ! big purple navigation, or ! green navigation is executed. For this reason, even if audio data for the navigation voice that suggests a different operation mode or content is specified by the sound designation command, such as when a previous audio command or sound designation command remains due to some malfunction, only one of the audio data is set in the playback list, and only the navigation voice that suggests the one content is output.

Specifically, even if the sound designation command specifies voice data for the navigation voice corresponding to the push order navigation and voice data for the navigation voice corresponding to the 7 navigation, only one of the voice data is set in the playback list and only the navigation voice suggesting one content is output, preventing navigation voices suggesting different operation modes from being output at the same time.

In addition, even if multiple pieces of navigation voice audio data corresponding to push-order navigation that suggest different stop orders are simultaneously specified by the sound specification command, only one of the pieces of audio data is set in the playback list and only the navigation voice suggesting one content is output, preventing navigation voices suggesting different operation modes from being output simultaneously.

In addition, even if the sound designation command specifies the navigation voice audio data corresponding to the ! Small Red Navi and the ! Small Purple Navi or the ! Big Purple Navi or the ! Green Navi, only one of the audio data is set in the playlist and only the navigation voice suggesting one content is output, preventing navigation voices suggesting different winning roles from being output at the same time.

In addition, if the sound specification command specifies the navigation voice audio data corresponding to the ! Small Red Navigation Device and the ! Large Red Navigation Device, and even if the navigation voice audio data corresponding to the ! Small Purple Navigation Device and the ! Large Purple Navigation Device are specified, only one of the audio data will be set in the playlist and only the navigation voice suggesting one content will be output, preventing navigation voices with different suggested winning probabilities from being output at the same time.

[About executing navigation]
When a weak cherry or strong cherry is won, the left reel is made the first stop, and by performing the stopping operation of the left reel within the range of the No. 5 cherry symbol being pulled into the lower row, it is possible to determine whether a weak cherry or a strong cherry has been won, but the operation mode suggested by 7Navi suggests an operation mode with the stopping order of right, center, left, and if the stopping operation is performed in the operation mode suggested by 7Navi, it will be impossible to determine whether a weak cherry or a strong cherry has been won,

In addition, when chance symbol A or chance symbol B is won, by making the left reel the first stop and performing the stopping operation of the left reel within the range of the No. 6 BAR symbol being drawn into the lower row, it becomes possible to determine whether chance symbol A or chance symbol B is won when chance symbol A or chance symbol B is won; however, the operation mode suggested by 7Navi suggests the operation mode in the stopping order of right, center, left, and if the stopping operation is performed in the operation mode suggested by 7Navi, it becomes impossible to determine whether chance symbol A or chance symbol B is won when chance symbol A or chance symbol B is won.

In addition, when a watermelon is won, stopping the middle and right reels within the range of the watermelon symbol being drawn into the middle of the middle reel and the bottom of the right reel will stop the watermelon and result in a win; however, the operation mode suggested by 7Navi suggests the operation mode at the timing of the stop operation within the range of the black 7 symbol being drawn into the top of the left reel, the middle of the middle reel, and the bottom of the right reel. As shown in FIG. 3, the range of the black 7 symbol being drawn into the bottom of the right reel and the range of the watermelon symbol being drawn into the bottom of the right reel do not overlap, so if the stop operation is performed in the operation mode suggested by 7Navi, when a watermelon is won, it will not be possible to win the watermelon.

For this reason, the performance control unit 151 checks the Navi flag based on the start operation of the game, judges whether or not the execution of 7 Navi has been decided, and whether or not a predetermined role (weak cherry, strong cherry, chance eye A, chance eye B, watermelon) has been won, and executes 7 Navi on the condition that the execution of 7 Navi has been decided and it is determined that the predetermined role has not been won.

This prevents situations where, due to some malfunction such as command rewriting, a weak or strong cherry is won, but the execution of 7Navi is decided, 7Navi is not executed, and the stopping operation is performed in the operation mode suggested by the erroneously executed 7Navi, which prevents a different stopping mode from being derived depending on whether a weak cherry or a strong cherry is won, making it impossible to distinguish whether a weak cherry or a strong cherry is won.

In addition, even if chance eye A or chance eye B is a winning combination due to some malfunction, and the execution of 7Navi is decided, 7Navi is not executed, and the stop operation is performed in the operation mode suggested by the erroneously executed 7Navi, which prevents a different stop mode depending on whether chance eye A or chance eye B is a winning combination from being derived, making it impossible to distinguish whether chance eye A or chance eye B is a winning combination.

In addition, even if a Suica is won due to some kind of malfunction, and it has been decided that 7Navi should be executed, 7Navi may not be executed, and the stopping operation may be performed in the operation mode suggested by the erroneously executed 7Navi, resulting in the stopping mode of Suica not being derived and making it impossible to win Suica.

In addition, when a push order role is won, the main role can be stopped by performing a stop operation in the stop order that corresponds to the type of push order role, but the operation mode suggested by 7Navi suggests an operation mode in the stop order of right, center, left, and if a stop operation is performed in the operation mode suggested by 7Navi, the main role cannot be stopped when some push order roles are won.

On the other hand, when a 7-matched lip or a 7-mismatched lip is won, the ready state of the 7-matched lip or black 7 symbol can be stopped by performing the stop operation in the right-center-left stopping order, but the operation mode suggested by the push order navigation may suggest an operation mode for a stopping order other than the right-center-left stopping order, and performing the stop operation in the operation mode suggested by the push order navigation may make it impossible to stop the ready state of the 7-matched lip or black 7 symbol.

For this reason, the performance control unit 151 checks the navigation flag based on the start operation of the game, determines whether or not the execution of 7 Navigation has been decided, and whether or not the execution of push order navigation has been decided, and executes 7 Navigation on the condition that it is decided that the execution of 7 Navigation has been decided, and that the execution of push order navigation has not been decided.

This prevents a situation where, even if the execution of the push order navigation has been decided due to some kind of malfunction, and the execution of the 7 navi has been decided, the 7 navi will not be executed, and navigations suggesting different operating methods will be executed in combination.

In addition, when a 7 replay or a non-7 replay is won, control is performed so that the 7 replay or the black 7 symbol will not be stopped in a ready state by performing a stop operation in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order or at a stop operation timing other than the predetermined stop operation timing. However, even in this case, control is performed to stop the state in which either replay will win, so even if a 7 replay or a non-7 replay is actually won and the execution of the 7 navi has been decided, the player will not be disadvantaged even if the 7 navi is not executed because it is determined that a predetermined role has been won or that the execution of the push order navi has been decided.

[Fail-safe processing]
When the performance control unit 151 receives an error command indicating the start of an error state in which game progress is disabled, a setting change command indicating the start of a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed and game progress is disabled, or a setting confirmation command indicating the start of a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed and game progress is disabled, it causes the LCD display 51 to display an error image indicating an error state, a setting change in progress image indicating a setting change state, or a setting confirmation in progress image indicating a setting confirmation state, respectively.

In addition, the video data for displaying the error image, the image in progress of changing settings, and the image in progress of checking settings are set to a layer with a higher priority than the video data for displaying images associated with the effects that are normally executed, so that when the device is controlled to an error state, a setting change state, or a setting check state, the error image, the image in progress of changing settings, and the image in progress of checking settings can be displayed in priority over images associated with the effects.

Then, when the presentation control unit 151 receives a game start command indicating the start of a game based on a game start operation, it performs a start fail-safe process and executes a process to erase the error image, the setting change image, and the setting check image by setting a display command that specifies clearing of the video data specified in the layer 20 in which the error image, the setting change image, and the setting check image are displayed. Therefore, even if the error state, the setting change state, or the setting check state has ended but the error image, the setting change image, or the setting check image continues to be displayed due to a malfunction, the error image, the setting change image, and the setting check image are erased when the game starts based on the start operation, so it is possible to prevent the presentation that accompanies the progress of the game from being hindered.

In addition, the start-time fail-safe process is performed before the processes related to the progress of the game, such as the effect determination process 1 and the effect setting process, and therefore the error image, setting change image, and setting confirmation image are erased before the processes related to the progress of the game, so the error image, setting change image, and setting confirmation image do not affect the effects that accompany the progress of the game.

In addition, when the performance control unit 151 is controlled to the error state, setting change state, or setting confirmation state, it sets an error flag, a setting change in progress flag, and a setting confirmation in progress flag, respectively, and upon receiving an error command indicating the end of the error state when a termination condition for terminating the error state, setting change state, or setting confirmation state is met, a setting change command indicating the end of the setting change state, or a setting confirmation command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state, it clears the error flag, setting change in progress flag, and setting confirmation in progress flag, respectively, and executes processing to erase the error image, setting change in progress image, and setting confirmation in progress image.

Then, in the start-time fail-safe processing, the performance control unit 151 determines whether the error flag, the setting change flag, or the setting confirmation flag are set, and when it is determined that these flags are not set, executes processing to erase the error image, the setting change image, or the setting confirmation image, so that it is possible to prevent the error image, the setting change image, or the setting confirmation image from being erased even when the error state, the setting change state, or the setting confirmation state is being controlled. Also, since the error flag, the setting change flag, and the setting confirmation flag are flags that are cleared when an end condition that ends the error state, the setting change state, or the setting confirmation state is satisfied, it is possible to appropriately determine whether the error state, the setting change state, or the setting confirmation state has ended when game play is started based on the start operation.

In addition, when the push order navigation, 7 navigation, or ! navigation is executed, the performance control unit 151 causes the navigation image to be displayed on the LCD display 51. In addition, after displaying the navigation image in conjunction with the execution of the push order navigation, 7 navigation, or ! navigation, the performance control unit 151 performs processing to update or erase the navigation image each time a stop operation is performed after the navigation image is displayed. In more detail, the navigation image is updated or erased by referencing the navigation process table and setting a display command to update or erase the navigation image. In particular, when an operation mode different from the operation mode suggested by the push order navigation or 7 navigation is performed, all displayed navigation images are erased.

When the performance control unit 151 receives a game start command indicating the start of a game based on a game start operation, it performs a start fail-safe process and executes a process to erase the navigation image by setting a display command that specifies clearing the video data specified in the layer 50 in which the navigation image is displayed. Therefore, even if the display of the navigation image of the previous game continues due to a malfunction, the navigation image is erased when the game starts based on the start operation, so it is possible to prevent the navigation image from interfering with the performance that accompanies the progress of the game.

In addition, when the performance control unit 151 receives a game end command indicating the end of the game, it performs a fail-safe process at the end and executes a process to erase the navigation image by setting a display command that specifies clearing the video data specified in the layer 50 on which the navigation image is displayed. This prevents the navigation image from continuing to be displayed even though the game has ended, and prevents the performance that accompanies the progress of the game from being hindered.

In addition, the performance control unit 151 displays the navigation image in different ways depending on whether the navigation image is push order navigation, 7 navigation, or ! navigation, but regardless of which navigation image is displayed, a common display command is set and the navigation image is erased by a common process, so the program capacity for erasing the navigation image can be reduced.

In addition, the performance control unit 151 displays different modes of navigation images using push order navigation depending on the operation mode suggested, but regardless of which operation mode a navigation image suggesting the displayed mode is, a common display command is set and the navigation image is erased by common processing, thereby reducing the program capacity required to erase the navigation image.

In addition, the performance control unit 151 sets a common display command and erases the navigation image through a common process in all cases, including when the navigation image is erased through start fail-safe processing, when the navigation image is erased through end fail-safe processing, and when the navigation image is erased as a result of a stop operation being performed in an operation manner different from the operation manner suggested during execution of the push sequence navigation, thereby reducing the program capacity required for erasing the navigation image.

Next, a slot machine 2 according to a second embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, only the configurations different from the first embodiment will be described. As the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, their description will be omitted here.

In Example 1, the role ratio monitor 89 is connected to the medal count control board 17, and the medal count control unit 171 counts the role ratio information and controls the role ratio monitor 89 to display the counted role ratio information. In this example, however, as shown in FIG. 132, the role ratio monitor 89 is connected to the main control board 16, and the main control unit 161 counts the role ratio information and controls the role ratio monitor 89 to display the counted role ratio information.

[7-segment display]
The seven-segment displays constituting the gaming aid display 12 and the winning combination monitor 89 are shown in Fig. 133. As shown in Fig. 133, the seven-segment display includes seven segments, segments A to G, and a segment DP (decimal point). For example, when displaying "1" on one seven-segment display, segments B and C are illuminated. This allows "1" to be displayed on the seven-segment display. In the following description, one segment constituting the seven segments and one LED such as the 1BETLED 14 are collectively referred to as the "light-emitting portion."

[Control by main control unit 161]
Control by the main control unit 161 will be described using FIG. 134. First, digits will be described. A "digit" is composed of one or more light-emitting units. Below, digits are also referred to as "DG". Two or more DGs are also referred to as a DG group. In this embodiment, the first DG group includes DG1 to DG4. The second DG group includes DG1 to DG4 that are different from the DG1 to DG4 included in the first DG group. DGs are sometimes referred to as "groups".

In the example of FIG. 134, DG1 of the first DG group is a DG including seven segments (segment A to segment G) included in the first digit 7-segment display of the gaming support display 12 and an anode. DG2 of the first DG group is a DG including seven segments (segment A to segment G) included in the second digit 7-segment display of the gaming support display 12 and an anode. DG3 of the first DG group is a DG including seven LEDs and an anode. The seven LEDs are 1BET LED 14, 2BET LED 15, 3BET LED 16, replay lamp 91, outer end signal lamp 92, insert possible lamp 93, and start valid lamp 94. DG4 of the first DG group is a DG including seven segments (segment A to segment G) included in the 7-segment display of the setting value display 24 and an anode.

DG1 of the second DG group is a DG that includes the eight segments (segments A to G and segment DP) included in the first digit seven-segment display of the role ratio monitor 89, and an anode. Similarly, DG2 to DG4 of the second DG group are DGs that include the eight segments (segments A to G and segment DP) included in the second digit to fourth digit seven-segment displays of the role ratio monitor 89, and an anode.

Next, the main control board 16 will be described. The main control board 16 is equipped with a main control unit 161 and multiple output ports. In the example of FIG. 134, the multiple output ports are shown as a first output port 61, a second output port 62, and a third output port 63, but in reality, other output ports also exist.

The first output port 61, the second output port 62, and the third output port 63 each have eight output terminals D0 to D7. Of the eight output terminals D0 to D7 of the first output port 61, seven output terminals D0 to D6 output light-emitting signals S0 to S6, respectively. Of the eight output terminals D0 to D7 of the second output port 62, eight output terminals D0 to D7 output light-emitting signals S10 to S17, respectively. In this way, the light-emitting signals S0 to S6 and the light-emitting signals S10 to S17 are output separately (from different output ports). Of the eight output terminals D0 to D7 of the third output port 63, four output terminals D0 to D3 output selection signals DG1 to DG4, respectively.

The selection signal DG is a signal for selecting (designating) the DG of the light-emitting unit to be illuminated. The light-emitting signals S0 to S6 are signals that designate the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting unit included in the DG selected by the selection signal DG out of the six DGs in the first DG group. The light-emitting signals S10 to S17 are signals that designate the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting unit included in the DG selected by the selection signal DG out of the four DGs in the second DG group.

First, we will explain the first output port 61.

The signal line from the output terminal D0 of the first output port 61 is connected to the segments A of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the 1BET LED of DG3 of the first DG group. The light emission signal S0 is output from the output terminal D0 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S0 is input to the segments A of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the 1BET LED of DG3 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D1 of the first output port 61 is connected to the segments B of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the 2BET LED of DG3 of the first DG group. The light emission signal S1 is output from the output terminal D1 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S1 is input to the segments B of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the 2BET LED of DG3 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D2 of the first output port 61 is connected to the segments C of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the 3BET LED of DG3 of the first DG group. The light emission signal S2 is output from the output terminal D2 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S2 is input to the segments C of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the 3BET LED of DG3 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D3 of the first output port 61 is connected to the segments D of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the replay lamp of DG3 of the first DG group. The light emission signal S3 is output from the output terminal D3 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S3 is input to the segments D of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the replay lamp of DG3 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D4 of the first output port 61 is connected to the segments E of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and to the outer end signal lamp of DG3 of the first DG group. The light emission signal S4 is output from the output terminal D4 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S4 is input to the segments E of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and to the outer end signal lamp of DG3 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D5 of the first output port 61 is connected to the segments F of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the turn-on possible lamp of DG3 of the first DG group. The light emission signal S5 is output from the output terminal D5 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S5 is input to the segments F of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the turn-on possible lamp of DG3 of the first DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D6 of the first output port 61 is connected to the segments G of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the start enable lamp of DG3 of the first DG group. The light emission signal S6 is output from the output terminal D6 of the first output port 61 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S6 is input to the segments G of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group, and the start enable lamp of DG3 of the first DG group.

In addition, output terminal D7 of the first output port 61 is unused.

Next, we will explain the second output port 62.

A signal line from the output terminal D0 of the second output port 62 is connected to the segments A of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light emission signal S10 is output from the output terminal D0 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S10 is input to the segments A of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D1 of the second output port 62 is connected to the segments B of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light emission signal S11 is output from the output terminal D1 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S11 is input to the segments B of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D2 of the second output port 62 is connected to the segments C of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light emission signal S12 is output from the output terminal D2 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S12 is input to the segments C of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D3 of the second output port 62 is connected to each of the segments D of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group. The light emission signal S13 is output from the output terminal D3 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S13 is input to each of the segments D of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D4 of the second output port 62 is connected to the segments E of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light emission signal S14 is output from the output terminal D4 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S14 is input to the segments E of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D5 of the second output port 62 is connected to the segments F of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light emission signal S15 is output from the output terminal D5 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S15 is input to the segments F of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D6 of the second output port 62 is connected to each of the segments G of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group. The light emission signal S16 is output from the output terminal D6 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S16 is input to each of the segments G of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D7 of the second output port 62 is connected to the segments DP of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group. The light emission signal S17 is output from the output terminal D7 of the second output port 62 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the light emission signal S17 is input to the segments DP of each of DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group.

Next, we will explain the third output port 63.

The signal line from the output terminal D0 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of DG1 of the first DG group and the anode of DG1 of the second DG group. The selection signal DG1 is output from the output terminal D0 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the selection signal DG1 is input to the anode of DG1 of the first DG group and the anode of DG1 of the second DG group.

A signal line from the output terminal D1 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of DG2 of the first DG group and the anode of DG2 of the second DG group. The selection signal DG2 is output from the output terminal D1 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the selection signal DG2 is input to the anode of DG2 of the first DG group and the anode of DG2 of the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D2 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of DG3 of the first DG group and the anode of DG3 of the second DG group. The selection signal DG3 is output from the output terminal D2 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the selection signal DG3 is input to the anode of DG3 of the first DG group and the anode of DG3 of the second DG group.

The signal line from the output terminal D3 of the third output port 63 is connected to the anode of DG4 of the first DG group and the anode of DG4 of the second DG group. The selection signal DG4 is output from the output terminal D3 of the third output port 63 under the control of the main control unit 161. Therefore, the selection signal DG4 is input to the anode of DG4 of the first DG group and the anode of DG4 of the second DG group.

The output terminals D4, D5, D6 and D7 of the third output port 63 are all unused. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 134, the selection signals DG1 to DG4 are common to the first and second DG groups. In other words, the selection signals DG1 to DG4 are shared by the first and second DG groups. If the number of DGs differs between the first and second DG groups, the selection signal DG may be shared for some of the DGs of the first and second DG groups. This simplifies the configuration for controlling the DGs of the first and second DG groups by sharing the selection signal DG for some of the DGs of the first and second DG groups when the number of DGs differs between the first and second DG groups.

Furthermore, each of the output terminals D0 to D6 of the first output port 61 corresponds to a light-emitting unit to which the light-emitting signal output from each of the output terminals D0 to D6 is input. Furthermore, each of the output terminals D0 to D7 of the second output port 62 corresponds to a light-emitting unit to which the light-emitting signal output from each of the output terminals D0 to D7 is input.

For example, the output terminal D0 of the first output port 61 corresponds to each of the segment A of DG1 of the first DG group, the segment A of DG2 of the first DG group, the segment A of DG3 of the first DG group, the segment A of DG4 of the first DG group, the 1BETLED of DG5 of the first DG group, and the segment A of DG6 of the first DG group. The output terminal D0 of the second output port 62 corresponds to each of the segment A of DG1 of the second DG group, the segment A of DG2 of the second DG group, the segment A of DG3 of the second DG group, and the segment A of DG4 of the second DG group. In FIG. 134, the signal lines from the output terminals D0 to D6 of the first output port 61 and the signal lines from the output terminals D0 to D7 of the second output port 62 are omitted to simplify the drawing.

In addition, the unused output terminals (NC: Non-Connect), i.e., D7 of the first output port 61 and D4 to D7 of the third output port 63, are connected to ground in this embodiment. No signal lines are wired between these unused output terminals and the light emitting units.

The anode of each DG is a common anode that is common to the cathodes of each of the light-emitting elements included in that DG. For example, the anode of DG1 in the first DG group is a common anode that is common to the cathodes of each of the first-digit segments A to G of the game support display 12.

The main control unit 161 executes bit control (8-bit control) for the control of the first output port 61, the second output port 62, and the third output port 63. For the selection signal DG output from the third output port 63, for example, when outputting the selection signal DG1, the main control unit 161 executes bit control of "00000001", and when outputting the selection signal DG3, the main control unit 161 executes bit control of "00000100". In addition, of the 8-digit bit notation, the first digit corresponds to the control of the output terminal D0 of each output port, and the eighth digit corresponds to the control of the output terminal D7 of each output port.

When segments A of DG1, DG2, and DG4 of the first DG group are illuminated, the light emission signal S0 is output from the output terminal D0 of the first output port 61, and bit control of "00000001" is executed. When segments A of DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group are illuminated, the light emission signal S10 is output from the output terminal D0 of the second output port 62, and bit control of "00000001" is executed.

When a selection signal DG is output from the third output port 63, the selection signal DG is input to the anode of the corresponding DG. Furthermore, when a light emission signal S is output from the first output port 61, the light emission signal S is input to the cathode of the corresponding light-emitting unit among the DGs in the first DG group. When the light emission signal S is input to the cathode of the light-emitting unit, the selection signal DG input to the anode flows as a current to the cathode. In this way, a current flows from the anode to the cathode, causing the light-emitting unit to which the light emission signal S is input to emit light.

When the light emission signal S is output from the second output port 62, the light emission signal S is input to the cathode of the corresponding light-emitting unit among the DGs of the second DG group. When the light emission signal S is input to the cathode of the light-emitting unit, the selection signal DG input to the anode flows as a current to the cathode. In this way, a current flows from the anode to the cathode, causing the light-emitting unit to which the light emission signal S is input to emit light.

In this way, the selection signals DG1 to DG4 output from the third output port 63 can be said to be signals for selecting (designating) the DG for which the light-emitting unit is to emit light. Also, the light-emitting signals S0 to S6 output from the first output port 61 and the light-emitting signals S10 to S17 output from the second output port 62 can be said to be signals for designating the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting unit included in the DG selected by the selection signal DG.

In addition, in FIG. 134, the signal lines between each output terminal and the corresponding light-emitting unit may be directly connected, or indirectly connected (for example, via a board such as a relay board).

The slot machine 2 can be in a normal state, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. The normal state refers to a state in which a game is being played, or a state in which a game is being waited for (for example, a state in which a demo screen is being displayed). In the following, the state of the DG in which the light-emitting part can emit light (a state in which light can be emitted) is referred to as an "emission-enabled state," and the state in which the light-emitting part cannot emit light is referred to as a "non-emission state."

In the normal state, DG1 to DG3 of the first DG group and DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group are in a light emitting state, and the other DGs are in a non-light emitting state. In the setting change state and setting confirmation state, DG1, DG2, DG4 of the first DG group and DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group are in a light emitting state, and the other DGs are in a non-light emitting state. As a modified example, in the setting change state and setting confirmation state, DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group may be in a non-light emitting state. Also, in the setting change state and setting confirmation state, DG1 to DG3 of the first DG group may be in a non-light emitting state.

All of DG1 to DG3 in the first DG group are mounted on a display board. The display board is attached inside the slot machine 2 so that the light-emitting elements in DG1 to DG3 are exposed to the outside (see the game information display unit 90 in FIG. 1). DG4 in the first DG group is mounted on the main control board 16. DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group are mounted on the main control board 16. In FIG. 134, DG4 in the first DG group, DG1 to DG4 in the second DG group, and the main control board 16 are shown separately, but in reality, they are mounted on the main control board 16.

The light-emitting units included in the DGs of the first DG group are light-emitting units related to the progress of the game. Therefore, the processing to the first output port 61, which is the output port corresponding to the first DG group (processing to create a light-emitting signal for the first DG group), is processing executed by an in-capacity program. Hereinafter, the processing executed by an in-capacity program is referred to as "in-capacity processing."

On the other hand, the light-emitting elements included in the DGs of the second DG group are light-emitting elements that are not involved in the progress of the game. Therefore, the processing to the second output port 62, which is the output port corresponding to the second DG group (processing to create a light-emitting signal for the second DG group), is processing executed by an off-capacity program. Hereinafter, the processing executed by the off-capacity program will be referred to as "off-capacity processing."

In this way, in-capacity processing and out-of-capacity processing can be separated according to the output port, which reduces the processing burden compared to gaming machines that have a mixture of in-capacity processing and out-of-capacity processing for a single output port.

[Signal switching processing]
135 is a flowchart of the signal switching process executed by the main control unit 161. This signal switching process is executed by a timer interrupt process (main) that is executed every predetermined period (0.56 ms in this embodiment).

First, in Sp1, the main control unit 161 clears the selection signal DG from the third output port 63. Here, in this embodiment, "clearing the signal" means executing bit control of "00000000", which is all "0", for the output port that is outputting the signal. For example, clearing the selection signal DG means executing bit control of "00000000" for the third output port 63.

Next, in Sp2, the light emission signal of the first output port 61 (i.e., the light emission signal of the DG of the first DG group) is cleared. Next, in Sp3, bit control is executed for the first output port 61 to update and set the light emission signal of the first output port 61 (i.e., the light emission signal of the DG of the first DG group). Sp2 and Sp3 are executed by in-capacity processing.

Next, in Sp4, the light emission signal of the second output port 62 (i.e., the light emission signal of the DG of the second DG group) is cleared. Next, in Sp5, bit control is executed for the second output port 62 to update and set the light emission signal of the second output port 62 (i.e., the light emission signal of the DG of the second DG group). Sp4 and Sp5 are executed by out-of-capacity processing.

Next, in Sp6, bit control is performed on the third output port 63 to update and set the selection signal DG from the third output port 63. This bit control causes the updated selection signal to be output from the third output port 63. The selection signal DG is output from an output terminal set in the selection signal area of RAM 161c. Selection signal numbers 0 to 3 are assigned to the output terminals D0 to D3, respectively. When the selection signal number is set to 0, the selection signal DG1 is output from the output terminal D0. When the selection signal number is set to 1, the selection signal DG2 is output from the output terminal D1. When the selection signal number is set to 2, the selection signal DG3 is output from the output terminal D2. When the selection signal number is set to 3, the selection signal DG4 is output from the output terminal D3. In Sp6, 1 is added to the selection signal number set in the selection signal area, and when the selection signal number after the addition exceeds 3, the selection signal number is corrected to 1. As a result, the selection signal number is updated every 0.56 ms in the order 0, 1, 2, 3, 0, 1, 2, 3, etc., and accordingly, the selection signals are repeatedly output in the order of selection signal DG1, selection signal DG2, selection signal DG3, and selection signal DG4.

In addition, the output of the updated light emission signal from the first output port 61, the output of the updated light emission signal from the second output port 62, and the output of the updated selection signal from the third output port 63 each continue until the next signal switching process is executed (after 0.56 ms has elapsed).

Next, the process of FIG. 135 will be explained using a specific example. In this specific example, a case where "14" is displayed on the game support display 12 and "0723" is displayed on the role ratio monitor 89 in the normal state will be explained. Here, in this case, the display of "14" on the game support display 12 and the display of "23" in the first and second digits on the role ratio monitor 89 will be explained. In reality, in addition to the game support display 12 and the role ratio monitor 89, the status LED (DG3 of the first DG group) also lights up depending on the game status. Also, while the role ratio monitor 89 lights up the segment DP, the game support display 12 and the setting value display 24 do not light up the segment DP.

First, the process for displaying "4" in the first digit (DG1 of the first DG group) of the game aid display 12 and "3" in the first digit (DG1 of the second DG group) of the winning combination monitor 89 will be described. In this process, first, a selection signal DG1 is output from the third output port 63 to select DG1 of the first DG group and DG1 of the second DG group as DGs that will light up the segments (light-emitting sections). In addition, the bit control for outputting the selection signal DG1 from the third output port 63 becomes "00000001", and this bit control is executed for the third output port 63.

During the period when the selection signal DG1 is being output from the third output port 63, the first output port 61 executes a process for displaying "4" on DG1 of the first DG group, that is, a process for illuminating segments B, C, F, and G. The process for illuminating these segments outputs light-emitting signals S1, S2, S6, and S7 from the first output port 61, and does not output other light-emitting signals S. In other words, bit control of "01100110" is executed for the first output port 61.

In addition, during the period when the selection signal DG1 is being output from the third output port 63, the second output port 62 executes a process for displaying "3" on DG1 of the second DG group, that is, a process for lighting up segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment G, and segment DP. The process for lighting up these segments outputs light-emitting signal S10, light-emitting signal S11, light-emitting signal S12, light-emitting signal S13, light-emitting signal S16, and light-emitting signal S17 from the second output port 62, and does not output other light-emitting signals S. In other words, bit control of "11001111" is executed for the second output port 62.

In this way, to display "4" in the first digit of the credit display (DG1 of the first DG group) and "3" in the first digit of the role ratio monitor 89 (DG1 of the second DG group), bit control of "01100110" is executed for the first output port 61, bit control of "11001111" is executed for the second output port 62, and bit control of "00000001" is executed for the third output port 63.

When this state continues for 0.56 ms, the signal switching process shown in FIG. 135 is executed. In Sp1, the selection signal DG is cleared. Specifically, the bit control of "00000001" for the third output port 63 is changed to the bit control of "0000000".

Next, in Sp2, the light emission signal of the first output port 61 is cleared. Specifically, the bit control of "01100110" for the first output port 61 is changed to the bit control of "0000000".

Next, in Sp3, bit control is executed for the first output port 61 so as to update the light emission signal of the first output port 61 (i.e., the light emission signal of the DG of the first DG group). Here, a process is executed to update the light emission signal of the first output port 61 so as to newly display "1" on DG2 of the first DG group, that is, a process to illuminate segments B and C. The process of illuminating these segments outputs light emission signals S2 and S3 from the first output port 61, and does not output other light emission signals S. In other words, bit control is executed for the first output port 61 to update it from "0000000" to "00000110".

Next, in Sp4, the light emission signal of the second output port 62 is cleared. Specifically, the bit control of "11001111" for the second output port 62 is changed to the bit control of "0000000."

Next, in Sp5, bit control is executed for the second output port 62 so as to update and set the light emission signal of the second output port 62 (i.e., the light emission signal of the DG of the second DG group). Here, a process is executed to newly display "2" on DG2 of the second DG group, that is, a process to illuminate segment A, segment B, segment D, segment E, segment G, and segment DP. The process of illuminating these segments outputs light emission signal S10, light emission signal S11, light emission signal S13, light emission signal S14, light emission signal S16, and light emission signal S17 from the second output port 62, and does not output other light emission signals S. In other words, bit control is executed for the second output port 62 to update from "0000000" to "11011011".

Next, in Sp6, bit control is executed for the third output port 63 to update and set the selection signal DG. Here, bit control is executed for the third output port 63 to update it from "0000000" to "00000010".

By executing such processing, "4" is displayed in the first digit of the gaming aid display 12, and "3" is displayed in the first digit of the role ratio monitor 89, and by the signal switching processing executed after 0.56 ms has elapsed, the display of "4" in the first digit of the gaming aid display 12 ends, and "1" is displayed in the second digit of the gaming aid display 12. At the same time, the display of "3" in the first digit of the role ratio monitor 89 ends, and "2" is displayed in the second digit of the role ratio monitor 89.

Then, when 0.56 ms has elapsed since the start of the DG signal switching process, the next signal switching process is executed. In this signal switching process, new values (in this case, "8" is displayed on DG3 of the first DG group and "7" is displayed on DG4 of the second DG group) are displayed on DG3 of the first DG group (the first digit 7-segment display of the gaming aid display 12) and DG3 of the second DG group (the third digit 7-segment display of the winning ratio monitor 89).

Figure 136 is a diagram for explaining the switching of the selection signal DG. Figures 136(A) to 136(F) respectively show the output of the selection signals DG1 to DG4 from the output terminals D0 to D3 of the third output port 63.

As shown in FIG. 136(A) to FIG. 136(D), the main control unit 161 switches the selection signal DG to be output in the following order (predetermined order): selection signal DG1 (00000001) → selection signal DG2 (00000010) → selection signal DG3 (00000100) → selection signal DG4 (00001000) → selection signal DG1 (00000001) → selection signal DG2 (00000010) ... In addition, the period during which one selection signal DG is output is a predetermined period, which is 0.56 ms in this embodiment. In other words, the main control unit 161 switches the selection signal DG to be output every 0.56 ms. For example, when the selection signal DG1 is output, DG1 of the first DG group and DG1 of the second DG group are selected (designated).

In addition, in each of Figures 136(A) to 136(D), the process of lowering the selection signal corresponds to Sp1 in Figure 135, and the process of raising the selection signal corresponds to Sp6.

The main control unit 161 also switches the output of the light emission signal S from the first output port 61 (Sp2 and Sp3) and also switches the output of the light emission signal S from the second output port 62 (STp and Sp5) in synchronization with the switching of the output of the selection signal DG from the third output port 63.

When any of the selection signals DG1 to DG4 is output from the third output port 63, the DG in the first DG group that corresponds to the selection signal DG being output is enabled to emit light, and the DG in the second DG group that corresponds to the selection signal DG being output is enabled to emit light.

In addition, in the normal state, DG4 (setting value display 24) of the first DG is in a non-illuminating state. Therefore, in the normal state, while the signal DG4 is being output from the third output port 63, non-illuminating bit control is executed for the first output port 61.

In addition, in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, DG3 of the first DG group is in a non-light emitting state. Therefore, in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, during the period when the selection signal DG2 is output from the third output port 63, non-light emitting bit control is executed for the first output port 61.

Furthermore, if the first DG group and the second DG group are configured with different numbers of DGs, there is no DG in the other DG group that corresponds to a specific selection signal that selects a DG in one DG group. In this case, in the bit control when a specific selection signal is output, non-light-emitting bit control can be executed to prevent any of the segments of the DGs in the other DG group from lighting up when a specific is output. This non-light-emitting bit control is bit control of "00000000", which means that all bits are 0. Therefore, when a specific selection signal is output, the segments included in the other DG group are turned off.

As explained in Figures 135 and 136, the method of switching the DG that causes the light-emitting unit to light up every short period of time (0.56 ms) to make it appear as if multiple DGs are being illuminated simultaneously is also referred to below as "dynamic illumination." If all DGs were to be made to light up simultaneously without adopting a configuration that performs dynamic illumination, it would be necessary to provide independent wiring for each DG and each light-emitting unit. However, setting it up in this way would increase the number of wirings, increasing costs and the assembly burden. In this embodiment, this problem can be solved by performing dynamic illumination.

In addition, by executing the dynamic lighting of this embodiment, the DG to be illuminated is switched sequentially by the signal switching process, which is an interrupt process executed every short period of time (0.56 ms in this embodiment). This makes it possible to make it appear almost the same as if multiple DGs were illuminated simultaneously (as if they were illuminating simultaneously to the human eye). Also, by using different LEDs to illuminate for each timer interrupt process (main), it is possible to reduce power consumption and prevent burn-in of the light-emitting section. Furthermore, by repeating point illumination, it is possible to increase brightness compared to LEDs that are constantly illuminated.

[Initialization of selected signal number]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 137, in the setting change state, DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group are in the first light emission mode. In detail, the first and second digits of the game support display 12 are in the light emission mode in which "-" is displayed, and the 1BET LED 14, 2BET LED 15, 3BET LED 16, the game support display 12, the replay lamp 91, the outer end signal lamp 92, the insert possible lamp 93, and the start valid lamp 94 (hereinafter referred to as game information display) are in the off state, and the setting value display 24 is in the light emission mode in which the setting value is displayed. Also, DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group are in the light emission mode in which the role ratio information is displayed in the first to fourth digits of the role ratio monitor 89.

When the setting change state ends and the state transitions to the normal state, DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group switch from the first light-emitting state to the second light-emitting state. In more detail, the first digit of the game play assistance display 12 becomes a light-emitting state in which "0" is displayed, the second digit becomes unlit, the game information display becomes a light-emitting state in which game information in the normal state is displayed, and the setting value display 24 becomes unlit. Meanwhile, DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group continue to be light-emitting in which role ratio information is displayed in the first to fourth digits of the role ratio monitor 89.

As described above, the selection signal number is updated every 0.56 ms in the order of 0, 1, 2, 3, 0, 1, 2, 3, ... to control the illumination of the DGs of the first DG group and the DGs of the second DG group, and accordingly, the selection signals are repeatedly output in the order of selection signal DG1, selection signal DG2, selection signal DG3, and selection signal DG4 to switch the DGs to be lit among DGs 1 to 4 of the first DG group and DGs 1 to 4 of the second DG group. However, when transitioning from the setting change state to the normal state, the main control unit 161 initializes the selection signal number and updates it to 0 regardless of the selection signal number set at that time. Therefore, when transitioning from the setting change state to the normal state, regardless of which of the selection signals DG1, DG2, DG3, and DG4 is displayed, the selection signals are output again in the order of selection signal DG1, DG2, DG3, .... In addition, when transitioning from the setting change state to the normal state, not only is the selection signal number initialized, but the light emission signals S0 to S6 output from the first and second output ports are also initialized, and the output of the light emission signals begins again.

In this embodiment, when the DGs of the first DG group switch from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode as a result of transitioning from the setting change state to the normal state, the selection signal number is initialized and switching of the selection signal begins again from selection signal DG1, so that the light-emitting mode of the DGs of the first DG group can be prevented from being disturbed. In particular, DG1 to DG3 of the first DG group are DGs located in positions that are easily visible from the outside, and the light-emitting mode of these DGs can be prevented from being disturbed.

In addition, when the state changes from the setting change state to the normal state, not only is the selection signal number initialized, but the first and second output ports, i.e., the light emission signals S0 to S6, are also initialized and the output of the light emission signals starts again, so that the light emission state of the DGs in the first DG group can be prevented from being disturbed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 138, immediately after power is turned on, DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group are in the light emission mode before the power failure. In detail, for example, if the normal state was displayed before the power failure and an instruction number (e.g., "-3") was displayed on the game support display 12, the game support display 12 will display "3" in the first digit and "-" in the second digit, the game information display will be in a light emission mode where game information is displayed, and the setting value display will be turned off. Also, DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group will be in a third light emission mode where a test pattern is displayed in the first to fourth digits of the role ratio monitor 89.

When five seconds have passed since the power was turned on, DG1 to DG4 of the first DG group continue to emit light in the same manner as before the power was turned off. Meanwhile, DG1 to DG4 of the second DG group switch from the third emission mode to the fourth emission mode, in which the role ratio information is displayed in the first to fourth digits of the role ratio monitor 89.

In this case, unlike when transitioning from a setting change state to a normal state, the main control unit 161 maintains the selection signal number without initializing it, and continues to control the selection signal switching that is currently being performed.

In this embodiment, when the DG of the second DG group switches from the third light-emitting mode to the fourth light-emitting mode as the state transitions from immediately after power-on to the state 5 seconds after power-on, the selection signal number is maintained without being initialized, and the selection signal switching control continues, so that even when the light-emitting mode of the DG of the second DG group switches as the state transitions from immediately after power-on to the state 5 seconds after power-on, it is possible to prevent the light-emitting mode of the DG of the first DG group from being disturbed. In particular, it is possible to prevent the disturbance of the light-emitting mode of the DG of the first DG group, which is easily noticeable from the outside, from occurring due to the switching of the light-emitting mode of the DG of the second DG group, which is less noticeable from the outside.

In this embodiment, the control of the display controlled by the main control unit 161 has been described, but the above control may also be applied to the control of the display controlled by the medal count control unit 171 or the performance control unit 151.

[Modification]
The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned first and second embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. Modifications of the above-mentioned embodiments that can be applied to the present invention will be described below.

[Regarding the value set in the second Q register]
In the first and second embodiments, it has been described that the first and second Q registers are used for the LDQ instruction, with "F0" set in the first Q register and "F3" set in the second Q register. That is, as shown in the address map of the memory area used by the main control unit 161, the first Q register used for executing the internal program is set with "F0", which is the upper address of the internal RAM area, and the second Q register used for executing the external program is set with "F3", which is the upper address of the external RAM area. This is because it is considered that the internal RAM area is frequently referenced when the internal program is executed, and the external RAM area is frequently referenced when the external program is executed.

However, in a modified example, for example, "F0", which is the upper address of the internal RAM area, may be set in both the first Q register and the second Q register. When "F0" is set in the second Q register, the LDQ instruction can be used when referencing the internal RAM area from an external program. Also, since the same upper address is set in both the first Q register and the second Q register, program design becomes easier. In other words, a program can be designed without distinguishing between handling the LDQ instruction between internal and external programs.

[Serial communication circuit]
In the above description, the main control unit 161 and the medal count control unit 171 are integrated, and the main control unit 161, medal count control unit 171, performance control unit 151, and connection terminal board 1000 are connected by a serial communication circuit. However, at least a part of the communication between the main control unit 161, medal count control unit 171, performance control unit 151, and connection terminal board 1000 may be parallel communication. This can increase the communication speed.

[Replay winning judgment in post-ball control processing]
As shown in FIG. 80, in the post-ball control process, the main control unit 161 performs a replay winning judgment in Sv1. As a result, when the replay display result is derived, the update processes of Sv2 to Sv5 can be omitted, and the processing burden can be reduced. However, the processes to be omitted may be only Sv3 and Sv4. That is, even if it is determined that the replay has won, the read process (Sv2) from the RAM 161c to the register and the write process (Sv5) from the register to the RAM 161c are executed. As a result, the main control unit 161 can execute the same processing contents when the replay has won and when the replay has not won, and can stabilize the program. In other words, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unexpected errors caused by processing branching.

[Mode allocation in AT state]
In the above, an example in which the AT1 state includes three modes has been described, but the number of modes may be four or more. Also, mode allocation may be performed not only in the AT1 state but also in the AT2 state. The main control unit 161 determines which mode to control to when controlled to the AT1 state or the AT2 state by using the difference count value.

[About gaming machines]
In the first and second embodiments, the present invention is applied to a slot machine that does not require any medals, but it may be applied to a slot machine that sets the number of bets using medals or game balls as gaming value. In such a slot machine, medals owned by a player may be saved as credits.

In addition, in Examples 1 and 2, the present invention is applied to a slot machine 2, which is an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be applied to any gaming machine that performs a specific game, such as a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game by shooting a gaming ball into a game area, or even a general gaming machine other than a slot machine or a pachinko gaming machine.

2 Slot machine 3 Card unit 51 Liquid crystal display 52 Performance effect LED
53, 54 Speaker 151 Production control unit 152 Display control circuit (VDP)
157 Sound control unit 161 Main control unit 161c RAM
171 Medal count control unit

Claims (1)

A plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information,
A gaming machine in which a display result is derived after the variable display unit is variably displayed , and a winning prize can be generated according to a display result combination which is a combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units,
A derivation operation means operated by a player to derive a display result;
A pre-determination means for determining a display result combination that is allowed to be derived;
Image display means;
a specific suggestion effect execution means for executing a specific suggestion effect that displays a specific suggestion image suggesting a specific operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a display result combination corresponding to the type of the specific result in a game in which the result determined by the pre-determination means is any one of a plurality of types of specific results;
a special suggestion effect execution means for executing a special suggestion effect that displays a special suggestion image suggesting a special operation mode of the derivation operation means for deriving a special display result combination in a game in which a result determined by the pre-determining means is a special result different from the plurality of specific results;
an image data designation means for designating image data for displaying an image;
Equipped with
The image data designation means is capable of designating a layer of the image data together with the image data;
When multiple image data are specified, if the layers of the multiple image data are different, images based on the respective image data are displayed overlapping each other according to the priority of the layers, and if the layers of the multiple image data are the same, an image based on any one of the multiple image data is displayed;
A gaming machine which specifies the same layer when specifying image data for displaying a specific suggestion image when executing the specific suggestion performance in a game in which the determination result of the pre-determination means is any one of the multiple types of specific results , and when specifying image data for displaying the special suggestion image when executing the special suggestion performance in a game in which the determination result of the pre-determination means is the special result.

Images